Uns 1 LW

UNS-1Lw
Flight Management System
Installation Manual
The information contained herein is subject to Export Administration Regulations (“EAR”),

15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
This publication is available at www.uasc.com.
©2007, 2011 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
3260 East Universal Way

Tucson, AZ 85756
(520) 295-2300 (800) 321-5253 • 34-60-52 3 February 2011
The document reference is online, please check the correspondence between the online documentation and the printed version.
UNS-1Lw Flight Management System Installation Manual
Record of Revisions
Rev. No. Issue Date Insertion Date Initials
Original 27 August 2007 27 August 2007 UASC

1 1 October 2007 1 October 2007 UASC
2 3 February 2011 3 February 2011 UASC
Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of revision, insert and remove pages
according to the List of Effective Pages. Then enter on this page the revision number, issue date,
insertion date and your initials.
Page 1
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Record of Temporary Changes

Change No. Issue Date Insertion Date & Initials Removal Date & Initials
1 26 April 2011 26 April 2011 / UASC

2 11 July
July 2011 11 July 2011 / UASC 10 September2012 / UASC
3 15 July 2011 15 July 2011 / UASC 20 November 2013 / UASC
4 22 November 2011 22 November 2011 / UASC
5 22 November 2011 22 November 2011 / UASC
6 2 December 2011 2 December 2011 / UASC 10 September2012 / UASC
7 19 April 2012 19 April 2012 / UASC
8 10 September 2012 10 September 2012 / UASC 20 December 2012 / UASC
9 10 September 2012 10 September 2012 / UASC
12 10 September
September 2012 10 September 2012 / UASC
13 20 December 2012 20 December 2012 / UASC
14 19 February 2013 19 February 2013 / UASC
15 9 October 2013 9 October 2013 / UASC
16 20 November 2013
2013 20 November 2013 / UASC
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. Also,
record the removal of each temporary change.
Page 1
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Change No. Issue Date Insertion Date & Initials Removal Date & Initials
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. Also,
record the removal of each temporary change.
Page 2
34-60-52 3 February 2011
List of Effective Pages

SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE
Title Page 3 Feb/11 25 3 Feb/11

26 3 Feb/11
Record of Revisions 1 3 Feb/11 27 3 Feb/11
28 3 Feb/11
Record of Temporary 1 3 Feb/11 29 3 Feb/11
Changes 2 3 Feb/11 30 3 Feb/11
31 3 Feb/11
List of Effective Pages 1 3 Feb/11
2 3 Feb/11 FAA Approval 101 3 Feb/11
3 3 Feb/11 102 3 Feb/11
4 3 Feb/11 103 3 Feb/11
104 3 Feb/11
Table of Contents 1 3 Feb/11 105 3 Feb/11
2 3 Feb/11 106 3 Feb/11
3 3 Feb/11 107 3 Feb/11
4 3 Feb/11 108 3 Feb/11
5 3 Feb/11 109 3 Feb/11
6 3 Feb/11 110 3 Feb/11
111 3 Feb/11
Introduction 1 3 Feb/11 112 3 Feb/11
2 3 Feb/11 113 3 Feb/11
114 3 Feb/11
Description and 1 3 Feb/11 115 3 Feb/11
Operation 2 3 Feb/11 116 3 Feb/11
3 3 Feb/11 117 3 Feb/11
4 3 Feb/11 118 3 Feb/11
5 3 Feb/11 119 3 Feb/11
6 3 Feb/11 120 3 Feb/11
7 3 Feb/11 121 3 Feb/11
8 3 Feb/11 122 3 Feb/11
9 3 Feb/11 123 3 Feb/11
10 3 Feb/11 124 3 Feb/11
11 3 Feb/11 125 3 Feb/11
12 3 Feb/11 126 3 Feb/11
13 3 Feb/11 127 3 Feb/11
14 3 Feb/11 128 3 Feb/11
15 3 Feb/11 129 3 Feb/11
16 3 Feb/11 130 3 Feb/11
17 3 Feb/11
18 3 Feb/11 Equipment 201 3 Feb/11
19 3 Feb/11 Specifications 202 3 Feb/11
20 3 Feb/11 203 3 Feb/11
21 3 Feb/11 204 3 Feb/11
22 3 Feb/11 205 3 Feb/11
23 3 Feb/11 206 3 Feb/11
24 3 Feb/11 207 3 Feb/11
Page 1
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 3 February 2011
208 3 Feb/11 316 3 Feb/11

209 3 Feb/11 317 3 Feb/11
210 3 Feb/11 318 3 Feb/11
211 3 Feb/11 319 3 Feb/11
212 3 Feb/11 320 3 Feb/11
213 3 Feb/11 321 3 Feb/11
214 3 Feb/11 322 3 Feb/11
215 3 Feb/11 323 3 Feb/11
216 3 Feb/11 324 3 Feb/11
217 3 Feb/11 325 3 Feb/11
218 3 Feb/11 326 3 Feb/11
219 3 Feb/11 327 3 Feb/11
220 3 Feb/11 328 3 Feb/11
221 3 Feb/11 329 3 Feb/11
222 3 Feb/11 330 3 Feb/11
223 3 Feb/11 331 3 Feb/11
224 3 Feb/11 332 3 Feb/11
225 3 Feb/11 333 3 Feb/11
226 3 Feb/11 334 3 Feb/11
227 3 Feb/11 335 3 Feb/11
228 3 Feb/11 336 3 Feb/11
229 3 Feb/11 337 3 Feb/11
230 3 Feb/11 338 3 Feb/11
231 3 Feb/11 339 3 Feb/11
232 3 Feb/11 340 3 Feb/11
233 3 Feb/11 341 3 Feb/11
234 3 Feb/11 342 3 Feb/11
235 3 Feb/11 343 3 Feb/11
236 3 Feb/11 344 3 Feb/11
237 3 Feb/11 345 3 Feb/11
238 3 Feb/11 346 3 Feb/11
239 3 Feb/11 347 3 Feb/11
240 3 Feb/11 348 3 Feb/11
349 3 Feb/11
Installation And Wiring 301 3 Feb/11 350 3 Feb/11
302 3 Feb/11 351 3 Feb/11
303 3 Feb/11 352 3 Feb/11
304 3 Feb/11 353 3 Feb/11
305 3 Feb/11 354 3 Feb/11
306 3 Feb/11 355 3 Feb/11
307 3 Feb/11 356 3 Feb/11
308 3 Feb/11 357 3 Feb/11
309 3 Feb/11 358 3 Feb/11
310 3 Feb/11 359 3 Feb/11
311 3 Feb/11 360 3 Feb/11
312 3 Feb/11 361 3 Feb/11
313 3 Feb/11 362 3 Feb/11
314 3 Feb/11 363 3 Feb/11
315 3 Feb/11 364 3 Feb/11
Page 2
34-60-52 3 February 2011
365 3 Feb/11 531 3 Feb/11

366 3 Feb/11 532 3 Feb/11
367 3 Feb/11 533 3 Feb/11
368 3 Feb/11 534 3 Feb/11
369 3 Feb/11 535 3 Feb/11
370 3 Feb/11 536 3 Feb/11
371 3 Feb/11 537 3 Feb/11
372 3 Feb/11 538 3 Feb/11
373 3 Feb/11 539 3 Feb/11
374 3 Feb/11 540 3 Feb/11
375 3 Feb/11 541 3 Feb/11
376 3 Feb/11 542 3 Feb/11
377 3 Feb/11 543 3 Feb/11
378 3 Feb/11 544 3 Feb/11
379 3 Feb/11 545 3 Feb/11
546 3 Feb/11
System Data 401 3 Feb/11 547 3 Feb/11
Installation 548 3 Feb/11
549 3 Feb/11
Maintenance, 501 3 Feb/11 550 3 Feb/11
Checkout, and 502 3 Feb/11 551 3 Feb/11
Troubleshooting 503 3 Feb/11 552 3 Feb/11
504 3 Feb/11 553 3 Feb/11
505 3 Feb/11 554 3 Feb/11
506 3 Feb/11 555 3 Feb/11
507 3 Feb/11 556 3 Feb/11
508 3 Feb/11 557 3 Feb/11
509 3 Feb/11 558 3 Feb/11
510 3 Feb/11 559 3 Feb/11
511 3 Feb/11 560 3 Feb/11
512 3 Feb/11 561 3 Feb/11
513 3 Feb/11 562 3 Feb/11
514 3 Feb/11 563 3 Feb/11
515 3 Feb/11 564 3 Feb/11
516 3 Feb/11 565 3 Feb/11
517 3 Feb/11 566 3 Feb/11
518 3 Feb/11 567 3 Feb/11
519 3 Feb/11 568 3 Feb/11
520 3 Feb/11 569 3 Feb/11
521 3 Feb/11 570 3 Feb/11
522 3 Feb/11 571 3 Feb/11
523 3 Feb/11 572 3 Feb/11
524 3 Feb/11 573 3 Feb/11
525 3 Feb/11 574 3 Feb/11
526 3 Feb/11 575 3 Feb/11
527 3 Feb/11 576 3 Feb/11
528 3 Feb/11 577 3 Feb/11
529 3 Feb/11 578 3 Feb/11
530 3 Feb/11 579 3 Feb/11
Page 3
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 3 February 2011
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
580 3 Feb/11
581 3 Feb/11
Navigation Systems 601 3 Feb/11
Fuel Flow Inputs 701 3 Feb/11
Page 4
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Table of Contents
Record of Revisions ........................................................................................................ 1
Record of Temporary Revisions ..................................................................................... 1
List of Effective Pages .................................................................................................... 1
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................ 1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1
Makeup and Use of This Manual .....................................................................................................1
Application .................................................................................................................................1
Organization ...............................................................................................................................2
Abbreviations and Terminology ......................................................................................................2
Contact Information .........................................................................................................................2
Description and Operation .............................................................................................. 1
Description .......................................................................................................................................1
General .......................................................................................................................................1
System Components...................................................................................................................7
System Interfaces .....................................................................................................................11
FMS Components ....................................................................................................................13
FMS Functions .........................................................................................................................18
Operation........................................................................................................................................25
General .....................................................................................................................................25
Flat Panel Control Display Unit ...............................................................................................25
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) ................................................................................................28
Solid State Data Transfer Unit .................................................................................................28
EFIS Radar Panel (ERP) ..........................................................................................................31
FAA Approval ............................................................................................................ 101
General .........................................................................................................................................101
Applicable TSOs ....................................................................................................................101
Applicable Advisory Circulars...............................................................................................101
Reference Documents ............................................................................................................102
TSO Deviations ......................................................................................................................104
Software Criticality ......................................................................................................................106
Page 1
CONTENTS 3 February 2011
Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness ..................................................................................106
General Information ...............................................................................................................106
Airworthiness Limitations .....................................................................................................107
Environmental Qualification Forms ............................................................................................107
Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement ...............................................................................119
Equipment Specifications ........................................................................................... 201
Equipment Identification..............................................................................................................201
UNS-1Lw FMS Equipment ...................................................................................................201
Compatible Peripheral Equipment .........................................................................................202
Technical Manuals .................................................................................................................203
UNS-1Lw Part Number Matrix..............................................................................................204
Configuration Module ............................................................................................................204
5-Inch FPCDU Part Number Matrix ......................................................................................204
4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-XX) Part Number Matrix ............................................................205
4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-X-XXX) Part Number Matrix .....................................................205
Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU) Part Number Matrix......................................205
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Part Number Matrix .............................................................206
Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU-100) Part Number Matrix ............................................206
Solid State Data Transfer Unit Part Number Matrix .............................................................206
Portable SSDTU Part Number Matrix ...................................................................................206
UNS-1Lw Part Number Configuration ..................................................................................207
Power Specifications ....................................................................................................................209
Equipment Specifications ............................................................................................................210
UNS-1Lw FMS ......................................................................................................................210
5-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................210
4-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................210
LP/LPV Monitor ....................................................................................................................211
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................211
SSDTU ...................................................................................................................................211
Portable SSDTU.....................................................................................................................212
GPS Antenna..........................................................................................................................213
WAAS (SBAS) GPS/Sirius Antenna .....................................................................................214
WAAS (SBAS) GPS/XM Weather and Radio Antenna ........................................................215
WAAS FMS Annunciators ....................................................................................................216
Page 2
Installation Kits ............................................................................................................................218
UNS-1Lw Installation Kit ......................................................................................................218
4-Inch and 5-Inch FPCDU Installation Kit ............................................................................218
DTU-100 Installation Kit .......................................................................................................219
Portable DTU-100 Installation Kit .........................................................................................219
SSDTU Installation Kit ..........................................................................................................220
Portable SSDTU Installation Kit ...........................................................................................220
GPS 10708 Antenna Installation Kit......................................................................................221
GPS 10709/10710 Antenna Installation Kit ..........................................................................221
Required Tools .............................................................................................................................222
Crimping Tools Required ......................................................................................................222
Pin Insertion/Extraction Tools Required ...............................................................................222
Insertion/Extraction Tool Manufacturers .....................................................................................223
Wire and Cable Manufacturers ....................................................................................................223
Alternate Part Vendors .................................................................................................................224
Equipment Drawings ...................................................................................................................225
UNS-1Lw ...............................................................................................................................225
UNS-1Lw 2MCU Rack ..........................................................................................................226
Configuration Module ............................................................................................................227
Configuration Module Installation .........................................................................................227
5-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................228
4-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................230
LP/LPV Monitor ....................................................................................................................234
LP/LPV Monitor 2MCU Rack ...............................................................................................235
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................236
SSDTU ...................................................................................................................................237
GPS Antenna 10708 ...............................................................................................................238
WAAS (SBAS) GPS/Sirius Antenna 10709 ..........................................................................239
WAAS (SBAS) GPS/XM Weather and Radio Antenna 10710 .............................................240
Installation and Wiring ............................................................................................... 301
General .........................................................................................................................................301
Form – Dimensions and Communications .............................................................................301
Sensor/Equipment Compatibility/Selection ...........................................................................301
Electrical Connectors .............................................................................................................307
Remote Annunciators.............................................................................................................307
Page 3
FMS Mounting .......................................................................................................................307
GPS (WAAS) Antenna Mounting .........................................................................................307
Solid State Data Transfer Unit ...............................................................................................310
FMS Interfaces ............................................................................................................................312
Analog Inputs .........................................................................................................................312
Discrete Inputs .......................................................................................................................314
Digital Inputs..........................................................................................................................315
Analog Outputs ......................................................................................................................318
Discrete Outputs.....................................................................................................................320
Digital Outputs .......................................................................................................................322
Pin Assignment ...........................................................................................................................325
UNS-1Lw – All Digital ..........................................................................................................325
UNS-1Lw – ASCB Version A ...............................................................................................330
UNS-1Lw – Analog ...............................................................................................................335
5-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................340
4-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................341
LP/LPV Monitor ...................................................................................................................343
SSDTU ...................................................................................................................................344
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................345
UNS-1Lw Wiring ........................................................................................................................346
Power and Configuration Module ..........................................................................................347
Dual WAAS FMS – Analog Configuration ..........................................................................348
Dual WAAS FMS – Digital Configuration ...........................................................................350
Dual WAAS FMS – EFI-890R Digital Configuration ..........................................................352
LP/LPV Monitor Power Installation ......................................................................................353
Single WAAS FMS – Analog Configuration to LP/LPV Monitor ........................................354
Single WAAS FMS – Digital Configuration to LP/LPV Monitor.........................................355
Single WAAS FMS Analog/Digital Configuration to LP/LPV Monitor ...............................356
4-Inch FPCDU without Video and Graphics .........................................................................358
4-Inch FPCDU with Video and Graphics ..............................................................................359
Dual 4-Inch FPCDU (without Video and Graphics) ..............................................................360
Dual 4-Inch FPCDU with Video and Graphics......................................................................361
Single 5-Inch FPCDU ............................................................................................................363
Dual 5-Inch FPCDU...............................................................................................................364
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................366
Page 4
Portable DTU .........................................................................................................................367
SSDTU ...................................................................................................................................368
SSDTU Installation and DTU-100 Retrofit ...........................................................................369
Portable SSDTU.....................................................................................................................370
Portable SSDTU (Portable DTU-100 Retrofit)......................................................................371
Fuel Flow and Roll Steering ..................................................................................................372
Heading and Radio Tune........................................................................................................373
Analog Configuration ............................................................................................................374
ARINC Input Ports.................................................................................................................375
ARINC Output Ports ..............................................................................................................376
Discrete Inputs .......................................................................................................................377
Discrete Outputs.....................................................................................................................378
ASCB Version A....................................................................................................................379
System Data Installation ............................................................................................. 401
Maintenance, Checkout and Troubleshooting ............................................................ 501
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................501
Installation Checkout ...................................................................................................................502
Ground Test Plan ...................................................................................................................502
Flight Test Plan ......................................................................................................................515
Operational Checkout ..................................................................................................................533
CDU/FMS Self-Test ..............................................................................................................533
CDU Keyboard and Display Offset .......................................................................................537
FMS Configuration Verification ............................................................................................537
Static Test...............................................................................................................................538
Interface Checkout .......................................................................................................................540
HSI Test .................................................................................................................................540
Winds Display (EFIS Only) ...................................................................................................540
DME Interface Test ................................................................................................................540
VOR Test (without RRS) .......................................................................................................541
DTU-100 Test ........................................................................................................................541
SSDTU Test ...........................................................................................................................542
Approach Mode .....................................................................................................................543
Sensor Checkout ..........................................................................................................................544
IRS .........................................................................................................................................544
GPIRS ....................................................................................................................................544
Page 5
LORAN C ..............................................................................................................................545
GPS1 ......................................................................................................................................545
WAAS1 ..................................................................................................................................545
UASC Radio Reference Sensor .............................................................................................546
Air Data ..................................................................................................................................546
Fuel Flow ...............................................................................................................................546
GPIRS Checkout ....................................................................................................................547
UASC GPS Checkout ............................................................................................................552
GPS/WAAS Checkout .................................................................................................................559
FMS Power On Self-Test – Initialization and LPV Annunciation Test.................................559
GPS/WAAS Sensor Evaluation .............................................................................................559
WAAS Flight Plan with LPV Approach ................................................................................560
CDU Display of RNP/ANP....................................................................................................561
GPS/WAAS Dynamic Test ....................................................................................................561
WAAS Antenna Offsets Test .................................................................................................564
Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................................566
Self-Test .................................................................................................................................567
System Failure Messages .......................................................................................................568
Database Update Error Messages...........................................................................................577
Configuration Verification .....................................................................................................578
FMS Self-Test Output Checkout ...........................................................................................579
FMS Output to HSI Checkout................................................................................................579
DIST/GS Checkout ................................................................................................................579
HSI From Checkout ...............................................................................................................579
DIST/BRG Checkout .............................................................................................................579
Roll Steering Checkout ..........................................................................................................580
Input of a Selected Crosstrack Checkout ...............................................................................580
DME Checkout ......................................................................................................................580
Winds Display Checkout .......................................................................................................580
Sensor Checkout ....................................................................................................................580
Navigation Systems .................................................................................................... 601
Fuel Flow Inputs ......................................................................................................... 701
Page 6
Introduction
1. Makeup and Use of this Manual
A. Application
This Technical Manual for the UNS-1Lw is applicable to the components and software
control numbers (SCN) noted below. The SCN is stamped on the component data plate. The
“w” reference in the FMS name implies that these FMS systems are combined with the Wide
Area Augmentation System (WAAS) subsystem.
This Technical Manual is used for installation and basic wiring. Refer to the WAAS FMS
Interface Manual, Report No. 34-60-53 for wiring diagrams covering specific installations.
Refer to the WAAS FMS Configuration Manual, Report No. 34-61-XX, for detailed
FMS/MMMS software configuration instructions.
UNS-1Lw Flight Management System, P/N 3116-X2-111X
Configuration Module, P/N 31921
5-Inch FPCDU, P/N 1018-X-XXX using SCN 10.X and later SCN
4-Inch FPCDU, P/N 1117-XX or 1117-X-XXX using SCN 20.X and later SCN
LP/LPV Monitor, P/N 3116-52-1110, PAS SCN 10.1 and later
NOTE: When an LP/LPV Monitor is used in conjunction with a WAAS FMS to
provide precision approach functions, the Precision Approach Software
(PAS) SCN must be the same for both the WAAS FMS and LP/LPV
Monitor. The PAS SCN is indicated on the identification plate of both
components.
Data Transfer Unit DTU-100 (Iomega ZIP Drive), P/N 1406-01-0X, 1407-01-0X
Solid State Data Transfer Unit, P/Ns 1408-00-X, 1409-00-2
The following table shows the allowable combinations of UNS-1Lw FMS part
numbers and SCNs:
UNS-1Lw FMS Software Control Numbers (SCN)

Part No. 1000.X 1100.X
3116-42-111X
3116-32-111X
NOTE: Refer to the UNS-1Lw part number matrix in the Equipment Specifications section of this
manual for a detailed explanation of the part numbers.
Page 1
34-60-52 3 February 2011
B. Organization
This Technical Manual provides the information about:
(1) Description and operation of the components of the UNS-1Lw Flight Management
System.
(2) FAA Approval including Environmental Qualification Forms.
(3) Equipment Specifications to support selection of compatible peripherals and planning
for the installation of UNS-1Lw components.
(4) Detailed installation and wiring requirements.
(5) Maintenance, Checkout and Troubleshooting of the UNS-1Lw and peripheral sensors
as well as outputs from the UNS-1Lw to the Flight Guidance System.
(6) Navigation Sensors – where to find scheduled outages and current status of long-range
navigation systems.
(7) Fuel Flow Inputs to the UNS-1Lw for various sensors.
2. Abbreviations and Terminology
This manual contains no abbreviations or terms that have varying interpretations in the
industry. However, the use of 1000.X and 1100.X are used to indicate passages that may be
applicable to one or more, but not all SCNs. Some components have multiple names that are
used interchangeably. The terms FMS and UNS-1Lw are used to refer to the Flight
Management System and Multi-Mission Management System. The exception to this is if the
product, part number or multi-mission is specifically required.
The terms FPCDU and CDU refer to the 5-Inch FPCDU, P/N 1018-X-XXX and the 4-Inch
FPCDU, P/N 1117-XX or 1117-X-XXX. Part numbers refer to specific configurations of a
component. An X in a part number indicates there are several variations of the part number.
The front panel of the FPCDU contains an array of push buttons or keys that are used to
operate the system. Instructions in this manual refer to specific keys by name, for example
[ENTER], [A], etc.
Throughout this manual reference is made to the "DTU-100" and "disk". The term “disk”
used herein now refers to any of the data storage devices (Zip disk, USB or SD) and the term
“DTU” will be used to refer to either the DTU-100 or SSDTU.
Procedures in this manual and displayed on the FMS will still use the term “DISK” and will
remain unchanged regardless of the data storage device being used.
3. Contact Information
Please submit comments, suggestions, errors or other concerns about this manual to our
Technical Publications Department at techpubs@uasc.com.
To order copies or request changes in address and distribution information, contact
info@uasc.com.
For technical questions, please contact customersupport@uasc.com.
Page 2
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-1

Manual Affected
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s FMS UNS-1Lw FMS Installation Manual, Report
No. 34-60-52 dated 27 January 2011.
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the Description and Operation section adjacent to Page 1.
Purpose
To update the installation options in the General section.
Instructions
Replace the first bulleted paragraph that begins “Single FMS/WAAS –” with the following:
• Single FMS/WAAS – For aircraft that have LPV approach disabled.
Page 1 of 1
34-60-52 26 April 2011
Description and Operation

1. Description
The information contained within this installation manual describes the administrative and
technical aspects, features, functions, and components of Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation’s (UASC) Flight Management System (FMS) and Multi-mission Management
System (MMMS). All comments or recommendations regarding the installation, acceptance
or operation of the FMS/MMMS or its accessories and components can be directed to the
Product Support Department at Universal Avionics Systems Corporation.
The information, drawings and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a
reference for engineering planning only. The drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein
do not represent any specific STC or Form 337 aircraft installation. It is the installer’s
responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. This manual and the
drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein may not be used as a substitute for an STC or
Form 337 drawing package.
A. General
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s FMS and MMMS are fully integrated navigation
and flight management systems designed to provide the pilot with centralized control of the
aircraft navigation sensors, lateral and vertical flight guidance and steering, fuel management,
database management and flight planning.
The UNS-1Lw FMS contains a Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) subsystem. The
WAAS subsystem provides a navigation solution using GPS augmented by WAAS. The
WAAS FMS is categorized as Class Gamma 3, which covers navigation and guidance
functions for all flight phases through Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance (LPV)
approach level of service. The WAAS subsystem provides three-dimensional position and
velocity, time, and WAAS protection levels. The WAAS subsystem also provides ARINC
I/O and critical analog output and discrete I/O.
The WAAS Subsystem operates in single or dual FMS installations. The following
installation options are available based on the severity of failure conditions on different
classes of aircraft.
• Single FMS/WAAS – For classes of aircraft for which criticality of LPV approach
operation is classified as ‘Major’ and for aircraft that have LPV approach disabled.
• Dual FMS/WAAS – For classes of aircraft for which criticality of LPV approach
operation is classified as ‘Severe-Major’. This requires dual WAAS subsystems for
cross-channel monitoring.
• Single FMS/WAAS with LP/LPV Monitor - Same as the dual WAAS FMS installation
but the cross-channel monitoring is provided by a LP/LPV Monitor.
Page 1
34-60-52 3 February 2011
The FMS accepts position information from up to five long-range navigation sensors as well
as a VOR, TACAN, or scanning DME sensor. The data from these sensors is used to
determine the best computed position. This position is used by the FMS for navigating the
aircraft along a programmed flight plan. Flight plans are created using the navigation
database. The database locates waypoints along an entered route and combines these
waypoints to form a flight plan.
Current capability includes lateral great circle and vertical navigational guidance and display,
from aircraft departure to arrival. This includes enroute as well as terminal and approach
capabilities that are integrated with real time fuel management monitoring data. An
incorporated Radar/Multi-Function Display (MFD) interface allows selection and display of
flight plan waypoints on compatible weather radar or MFD displays.
Both the computed and raw sensor data are output for display to the flight crew on the CDU.
Flight Guidance system installations, switching and pilot annunciations are streamlined, as
all output data comes from one source, the FMS, which represents all interfaced sensors.
Each type of navigation sensor has unique capabilities and functions. The type and number of
sensors can be tailored to optimize for specific operational requirements using Loran C
(LCS), GPS, GNSS, Doppler and laser- or gyro-referenced inertial navigation sensors. VOR
and TACAN receivers are optional for either enroute navigation or as an approach reference.
The system also accepts data from a Radio Reference Sensor (RRS) in lieu of
DME/VOR/TACAN receivers. The FMS also has the ability to tune and receive data from
communication and navigation radios. The user may tune commands to COM (3), NAV (2),
ADF (2), ATC, or TAC radios depending on the configuration.
The FMS receives true airspeed (TAS) and altitude information from an air data computer.
The system supports only digital air data inputs. The FMS receives fuel flow data from the
aircraft fuel flow sensors, and optionally, heading data from an analog gyro.
The fuel management function of the FMS accepts input from the aircraft fuel flow sensors
as well as information supplied by the pilot. It uses this data to continuously update and
display fuel management information during flight. This also assists the pilot in planning fuel
requirements while on the ground.
The FMS contains six databases: navigation, company route, checklists, performance,
pilot-defined, and FMS flight plan. All databases can be updated via a Data Transfer Unit
(DTU). This DTU is housed within a protective case that may be panel mounted in the
cockpit for convenient access. The FMS will have the ability to store two cycles of the
Navigation and Company Routes databases.
A self-contained worldwide NAV database stored in non-volatile memory provides the FMS
with information on over 100,000 waypoints, navaids, airports, and over 12,000 SIDs,
STARs and approaches. The operator may choose from a worldwide database with airport
runways of >2000 feet or >4000 feet. A special helicopter database is available for helicopter
operators.
Page 2
34-60-52 3 February 2011
The pilot-defined database is stored in nonvolatile memory. It has the capacity to store up to
200 pilot-defined enroute waypoints, 200 pilot-defined routes and 100 each pilot-defined
enroute alignment points, airport reference points, runways, and approaches. The system will
store 100 average-size, pilot-entered SIDs and STARs as well. The FMS flight plan database
is erased when the FMS is turned off.
The FMS supports the checklist function as an external FMS in the Collins ProLine 4 800
avionics system. The user generates the checklist data on a personal computer (PC) program,
loads it into the FMS, and maintains it. The checklist database and the status information on
the active checklist reside in nonvolatile memory. Aircraft configured for the advanced
performance feature require an aircraft specific database that contains the data pertinent to
their operation.
The FMS employs an Ethernet connection for rapid transfer of data to such systems as the
Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS) and Application Server Unit (ASU). The
Ethernet also provides 10 MB per second database loading from a Data Transfer Unit.
Along with all the features of the FMS, the MMMS provides the capability to automatically
steer along any of six different search patterns. The MMMS is referred to as FMS herein.
Refer to the applicable Operator's Manual, Special Missions section for more information on
the MMMS search patterns.
The FMS is configured to a specific aircraft installation through a configuration module
which is part of each aircraft installation. At the time of installation, the configuration
module is programmed through the CDU to define the sensor input ports, fuel flow type, air
data type, EFIS interface, etc.
Page 3
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Single FMS Installation Description
The FMS computes position and provides selected information to the associated flight
instruments and sensor control to all sensors. The FMS houses an internal database which
includes charted data from suppliers such as Jeppesen and pilot input data such as routes and
approaches.
NOTE: Single FMS installations not utilizing an LP/LPV Monitor, will not provide
approach functions.
NOTE: The block diagram illustrates the various types of inputs and outputs to and from
the FMS. The actual set of inputs and outputs in any particular installation is
dependent on the suite of avionics equipment on the aircraft.
FPCDU
Video
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3
FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG
ON / OFF
O P Q R S T DIM
U V W X Y Z ENTER
MFD
Vision-1
TAWS
Cabin Display
WAAS/GPS ASU
Antenna Configuration
Module UniLink
Internal UniVision
GPS/WAAS
GPS/GNSS
IRS or GPIRS
Radar
Doppler
Display
UNIVERSAL FGS
UNS-1Lw FMS
Air Data
AFIS
Fuel Flow
TACAN
VOR
DME
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU
Page 4
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Dual WAAS FMS Installation Description
In dual installations, each FMS communicates with the other, sharing flight plan and
navigational information. Typically, in dual FMS installations, all long-range navigation
sensors are interfaced with both units. Each FMS computes an independent position using all
available navigational sensors and provides selected information to the associated flight
instruments. Each FMS shares its best best-computed position with the other system and
continuously monitors the other system's position output.
NOTE: The block diagram shows the various types of inputs and outputs to and from the
FMS. The actual set of inputs and outputs in any particular installation is dependent
on the suite of avionics equipment on the aircraft.
FPCDU FPCDU
Video
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3 DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3
FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6 FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6
A B C D E F G 7 8 9 A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG
ON / OFF
O P Q R S T
ON / OFF
DIM
O P Q R S T DIM
U V W X Y Z ENTER U V W X Y Z ENTER
MFD
Vision-1
TAWS
Cabin Display
WAAS/GPS ASU
WAAS/GPS
Antenna Configuration Configuration Antenna
Module UniLink Module
Internal Internal
GPS/WAAS UniVision GPS/WAAS
GPS/GNSS
IRS or GPIRS
Radar
Doppler
Display
UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL
UNS-1Lw FMS UNS-1L FMS
FGS
Air Data
AFIS
UNS-1Lw UNS-1Lw
NCU Fuel Flow NCU
TACAN
VOR
DME
or
RRS
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU
Page 5
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Single WAAS FMS with LP/LPV Monitor Installation Description
The use of an LP/LPV Monitor is an optional feature that can be used in an aircraft with a
single WAAS FMS which requires LP/LPV capability but may not have room for a second
WAAS FMS. The LP/LPV Monitor operates without a CDU or configuration module. The
LP/LPV Monitor functions as an independent sensor in which redundant equipment is
required to meet the integrity goals for precision approach types. The LP/LPV Monitor has its
own GPS/WAAS sensor which can be wired and configured as a second GPS sensor with the
single FMS.
NOTE: The block diagram illustrates the various types of inputs and outputs to and from
the FMS. The actual set of inputs and outputs in any particular installation is
dependent on the suite of avionics equipment on the aircraft.
FPCDU
Video
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG
ON / OFF
O P Q R S T DIM
U V W X Y Z ENTER
MFD
Configuration Vision-1
Internal Module
GPS/WAAS TAWS
Internal
GPS/WAAS Cabin Display
ASU
WAAS/GPS WAAS/GPS
ANTENNA ANTENNA
UniLink
UniVision
GPS/GNSS
IRS or GPIRS
Radar
Doppler
UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL FGS Display

LP/LPV MONITOR UNS-1Lw FMS
Air Data
AFIS
UNS-1LW Fuel Flow

LP/LPV
MONITOR WAAS FMS
TACAN
VOR
DME
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU
Page 6
34-60-52 3 February 2011
B. System Components
The basic UNS-1Lw installation consists of the FMS (containing the navigation computer
and GPS/WAAS sensor), Control Display Unit (CDU), configuration module, Data Transfer
Unit and a GPS/WAAS antenna.
(1) Flight Management System (FMS), P/N 3116–X2–111X
The UNS-1Lw FMS is an ARINC 600, 2MCU size, remotely mounted unit which
houses the system’s central processing unit (CPU), the navigation sensor interface
circuits, the flight guidance system interface, fuel flow interface, and the navigation
database. The unit processes data from DME, TACAN, VOR, Air data, Fuel Flow
and up to five long-range navigation sensors. A radar joystick input can also be
accommodated. The long-range Nav sensors act in addition to the multi-channel
scanning DME and VOR sensing capability integrated into the basic circuit.
At installation the system is configured with the number and type of long-range
navigation sensors which will optimize the FMS to the aircraft’s specific
requirements. The FMS can be removed from the aircraft rack without loss of the
database memory.
The FMS is available in different sensor compatibility configurations with five
optional fuel flow configurations: analog (ac or dc), digital (pulse or frequency), and
ARINC 429 digital. It incorporates an Ethernet connection for transfer of data to
Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS), Application Server Unit (ASU) as well
as future systems.
(2) Configuration Module, P/N 31921
The configuration module is a serially connected EEPROM designed to store
configuration data that is specific to the aircraft installation, The EEPROM is
attached to the FMS mounting rack. The user is able to view and initialize the aircraft
configuration through specially designed menus that can be accessed through the
CDU. Subsequent modifications to the configuration are possible but restricted
through software interlocks. The Configuration Module receives and transmits data to
the FMS via private serial communications busses.
(3) Flat Panel Control Display Unit
The UNS-1Lw can use a 5-Inch FPCDU, a 4-Inch FPCDU, or a Super CDU (SCDU)
for the primary and remote displays.
The CDU provides the operator with all the controls necessary to communicate with
the navigation computer and all associated navigation sensors. The CDU allows
manual data entry, system mode selection, computed and raw data displays, control
(selection and deselection) of navigation sensors, and system message displays. The
CDU also provides remote control and tuning of the TACAN and aircraft radios with
the RTU installed. Certain annunciations concerning system and sensor faults are also
included in the CDU displays. The Configuration Module is programmed through the
CDU at installation.
Page 7
34-60-52 3 February 2011
The CDU features a full alphanumeric keyboard. Keys for backspace, +/-,
ON/OFF/DIM, MSG, and ENTER are also provided. Five line select keys are located
on the left and right sides of the eleven-line display for cursor control and menu
selection. Below the display is a set of keys for operations control and data display.
These keys include mode keys for data display and selection (DATA), fuel
management (FUEL), lateral steering (NAV), vertical navigation (VNAV), flight
planning (FPL), access to performance data (PERF), direct-to operations (DTO) and
radio tuning functions (TUNE). In addition, special mode keys provide access to active
mode menus (MENU) and to lists of applicable items (LIST). Two operation keys
provide access the next and previous page of the active mode (NEXT and PREV).
The CDU supports data display on eleven lines with 24 characters each in two
different character sizes. Graphics displays for special photo, search and surveillance
flight patterns are presented, and are available for future graphic growth capabilities.
Mode selection and data organization is in a “chapter and page” format with menu
selections being made by the use of the mode select keys and/or “soft” line select
keys. This allows two levels of selections to exist on the same page (screen). Data is
always entered into the system at a cursor location, which is determined by the system
computer program, with certain operator-selected options.
The CDU receives all required power for operation from the FMS (with the exception
of 5 or 28 V keyboard backlighting which is provided from the aircraft dimmer bus).
(4) LP/LPV Monitor, P/N 3116-52-1110
The LP/LPV Monitor is an optional feature that can be used in an aircraft with a
single WAAS FMS which requires LP/LPV capability but may not have room for a
second WAAS FMS. The LP/LPV Monitor operates without a CDU or configuration
module. The LP/LPV Monitor functions as an independent sensor in which redundant
equipment is required to meet the integrity goals for precision approach types. The
LP/LPV Monitor has its own GPS/WAAS sensor which can be wired and configured
as a second GPS sensor with the single FMS.
(5) Data Transfer Unit (DTU), P/N 1406–( ), 1407–( )
The Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) is an IOMEGA ZIP drive housed within a
protective case. Model 1406 may be panel mounted in the cockpit for convenient
access. Model 1407 consist of a DTU-100, housed in a portable carrying case. The
wire harness plugs into sockets mounted in the aircraft that are wired to the FMS. The
DTU-100 is used to update the navigation databases within minutes. The update is
contained on Zip disks that are distributed periodically to subscribers. Database
updates are loaded into the FMS over a 10base-T Ethernet connection from the DTU-
100. The DTU-100 receives power from the FMS and communicates directly with it
through a digital bus.
Page 8
34-60-52 3 February 2011
The DTU-100 is also used to load aircraft specific performance data. The DTU-100
may also load pilot-defined flight plans and checklists created with off-line flight
planning software loaded into an IBM compatible computer. FMS in-flight data
parameters can be written to a disk utilizing the DTU-100. The Maintenance Log
stored in non-volatile memory also may be written to a disk. FMS configuration data
can be written to a disk and be loaded to another FMS to update its configuration
data.
(6) Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/N 1408-( ), 1409-( )
The SSDTU is designed to replace the DTU-100 as a data upload and download
device interfacing with other Universal Avionics’ line replaceable units (LRU). The
SSDTU replaces ZIP disk technology with flash memory technology. Two accessible
data storage device ports are built into the faceplate of the SSDTU. These ports
support Universal Serial Bus (USB) and Secure Digital (SD) data storage devices and
function as disk drives. The SSDTU transfers data files between the selected data
storage device and other LRUs using an Ethernet bus.
The SSDTU has three serial digital buses that are each capable of receiving and
transmitting data. The first is a single EIA-485 (RS-422) bus which can be used to
exchange data between FMSs. The second is an Ethernet bus, which consists of an
eight port Ethernet switch used to exchange data with up to eight UASC Ethernet
network compatible LRUs such as the FMS, TAWS and Vision-1 systems. The
transfer rate to the client is the same or better than a DTU-100. The third is an EIA-
232 bus that provides access to the diagnostic interface.
The SSDTU is available in two models, the fixed installation model that is
permanently installed in the aircraft and the portable model which is carried into the
aircraft, attached to an interface connector, used, then disconnected and removed
prior to flight. The SSDTU is the same fit as a DTU-100, although using USB and SD
data storage devices allows more flexibility for SSDTU installations.
The functions of the discrete inputs that were used to enable or disable Ethernet or
EIA-485 data bus communications in the DTU-100 have been disabled in the
SSDTU. The functions are now enabled by software.
(7) EFIS Radar Panel, P/N 1015-1-XX (Lear 60 Pro Line 4 Installations only)
The EFIS Radar Panel (ERP) provides two knobs with push buttons and six buttons
for pilot control of various EFIS and RADAR functions of the Collins Pro Line 4
Avionics System. The ERP also receives pilot inputs from the Pro Line 4 Altitude
Awareness Panel (AAP) and the Pro Line 4 Course Heading Panel (CHP). All
pilot/user inputs are forwarded to the FMS navigation computer via a CSDB
interface. The FMS/ERP combination replaces the Collins CDU. The FMS becomes
the navigation control or External Navigator.
Page 9
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(8) WAAS (SBAS) GPS Antennas
A WAAS (SBAS) GPS antenna approved under TSO C190 must be installed for each
WAAS (SBAS) FMS system. There are three approved antennas to choose from: P/N
10708 WAAS (SBAS) GPS antenna, P/N 10709 WAAS (SBAS) GPS/Sirius antenna
and P/N 10710 WAAS (SBAS) GPS/XM Weather and Radio antenna. If replacing an
existing FMS system with a WAAS (SBAS) FMS system, the antenna must be
replaced with a TSO C190 approved antenna. None of the previous antenna part
numbers, 10705, 10706, etc., are compatible with the WAAS (SBAS) FMS GPS.
The WAAS (SBAS) GPS antenna P/N 10708 is a single element antenna. The 10708
antenna has the same footprint as the 10705 and 10706 antennas and can be directly
replaced by the 10708 antenna without any modifications.
WAAS (SBAS) GPS/Sirius antenna P/N 10709 is a dual element antenna which can
provide reception for WAAS (SBAS) GPS and WSI InFlight weather. This antenna is
ideal for aircraft that have limited locations for antennas. If The 10709 is used as a
replacement for a previous antenna installation, the 10709 has the same footprint as
the 10705, 10706 and 10708 antennas, although modification to the aircraft is
necessary to accommodate the dual connectors. P/N 10709 is not a replacement for
antenna P/N 10705 when used for GLONASS.
WAAS (SBAS) GPS/XM Weather and Radio antenna P/N 10710 is a dual element
antenna which can provide reception for WAAS (SBAS) GPS and XM Weather and
Radio. This antenna is ideal for aircraft that have limited locations for antennas. If
The 10710 is used as a replacement for a previous antenna installation, the 10709 has
the same footprint as the 10705, 10706 and 10708 antennas, although modification to
the aircraft is necessary to accommodate the dual connectors. P/N 10710 is not a
replacement for antenna P/N 10705 when used for GLONASS.
Page 10
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. System Interfaces
(1) Navigation Sensor Interface
The FMS is capable of interfacing with the following short-range sensors: DME,
Radio Reference Sensor (RRS), TACAN, and VOR radio inputs.
The FMS is also capable of interfacing with the following long-range sensors:
Doppler, LORAN C, Inertial Reference sensors, GPS, GPS aided Inertial Reference
System (GPIRS), GNSS, WAAS, and GPS Landing System (GLS).
(2) Fuel Flow Interface
The system is capable of accepting five types of fuel flow signals: DC, AC RMS
voltage, pulse width, pulse frequency, and digital.
• Analog DC fuel flow inputs will not exceed 12 Volts.
• AC RMS fuel flow inputs will be in the range of 0-8 VRMS.
• Pulse frequency fuel flows will have a scaling of 1-400.0 pph/Hz while pulse
width fuel flows will be in the range of 1-400.0 pph/msec.
• The required accuracy for pulse width and pulse frequency signals will be
sufficient to measure signals in the input range 1-800 msec or 1-2000 Hz with an
accuracy of 1%.
• Digital fuel flow may be received over a digital input bus.
(3) Auxiliary Power Unit Interface
Auxiliary power unit (APU) fuel flow is a configurable option on the FMS. The FMS
accepts automatic APU fuel flow signals and computes the APU fuel flow rate. The
FMS also accepts manual APU fuel information.
(4) Ethernet Interface
The FMS is capable of interfacing with an Avionics Local Area Network. The FMS
has an Ethernet controller that connects to a 10base-T twisted shielded pair cable.
(5) External Systems Management
• The FMS interfaces with the Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS). The
FMS contains a configuration option that tells the FMS the source of the TAWS
user interface pages.
• The FMS interfaces with the Universal Cockpit Display (UCD) and Application
Server Unit (ASU). The FMS sends flight plan information to the UCD or ASU
via the FMS crossfill bus.
• The FMS AFIS mode supports interface with the Airborne Flight Information
System and provides support for remote messaging, terminal weather, winds
aloft, and remote flight plan services.
• The FMS interfaces with an external UniLink unit that supports air-to-ground
digital data communications. UniLink uses a variety of media, such as VHF radio
and in-flight telephones to exchange data with a ground base computer.
Page 11
34-60-52 3 February 2011
• The FMS tunes the following radios: VHF NAV #1 and VHF NAV #2
(navigation); VHF COM #1, VHF COM #2, and VHF COM #3 if installed (voice
communication); ADF #1 and ADF #2 (automatic direction finder); and ATC (air
traffic control).
The FMS supports 25 kHz or 8.33 kHz tuning for the VHF COM radios.
For COM tuning, the FMS interfaces with both a Radio Tuning Unit and a Radio
Control Unit. COM radio tuning and feedback is accomplished via a CSDB
interface.
• The FMS provides the capability to configure the system for advanced
performance which will work with an aircraft specific database to provide take-
off reference speeds and engine limits, climb/cruise engine limits, and landing
reference speeds. This function is incorporated as a table driven series of
interpolations that use the charts from the AFM in a digitized form. The
performance database is stored in the FMS non-volatile memory.
The FMS provides the capability to compute and display Equal Time Point
information on the CDU. The Equal Time Point is computed as a point along the
entered flight plan where it will take an equal amount of time to fly direct to
either of the two pilot-specified enroute alternate airports.
The FMS provides the capability to compute and display Point-of-No-Return
information on the CDU. The Point-of-No-Return is computed as a point along
the entered flight plan where the fuel remaining is equal to the amount of fuel
needed to fly directly back to a pilot-specified Coast Out airport with fuel
reserves.
Page 12
34-60-52 3 February 2011
D. FMS Components
(1) CPU Board
The CPU board is the master processor within the FMC. The processor is a Motorola
PowerPC 8270 microprocessor operating at 400 MHz.
The CMOS system RAM serves as a non-volatile scratchpad used to preserve specific
data in the event of an in-flight power interrupt. Flash memory is used for database
storage because it does not require battery backup, proving a more efficient and
economical storage medium than battery backed CMOS static RAM.
The following functions are incorporated into the CPU board:
• 16 Megabyte Flash EEPROM memory for program storage
• 32 Megabyte Flash EEPROM memory for database storage
• 2 Megabyte EEPROM for bootstrap program
• 4 Megabyte battery backed static RAM
• 2 Kbytes Serial EPROM for internal Configuration Module
• Battery backed real time clock device for system time keeping and timer interrupt
generation
• One I2C port for communication with external Configuration Module
• One TTL level serial port for communication with the front panel display
• Two RS–232 communications ports (One of these ports does not leave the CPU
board and is used for download of software via a remote computer while the
other port is used for connection to a remote terminal.)
• One 10base-T Ethernet port for communications with the System-1 local area
network
• 28 V input bus power failure detection signal connected to the processor’s non-
maskable interrupt
• One JTAG (Joint Test Action Group) port that contains 128 bytes of serial
EEPROM with the Ethernet MAC address for the LAN
• One analog to digital converter which is 8 bits and has a full-scale value
of 5V
• One set of system configuration jumpers (comprised of 16 individual jumpers)
• Temperature sensor for over temperature alerting
Page 13
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) WAAS/ARINC and WAAS/Analog Subsystem Boards
The WAAS/ARINC board includes a MPC8270 central processor, dual-port RAM
(DPRAM), and two field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) with dissimilar design.
The MPC8270 communicates with the GG12W receiver on the WAAS/Analog board
through two RS-232 connections. It controls the analog I/O and discrete I/O on the
WAAS/Analog board through a serial peripheral interface (SPI). ARINC I/O
functionality is accomplished on the WAAS/ARINC board through FPGA #1. FPGA
#2 is used to monitor critical ARINC output buses for faulty transmission. An RS-232
serial port is used to provide diagnostic display and flight data recording (FDR).
The WAAS/Analog board contains a GG12W receiver. The receiver is the source of
three-dimensional position and velocity, time, and WAAS protection levels. The
WAAS/Analog board also provides critical analog output and discrete I/O. Critical
analog/discrete output including deviations, alert flags and level of service (LOS) are
monitored internally for faulty transmission.
The WAAS subsystem interfaces with a configuration module through the FMS via
DPRAM. The WAAS subsystem obtains the following information from the FMS
configuration module:
• Aircraft information (both onside and offside antenna offset). The Antenna offset
translates the GPS/WAAS antenna position to the aircraft navigation center
(typically the glideslope antenna).
• Approved Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) service provider(s)
• ARINC I/O ports configuration
• Display bus type configuration
• High/low level analog deviation output configuration
• Cross-channel monitoring enabled or disabled
I/O Capabilities of the WAAS Subsystem Boards
• Discrete Inputs – XChan Fail In, XChan LOS1, XChan Nav Valid, XChan Vert
Valid
• Discrete Outputs – Nav Flag, Nav Valid, Vert Flag, Vert Valid, LOS1, LOS2,
LOS3, XChan Fail Out, WAAS Fault, Time Marks
NOTE: Alert (Nav Flag or Vert Flag) and Valid (Nav Valid or Vert Valid) Flags can
be either high or low level outputs depending on the FMS part number.
NOTE: The levels of service (LOS) in use by the WAAS Subsystem are LPV,
LNAV/VNAV, LNAV, and Not Available.
• Analog Outputs – Lateral Dev and Vertical Dev
NOTE: Lateral and Vertical Deviations can be scaled high or low depending on
the FMS configuration.
Page 14
34-60-52 3 February 2011
• Analog Inputs – XChan Lateral Dev and XChan Vertical Dev
NOTE: Lateral and Vertical Deviations can be scaled high or low depending on
the FMS configuration.
• ARINC 429 Inputs/Outputs – Configurable Transmitters and Receivers, 2
Transmitters (743A Output, XChan Out), 4 Receivers (Offside FMS, XChan In,
XChan Guidance Bus1, XChan Guidance Bus2).
NOTE: The number of ARINC429 transmitters and receivers available is
dependent on the FMS configuration.
(3) Auxiliary Board
The Auxiliary Board uses a Motorola 68332 processor with 256 KB of RAM and 256
KB of flash EEPROM.
• Two CSDB transmitters and four receivers
• 128 Kilobyte by 16 Flash EEPROM for program storage
• 4 Kilobyte by 16 of dual port RAM for communication with the main processor
• Four pulse/analog fuel flow inputs
• Input signals for analog heading
• Input signals for board type detection
The four differential fuel flow inputs incorporated in the Auxiliary board, in an all-
digital aircraft, allows the elimination of the analog board and possible replacement
by a second ARINC board. The fuel flow multiplexer switches these inputs to a RMS
converter, a counter, or an A/D converted depending on the type of input. Analog
Heading is located on the Auxiliary board to allow an all-digital aircraft access to this
variable without an Analog board. The Roll Steering command is under control of the
CPU even though it is located on the Auxiliary board.
I/O Capabilities of the Auxiliary Board
• Discrete Inputs – HDG Mag/True Switch, HDG Valid
• Analog Inputs – Autopilot Reference
• Analog Outputs – Roll Steering
• Synchro In – Heading Synchro
• Pulse/Analog FF – 4 Fuel Flow Sensors
NOTE: Accepts either pulsed or analog differential fuel flow sensors.
• CSDB In – 4 Input Ports (VOR, ADF/MFD, DME)
• CSDB Out – 2 Output Ports
Page 15
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(4) Analog Board (Optional)
The Analog board communicates with the CPU through dual port memory. All
processing is accomplished using an on-board Motorola 68332 processor. The Analog
board converts four types of analog inputs to digital for processing through DPRAM
by the FMC: Discrete, Synchro/Resolver AC, DC, and analog air data and provides
analog, discrete, and synchro outputs.
I/O Capabilities of the Analog Board
• Discrete Inputs – Altitude Valid, Attitude Valid, TAS Valid, SAT Valid
• Discrete Outputs – Digital Valid, Pitch Valid
• Analog Outputs – Pitch Command, To/From
• Synchro Inputs – Instrument Reference (Altitude/Attitude Reference), Alt
Coarse, Alt Fine or Pitch
• Synchro Outputs – Bearing, Desired Track
• ARINC 561 – Refer to the label descriptions for this output in the WAAS FMS
Interface Manual 34-60-53
Digital to analog converters are used to generate PITCMD, TO/FR, and Synchro
Resolver outputs. In addition, the discrete outputs PITCHVAL and DIGVAL are
implemented using a discrete latch.
NOTE: If the FMS is configured with an Analog board, the WAAS/ARINC I/O
capabilities are reduced. Refer to the Equipment Specification section of this
manual for details.
(5) ASCB Version A Board (Optional)
The ASCB board provides the FMS with an interface to the ASCB Version A data
bus that was developed by Honeywell and supplements ARINC, CSDB and analog
interfaces of the FMS. The ASCB board hardware supports data bus Version A only.
ASCB is a multi-user serial synchronous digital communications bus. The ASCB
board provides an interface between the FMC and ASCB bus.
When configured with the ASCB board, the FMS provides the following capabilities:
• Transmit navigation display on the ASCB bus.
• Transmit guidance and mode data on the ASCB bus.
• Transmit flight plan and map background data on the ASCB bus.
• Transmit Vspeeds on the ASCB bus.
• Create and store radar waypoints using the MFD input data on the ASCB bus.
• Receive FGS, EFIS, and MFD data on the ASCB bus.
Page 16
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(6) Power Supply
The Power Supply converts 28 VDC aircraft power to +5 VDC, +15 VDC and -15
VDC for FMS circuitry and the Configuration Module and provides output voltage
monitoring and current limiting.
If power is lost or low voltage is detected, an interrupt will be generated. The CPU
will then store the necessary registers in non-volatile memory for an orderly
shutdown. Enough capacity is designed into the power supply to provide system
power for a minimum of 10 milliseconds following a power fail warning.
Page 17
34-60-52 3 February 2011
E. FMS Functions
(1) Power Control, Initialization, and Configuration
At power up, the FMS determines the installed configuration of the computer. The
FMS uses data from the configuration module to configure the FMS if the
configuration data is valid.
At power up, the FMS performs self-tests to ensure system integrity and proper
operation.
The FMS provides power-up initialization after a normal power down, after a standby
power down, and after a power failure.
The FMS provides power-down control for manual power down, standby power
down, and power failure.
(2) Navigation
The FMS best computed aircraft position is determined by using position inputs from
all available navigation sensors and DME distance information from the scanning
DME. If either an RRS or one of the supported TACAN receivers is installed,
TACAN information is also be used. The system searches the navigation database to
determine which DME or TACAN stations are within range (approximately 250 nm)
and sequentially tunes each station. The aircraft position is computed by interrogating
multiple DME or TACAN stations and correlating the tuned stations with their
known geographic coordinates. Correction for slant range is accomplished by using
known station elevation and aircraft altitude.
The DME derived position is then integrated with the position information derived
from available long-range sensors. If the aircraft is out of DME range, the FMS relies
on long-range sensors for position information.
The FMS provides the pilot with course to waypoint, ETA, distance to waypoint,
maximum airspeed (VMAX) for curved legs, wind, and ground speed information.
In addition the FMS provides desired track, bearing, crosstrack, lateral deviation,
vertical deviation, related data to the flight guidance system (FGS) for the HSI
displays, and roll and pitch steering commands for the autopilot/flight director
system.
(3) Position Uncertainty
The FMS calculates position uncertainty and displays the resulting value as ANP. The
FMS uses as the alerting limit either the operator manually entered RNP (required
navigation performance), the procedural RNP as defined in the navigation database,
or the system defaults based upon the phase of flight.
Page 18
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(4) Vertical Navigation
The FMS provides vertical guidance and steering data for a Path Descent mode. This
includes the Enroute, STAR, and Approach segments of the flight plan up to the
Missed Approach Point. All ARINC 424 leg types are supported, including procedure
turns, holding patterns, and floating terminator type legs. The FMS allows up to six
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) fixed terminator type waypoints to be displayed and
edited on the VNAV Path pages. All waypoints that are pre-filled are automatically
pre-filled in reference to the flight plan waypoints. On the VNAV Path pages the
operator may also define an Offset, which is a vertical waypoint referenced off a
particular flight plan waypoint. The offset may be in either a positive or negative
direction along the defined flight plan, and will have an altitude defined by the
operator.
The Flight Plan pages have been designed to allow the operator to enter and edit
altitudes for any leg in the flight plan that has a fixed waypoint terminator. In
addition, a prompt will be provided on the Flight Plan pages to allow access to the
VNAV pages in order to define a VNAV Offset waypoint.
The FMS automatically converts all STAR and Approach procedural crossing altitude
constraints from the database that are variable (At/Below, At/Above, and Window) to
fixed altitudes. These altitudes will be displayed on the Flight Plan pages and
automatically pre-filled into the VNAV pages.
The FMS provides tactical VNAV modes. These modes allow the operator to use the
FMS to maneuver the aircraft vertically without regard to the lateral path of the
aircraft. Flight Level Change (VFLC) mode uses a set of preprogrammed
airspeed/Mach profiles selected by the operator to climb and descend the aircraft. In
VFLC mode, the FMS outputs an airspeed target so the aircraft FGS can pitch the
aircraft to achieve the target airspeed.
VNAV modes are mutually exclusive; the FMS can be in only one vertical mode at a
time. The FMS is capable of synchronized VNAV operation. In synchronized
operation, all flight crew entries on the CDU pertaining to the VNAV function are
synchronized between the left and right FMS.
The FMS provides a selectable altitude correction function to compensate for extreme
cold temperatures. Temperature compensation applies only to approach altitudes,
including approach transition and missed approach.
(5) Lateral Guidance and Steering
The lateral guidance and steering function provides guidance displays showing the
relative position of the aircraft to the desired flight path. This function also provides a
steering command to make the aircraft follow the desired flight path. These
capabilities are provided for the entire ARINC 424, path terminator leg set.
The FMS is capable of synchronized LNAV operation. In synchronized operation, all
flight crew entries on the CDU pertaining to the LNAV function are synchronized
between the left and right FMS.
Page 19
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(6) Waypoint Sequencing
The FMS incorporates automatic turn anticipation for leg changes along the flight
plan. Turns are initiated at a distance based on ground speed, leg change magnitude,
and roll steering bank limits for the present altitude. Turns at "fly-over" waypoints are
initiated over the waypoint.
(7) Direct-To
The FMS is capable of initiating Direct-To maneuvers to waypoints and airports on or
off the flight plan. If the Direct-To waypoint is off the flight plan, the system prompts
the pilot to redefine the next (NX) waypoint so that it may be linked to the flight plan.
The FMS will provide the capability to divert to the nearest airports.
(8) Heading Mode
The pilot is allowed to select and fly a desired heading using the CDU keyboard. If
the IMS-02, ProLine 2, ProLine 4, or Primus 1000 EFIS is installed, the system will
accept heading inputs from the heading bug knob. The Heading Mode provides the
ability to be armed so that it may automatically intercept the current navigation leg.
(9) Selected Crosstrack
The FMS provides the ability to select and fly a course parallel to a leg defined by
two FROM-TO waypoints. When this feature is selected, the system indicates the
selection via the crosstrack annunciator. This feature is not available for Pseudo VOR
outbound legs or in approach mode. The mode will be maintained when sequencing
onto a fixed track leg, provided the course change is such that it is possible to do so.
(10) Holding Patterns
The FMS provides Holding Pattern selection and definition using graphical depiction
of the available holding pattern on the display. The pilot defines the pattern or selects
one from a database via the CDU keyboard. The FMS provides the ability to arm a
holding pattern at a waypoint in the flight plan that is ahead of the current position of
the aircraft. The FMS provides the capability to define holding patterns at present
position. The hold may be manually or automatically activated. Once the holding
pattern is activated, the aircraft proceeds to the holding fix and automatically
performs the appropriate entry to the pattern. The pilot must manually terminate the
hold if it is an HM (Hold Manual) leg type. If it is an HA (Hold at an Altitude) or HF
(Hold at a Fix) leg type, then the FMS will automatically sequence the leg after the
appropriate procedure is flown.
(11) Flight Planning
The FMS facilitates flight planning and includes features such as SIDs, STARs, and
Approaches for use in terminal areas and Victor/Jet airways for the enroute portion.
Flight plans can be dynamically defined, crossfilled from another FMS, selected from
a previously defined pilot route or company route database, or loaded from a disk or
AFIS unit.
The FMS is able to synchronize the flight plan with the offside FMS.
Page 20
34-60-52 3 February 2011
The flight planning includes custom lists from which the pilot can easily select
desired options, eliminating time consuming keyboard entries and associated errors.
The FMS provides a Fix Page function, which allows the operator to enter up to nine
waypoints and obtain dynamic range and bearing from each of these waypoints. In
addition, this function determines the location at which each of these waypoints is
abeam the flight plan. The FMS provides the ETA and distance to the Abeam Point,
as well as messaging to alert the pilot when the aircraft is approaching the Abeam
Point.
The FMS provides a Lat/Long Crossing function, which allows the operator to enter
up to four latitudes or longitudes. The FMS then computes the corresponding latitude
or longitude of the intersection point along the flight plan. The FMS provides the
ETA and distance to the Lat/Long Crossing Point, as well as messaging to alert the
pilot when the aircraft is approaching the Lat/Long Crossing Point.
(12) Terminal Area Procedures
The FMS is capable of flying published SIDs and STARs with procedural legs such
as heading-to-radial, heading-to-altitude, course-from-fix-to-DME-distance, and
DME-arcs. Up to nineteen additional leg types (combinations) are available.
(13) Approach Mode
The FMS approach mode provides the pilot with ILS-like guidance while flying FMS
approaches. During an FMS approach, the system provides signals like those of an
ILS for flight director or autopilot coupled approaches. The approach is accessed
from the navigation database or the pilot may define it by entering the approach
waypoint and the reference NAVAID (if required). The system is capable of defining
and flying VOR, RNV (VOR DME), RNV (GPS), NDB, TACAN, ILS, LOC, BC,
VFR, GLS, and GWS (FAA FIAS configuration only) type approaches. During an
ILS, LOC, or BC approach, the FMS uses the localizer signal for roll steering.
(14) Precision Approaches (RNAV (GPS/WAAS))
The WAAS subsystem adds the capability to fly precision RNAV (GPS) approaches
to the LPV Approach Category (Level of Service). During the final phase of the
precision approach (between the FAF and EOA), the WAAS subsystem
independently provides the guidance both laterally and vertically.
(15) Integrity Monitoring
The WAAS subsystem monitors the integrity of the position output using a step
detector, WAAS-provided integrity monitoring, and RAIM-based fault detection and
exclusion (FDE) algorithms.
(16) RAIM Prediction
The WAAS subsystem supports predicting the availability of fault detection (FD) -
receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM), at a single space-time point. It
also supports the prediction of RAIM availability for a period of +/-15 minutes
around the estimated time of arrival (ETA) at a fix.
Page 21
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(17) Cross-Channel (XChan) monitoring:
The WAAS subsystem provides XChan monitoring for LP/LPV approaches flown in
the offside FMS. This improves the overall system integrity so as to meet the required
integrity for LP/LPV approaches. Based on its own position, the WAAS subsystem
monitors the guidance data from the offside FMS for discrepancies. If an intolerable
discrepancy is detected, the WAAS subsystem sends a LON alert to the offside FMS.
As a result, the offside FMS sets its guidance flags in view. If the offside FMS fails to
set the guidance flags in view, the WAAS subsystem further disconnects the digital
guidance bus of the offside FMS from display systems and sets the analog guidance
flags of the offside FMS in view. XChan monitoring can be disabled through the
FMS configuration that is confirmed by the installer.
(18) RNP RNAV Functionality
The WAAS FMS provides an ANP/RNP display on the Nav pages that depicts FMS
calculated Actual Navigation Performance (ANP) and Required Navigation
Performance (RNP). RNP represents the maximum allowable value for the current
procedure or flight phase. The computed ANP algorithm represents the 95% Total
System Error (TSE) as required in DO-236B, Minimum Aviation System Performance
Standards: Required Navigation Performance for Area Navigation, par. 2.1.1 and as
described in par. 1.7.2.1.
RNP boundary settings may be manually entered (priority 1), coded in the navigation
database (priority 2), or determined by phase of flight. The following table describes
RNP boundary settings as a function of the above criteria.
Priority Source RNP Boundary Settings
1** Manually Entered (Refer to “FMS RNP 5.0 nm Maximum
Annunciation” section below)
2 Navigation database Procedure dependent
3 Default Phase of Flight
Oceanic 4.0 nm
Enroute 2.0 nm
Terminal 1.0 nm
Approach 0.3 nm
**The manually entered RNP value will remain and the WAAS FMS will use that value
until it is manually removed or overwritten, within a given power up cycle.
Dual multi-sensor FMS installations which integrate GPS/WAAS sensors in the

WAAS FMSs meet the equipment and accuracy requirements of FAA Order
8400.12A para. 12b(4) for operations in RNP-10 airspace and FAA Order 8400.33
para. 8a(2)(a) or 8a(2)(b)i for operations in RNP 4 airspace. Operational approval
must be obtained from the appropriate authority.
Page 22
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Manual Affected
No. 34-60-52 dated 3 February 2011.
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the Description and Operation section adjacent Page 23.
Purpose
This Temporary Change removes the term "LP" from the WAAS Subsystem Functions
section.
Instructions
Replace the second paragraph under the WAAS Subsystem Functions section on Page 23
with the following:
• Guidance for approaches with final approach segment data block (FAS DB): The FAS
DB stored in the FMC navigation database contains the designated SBAS service
provider ID, the waypoints defining the FAS path and alert limits for the approach. Based
on the information, the WAAS subsystem determines the available approach service
level, LNAV, LNAV/VNAV or LPV. The WAAS subsystem further provides
lateral/vertical guidance for the selected approach relative to the aircraft navigation center
position. The navigation center position is translated from the antenna position using the
antenna offset stored and confirmed in the FMS configuration module. The WAAS
subsystem then continuously monitors whether the applicable alert limit requirements are
met. The WAAS subsystem notifies the pilot via guidance flags if loss of navigation
(LON) occurs.
Page 1 of 1
34-60-52 10 September 2012
The WAAS FMSs also complies with equipment and accuracy requirements of AC
90-96A paragraph Appendix 1 for BRNAV (RNP-5) when operating in Class I
airspace, without time limits.
Inclusion of this function in the FMS does not constitute an Operational Approval for
RNAV RNP SAAAR procedures.
FMS RNP Annunciations
The following annunciations are associated with ANP/RNP criteria:
POSITION UNCERTAIN
Any time the ANP value exceeds the RNP value, a Position Uncertain message is
provided. Under this condition, a POS annunciation is displayed on the CDU. If the
Position Uncertain condition occurs during an approach, the lateral and vertical
deviation flags are placed in view and will remain in view until the FMS position is
no longer uncertain.
VERIFY MANUAL RNP
This message displayed on the FMS CDU will be removed after it is displayed once.
1. A manual RNP has been entered on the NAV pages, a flight phase transition
occurs and the new flight phase RNP Limit is less than the manual RNP.
2. A manual RNP has been entered on the NAV pages and a leg with a lower
database RNP value is sequenced to in a linked flight plan.
(19) WAAS Subsystem Functions
• Navigation solution: The WAAS subsystem provides a navigation solution for
all phases of flight using GPS augmented by WAAS. The navigation solution
includes antenna position, time, velocity, and other pertinent data.
• Guidance for approaches with final approach segment data block (FAS DB):
The FAS DB stored in the FMC navigation database contains the designated
SBAS service provider ID, the waypoints defining the FAS path and alert
limits for the approach. Based on the information, the WAAS subsystem
determines the available approach service level LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, or
LPV). The WAAS subsystem further provides lateral/vertical guidance for the
selected approach relative to the aircraft navigation center position. The
navigation center position is translated from the antenna position using the
antenna offset stored and confirmed in the FMS configuration module. The
WAAS subsystem then continuously monitors whether the applicable alert
limit requirements are met. The WAAS subsystem notifies the pilot via
guidance flags if loss of navigation (LON) occurs.
Page 23
34-60-52 3 February 2011
• ARINC I/O and critical analog/discrete output: In order to meet the criticality
level for precision approaches, the WAAS subsystem processes all FMS
ARINC I/O and critical analog/discrete outputs. The WAAS subsystem
configures its ARINC I/O and analog/discrete output based on the information
in the FMS configuration module. For oceanic, en route, terminal, and
approach (without FAS DB) phases of flight, the FMS transmits the guidance
data and other ARINC data to external systems. For approaches with FAS DB,
the WAAS subsystem substitutes the FMC guidance data with its own
computed deviations and guidance flags.
• WAAS CPU monitor: The WAAS subsystem monitors the FMS CPU
Integrity by comparing its computed position output to the FMS System
Position. If there is a discrepancy, the WAAS subsystem will independently
flag the FMC guidance busses.
Page 24
34-60-52 3 February 2011
2. Operation
A. General
Detailed operating procedures for the FMS are provided in the Operator’s Manual for the
specific software loaded into your FMS, for example, SCN 1000.X or 1100.X. The operating
procedures presented here are intended to provide information necessary to perform tasks
later in this manual.
B. Flat Panel Control Display Unit
The FMS Operator’s Manuals introduces the CDU, explains the CDU operating philosophy,
and provides a detailed explanation of the keyboard keys and their associated functions.
The CDU, as part of a Flight Management System (FMS) provides the operator with all the
controls necessary to communicate with the navigation computer and associated navigation
sensors. The CDU presents an eleven-line display using two-character sizes and has a full
color, liquid crystal display. The operator may adjust display brightness. Line select keys are
located on either side of the display. Individual Line Select Keys are referred to as [1L]
through [5L] and [1R] through [5R]. Function keys are immediately below the display and an
alphanumeric keyboard is below and to the right of the function keys. The CDU provides for
manual data entry, system mode selection, computed and raw data displays, control (selection
and deselection) of navigational sensors, and system message displays.
The following paragraphs provide general information about operator–CDU interface which
is applicable to installation and checkout of the FMS.
(1) Cursor
Data is always entered into the system at a cursor location. The cursor marks variable
parameters by means of reverse field. When appropriate, the cursor location aligns
with one of the ten line select keys used to control the cursor. The home position of
the cursor is usually off the display when a page is initially accessed, although some
pages have a cursor default position that is on the screen. Pushing the ENTER key
completes the entry of data. If there is a logical next field for data entry, the cursor
will automatically advance to this next field when [ENTER] is pushed.
(2) Item Selection
OPT LIST 1/ 1
select
#-
1 no sensor
2 dc linear
3 ac linear
4 pulse freq
5 pulse width
6 digital
RETURN®
Sample Display
Selections are made with the line select keys whenever possible. In some cases a
combination of line select keys and reference numbers are used on the same display
page. This allows two levels of selection to exist simultaneously on the same display.
Page 25
34-60-52 3 February 2011
For example, while the content or nature of a list is controlled by the line select keys,
an item from that list can be selected by using a reference number. In this illustration
(OPT LIST 1/ 1) the reference numbers appear to the left of the items available for
selection. The cursor is on the dash in the data entry field next to the pound (#) sign.
To make a selection, input the number corresponding to your choice and push
[ENTER]. The arrow next to the word RETURN points to the adjacent line select key
[5R]. Pushing [5R] will return the display to the previous page.
Any selection that will change the active flight plan, guidance of the aircraft, or the
stored database requires confirmation. Confirmation is accomplished by pushing the
line select key a second time or by pushing [ENTER]. Selection of fields that do not
require confirmation will cause the page or mode change to occur immediately when
the corresponding line select key is pushed.
(3) Information Display
Color and graphics are used to draw attention to the most important items on a
display. Background colors and/or boxes are used to group data into important areas
such as control or selection boxes.
(4) Display Control – 5-Inch FPCDU
Pushing [ON/OFF DIM] for initial power-up energizes the system and initiates self
test of the navigation computer. When self-test is initiated, the Self-test page is
displayed. The Self-test page is followed automatically by the Initialization page if all
tests are successfully completed. If a failure that would cause the system to be
unusable occurs, the Initialization page will not appear. Once the Initialization page
appears, no other page can be displayed until the initialization data is accepted.
(5) Power/Display Control Page
BRIGHT®
DIM®
CANCEL®
DISPLAY®
OFF/STBY®
Power/Display Control Page

After the system is turned on, pushing [ON/OFF DIM] displays the options BRIGHT,
DIM, CANCEL, DISPLAY and OFF/STBY. Pushing the associated line select key to
one of these options selects the option.
• BRIGHT – Pushing LSK [1R] BRIGHT slowly increases the brightness of the
display as the key is held down until reaching maximum brightness.
• DIM – Pushing LSK [2R] DIM slowly dims the display as the key is held down
until reaching minimum brightness.
• CANCEL – Pushing LSK [3R] CANCEL will cause the control page to be
removed from the active display page.
Page 26
34-60-52 3 February 2011
• DISPLAY – Pushing LSK [2R] DISPLAY will cause the parallax adjustment
page to be displayed.
• OFF/STBY – Pushing LSK [5R] OFF/STBY displays the CONFIRM
OFF/STBY page. This page has two options (CONFIRM OFF and CANCEL)
selectable using the line select keys. Selecting CONFIRM OFF will turn the
system off. Selecting CANCEL will return the display to the Power/Display
Control page.
UP®
DOWN®
CANCEL®
Parallax Adjustment Page

To adjust the parallax for the line select keys the adjustment page presents three
options (UP, DOWN, and CANCEL) using the line select keys.
• UP – Pushing LSK [1R] UP adjusts the entire display upward by as much as one-
half character.
• DOWN – Pushing LSK [2R] DOWN adjusts the entire display downward by as
much as one-half character.
• CANCEL – Pushing LSK [3R] CANCEL returns the display to the
Power/Display Control page.
CONFIRM®
OFF
CANCEL®
CONFIRM
STANDBY®
Confirm Off Page

This page has three options (CONFIRM OFF, CANCEL and CONFIRM STANDBY)
selectable using the line select keys.
• CONFIRM OFF – Pushing LSK [1R] CONFIRM OFF turns the system off.
• CANCEL – Pushing LSK [3R] CANCEL returns the display to the
Power/Display Control page.
• CONFIRM STANDBY – Pushing LSK [5R] CONFIRM STANDBY allows the
FMS to be powered up with position information intact. This is a configurable
feature.
Page 27
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100)
The following paragraphs provide general information about operating the DTU (Models
1406 and 1407). Refer to the Operator’s Manual applicable for the Flight Management
System and software program version for detailed operating procedures.
When using the Portable DTU, connect the DTU cable to the appropriate panel-mounted
connectors before turning the unit on.
(1) Power
With external power applied to the DTU, the red LED illuminates.
(2) Disk Insertion and Removal
• Open the Dust Cover by pulling out and upward on the tabs. The pivot arms and
latch mechanisms will hold the Dust Cover in the fully open position.
• Grasp the disk by the edge away from the metal shutter so that the arrow points
away from you. Orient the disk so that the arrow points toward the slot in the
Disc Drive and the face of the disk is toward the top of the unit and then insert
the disk into the drive. Push on the exposed edge of disk until it is fully inserted.
• Push on the small button on the Disc Drive to eject the disk.
• Grasp the disk and pull it out of the drive.
• Push the Dust Cover toward the unit until it snaps closed. The pivot arms and
latch mechanisms will hold the Dust Cover closed.
D. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)
The following paragraphs provide general information about operating the SSDTU, models
1408-( ) and 1409-( ). Refer to the Operator’s Manual applicable to the Flight Management
System and software version for detailed operating procedures.
(1) Power
NOTE: When using the Portable SSDTU, connect the SSDTU cable to the
appropriate panel-mounted connectors before applying power to the aircraft.
When power is applied, the SSDTU undergoes a Lamp Test and Power-on Built-In-
Test (PBIT). The SSDTU operates the front panel LED indicators in the following
order.
(a) All LEDs Off: Power supply not present.
(b) All LEDs Amber: Power supply good, processor initializing.
(c) All LEDs Green: Loading and verifying the operating system image and verifying
the file system image.
(d) All LEDs Blue: Initializing operating system.
Page 28
34-60-52 3 February 2011
During PBIT, all three indicators will display the same status at any given time. The
purpose of the operation is to test the LEDs and to give a clear indication of which
PBIT step failed, should the SSDTU fail to begin normal operation.
Following PBIT (normal operation), the SSDTU operates the front panel LED
indicators as shown in the following table.
Indicator Color and Action
Indicator
Type Blank Green Green Amber Blue Blue
Solid Blinking Solid Solid Blinking
STATUS SSDTU Off Operational N/A CBIT has Self-Test N/A
(Front) detected an
error
(SSDTU will
reboot)
USB No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported in use being
accessed device (Indicates accessed
Primary
Storage
Device)
SD No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported in use being
accessed device (Indicates accessed
Primary
Storage
Device)
NET Not yet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(Front) operational
Ethernet No device A network Network N/A N/A N/A
(Rear) present link is activity
established
on this port
(2) Flash Memory

(a) Insertion
• Open the Dust Cover by pulling upward on the tabs. The pivot arms and
• Insert the flash memory card. Push on the exposed edge until it is fully
inserted, the memory card will remain seated all the way in the slot when
pressure is released.
NOTE: If the card does not slide into the slot easily, do not try to force
it; the card will not fit in backwards. Turn the card around 180º
and reinsert card.
• Close the dust cover.
Page 29
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(b) Removal of Data Storage Device
NOTE: If the data storage device is removed during a read operation, the
read operation will fail. If the data storage device is removed during
a write operation, the device may become corrupt and will require
the data storage device to be formatted on a personal computer (not
an FMS format command which only deletes files from the media).
• Push on the exposed edge of the memory card, release pressure and the
memory card will eject slightly out of the slot.
• Grasp the edge of the flash memory and pull it out of the SSDTU.
• Close the dust cover.
(3) USB Memory Insertion
(a) Insertion
• Insert USB memory all the way into the USB slot until seated.
NOTE: If the USB Memory does not slide into the slot easily, do not
try to force it; the card will not fit in backwards. Turn the
memory card around 180º and reinsert.
NOTE: Do not close dust cover.
(b) Removal
NOTE: If the data storage device is removed during a read operation, the
read operation will fail. If the data storage device is removed during
a write operation, the device may become corrupt and will require
the data storage device to be formatted on a personal computer (not
an FMS format command which only deletes files from the media).
• Pull USB Memory card straight out of memory slot.
• Close dust cover.
Page 30
34-60-52 3 February 2011
E. EFIS Radar Panel (ERP), P/N 1015–1–X (Lear 60 Pro Line 4 Installations Only)
The supplement to the FMS Operator’s Manual introduces the ERP and provides a detailed
explanation of the radar controls and MFD keys and their associated functions.
(1) ERP Radar Controls

The ERP faceplate contains several Weather Radar System controls. Control
functions are identical from one weather radar to another. When any of these controls
are activated the ERP sends the input to the FMS.
PUSH RDR ON – Located in the center of the RANGE knob, this switch is used to
activate the weather display on the MFD. When the MAP mode is displayed on the
MFD, pressing this switch will superimpose weather radar on the map display.
Pressing this switch again will remove superimposed weather radar from the map
display. Also, when this switch is pressed while the MFD is in HSI format, weather
only format will be displayed on the MFD.
RANGE – Turning this knob selects radar/map display range from 5 nm to 300 nm
and up to 600 nm in plan map. Range annunciation will be displayed on the MFD.
RDR – This key provides display of the Radar Functions page. (RADAR CNTRL) on
the onside FMS. Pressing this key a second time displays the second Radar Function
page. Radar functions are selected from these two pages.
PUSH ZERO – Located in the center of the TILT knob, this switch is pressed to set
the vertical tilt of the weather radar antenna to zero degrees.
TILT – Turning this knob selects the tilt angle of the weather radar antenna from –14
degrees to +14 degrees. Tilt annunciation is displayed on the ND/MFD.
(2) ERP/MFD Keys and Switches
HSI – This key provides display of a conventional compass rose on the MFD. A
traditional Horizontal Situation Indicator will be displayed. Radar targets will not
display in HSI format.
MAP – This key is sued to display a present position map on the MFD.
TFC – This is only active if TCAS is installed. If so, it will display a traffic map on
the MFD.
NAV – This key is sued to display a navigation source menu (NAV SOURCE 1/1) on
the onside FMS from which navigation sensors may be selected for onside display on
the PFD/MFD.
BRG – This key is used to display a Bearing Pointers (BRG PTRS) menu. The menu
lists sensors which may be selected for driving bearing pointers on the PFD/MFD.
Page 31
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
This Temporary Change supersedes Temporary Change 8. Remove and discard Temporary
Change 8. Insert this Temporary Change adjacent Page 101 in the FAA Approval section.
Purpose
This Temporary Change is issued to update the documents referenced, add documents that
are relevant to this product and remove documents that are not applicable.
Instructions
Replace all text and listed documents on Pages 101 to 103 with the following:
FAA Approval
1. General
Approval of the FMS System is not authorized by this Installation Manual. Acceptance for the
installation and use of the FMS and its associated components must be sought through the
appropriate offices of the Federal Aviation Administration or other certifying agency. It is
recommended that all proposed installations be coordinated with the local jurisdiction of the Federal
Aviation Administration or other certifying agency prior to performing the installation.
NOTE: The TSO identifies the minimum performance standards, tests and other conditions
applicable for issuance of design and production approval of the article. The TSO does not
specifically identify acceptable conditions for installation of the article. The STC applicant
is responsible for documenting all limitations and conditions suitable for installation of the
article. An applicant requesting approval for installation of the article within a specific
type or class of product is responsible for determining environmental and functional
compatibility.
It is recommended that when certifying (SCN 1000 or 1100) use the variable X (1000.X)
in the original certification package to ensure point changes will not affect future
certification requirements and to assure that the AFMS will not need to be changed with
point changes.
NOTE: All first time approvals using performance Vspeeds and engine thrust rating computations
for a specific aircraft model must be approved by TC or STC process.
Page 1 of 4
34-60-52 20 December 2012
A. Applicable TSOs
(1) TSO-C109 (09-Dec-1985): Airborne Navigation Data Storage System
(2) TSO-C115b (30-Sep-1994): Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-sensor
Inputs
(3) TSO-C146c (09-May-2008): Stand-Alone Airborne Navigation Equipment Using the
Global Positioning System Augmented by the Satellite Based Augmentation System
(4) TSO-C190 (03/20/07): Active Airborne Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
Antenna
B. Applicable Advisory Circulars and Other References
(1) AC 20-138C (06-May-2012): Airworthiness Approval of Position & Navigation
Systems
(2) AC 25-15 (20-Nov-1989): Approval of Flight Management Systems in Transport
Category Airplanes
(3) AC 90-45A (21-Feb-1975): Approval of Area Navigation Systems for use in the U.S.
National Airspace System
(4) AC 90-100A (01-Mar-2007): U.S Terminal and En Route Area Navigation (RNAV)
Operations
(5) AC 91-49 (23-Aug-1977): General Aviation Procedures for Flight in North Atlantic
Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications Airspace
(6) AC 120-33 (24-Jun-1977): Operational Approval of Airborne Long Range
Navigation Systems for Flight within the North Atlantic Minimum Navigation
Performance Specifications Airspace
(7) EASA AMC 20-4: Airworthiness Approval and Operational Criteria For the Use of
Navigation Systems in European Airspace Designated For Basic RNAV Operations
(8) EASA AMC 20-5: Airworthiness Approval and Operational Criteria for the use of
the Navstar Global Positioning System (GPS)
(9) EASA AMC 20-12: Recognition of FAA Order 8400.12a For RNP-10 Operations
(10) JAA TGL-10 (11-Jan-2000): Airworthiness and Operational Approval for Precision
RNAV Operations in Designated European Airspace
Page 2 of 4
34-60-52 20 December 2012
C. Reference Documents
(1) RTCA/DO-160E (09-Dec-2004): Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for
Airborne Equipment
(2) RTCA/DO-178B (01-Dec-1992): Software considerations in Airborne Systems and
Equipment Certification
(3) RTCA/DO-187 (13-Nov-1984): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Airborne Area Navigation Equipment Using Multi-Sensor Inputs (MPS for
TSO-C115b)
(4) RTCA/DO-301 (13-Dec-2006): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Airborne Active Antenna Equipment for
the L1 Frequency Band (MPS for TSO-C190)
(5) RTCA/DO-229D (13-Dec-2006): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Global Positioning System/Wide Area Augmentation System Airborne Equipment
(MPS for TSO-C146c)
(6) RTCA/DO-236B (28-Oct-2003): Minimum Aviation System Performance Standards:
Required Navigation Performance for Area Navigation
(7) RTCA/DO-254 (19-Apr-2000): Design Assurance Guidance for Airborne Electronic
Hardware
(8) RTCA/DO-283A (28-Oct-2003): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Required Navigation Performance for Area Navigation (MPS for TSO-C115c)
(9) EUROCAE ED-58 (Jun-1988): Minimum Operational Performance Specification for
Area Navigation Equipment Using Multi-Sensor Inputs (MPS for ETSO-C115b)
D. Universal Avionics Publications and Documents
(1) 34-60-53: WAAS FMS Interface Manual
(2) 34-61-01: WAAS/SBAS FMS Configuration Manual for SCN 1000/1100
(3) Service Letter No. 2753: Basic RNAV (BRNAV)/RNP-5 Operation in European
Airspace
(4) Service Letter No. 2758: RNP-10 Operations in the North and Central Pacific
(5) Service Letter No. 2792: JAA PRNAV UASC Compliance Evaluation Summary
(6) Service Letter No. 2804: UASC FMS Compliance with FAA Advisory Circular
90-100A
(7) Service Letter No. 2814: Compliance Summary for RNP-4 Operations (FAA Order
8400.33)
(8) Service Letter No. 2818: UASC FMS Compliance with RNP and RNAV
Requirements
(9) Service Letter No. 2838: AC 20-138B Compliance Evaluation Summary for
WAAS/SBAS FMS
Page 3 of 4
34-60-52 20 December 2012
(10) Universal Avionics Report No. RPRT-2009-1004, Engineering Assisted Field
Approval Process for the Installation Upgrade of Universal Avionics FMS Approved
fort 3D Coupled Approaches to Universal Avionics SBAS FMS with LPV Approach
Capability.
Use this document for upgrades that fall under these categories:
The existing FMS installation must be laterally and vertically integrated to the flight
instruments capable of meeting the scaling requirements of TSO-C146c and
RTCA/DO 229D. Note that the flight instruments do not require approval to
TSOC146c, only that they must meet the scaling requirements. Analog / mechanical
flight instruments inherently meet these scaling requirements as deviation scaling is
under the control of the FMS.
The existing FMS installation must be approved for lateral and vertical coupled
operation to the Fight Guidance System (FGS). Interfaces to the FGS using the analog
ILS channel inherently meet these scaling requirements as deviation scaling is under
the control of the FMS.
The existing FMS installation in the candidate aircraft must be approved by FAA TC,
FAA STC, or Field Approval.
Page 4 of 4
34-60-52 20 December 2012
FAA Approval
1. General
Approval of the FMS System is not authorized by this Installation Manual. Acceptance for
the installation and use of the FMS and its associated components must be sought through the
appropriate offices of the Federal Aviation Administration or other certifying agency. It is
recommended that all proposed installations be coordinated with the local jurisdiction of the
Federal Aviation Administration or other certifying agency prior to performing the
installation.
NOTE: The TSO identifies the minimum performance standards, tests and other conditions
applicable for issuance of design and production approval of the article. The TSO
does not specifically identify acceptable conditions for installation of the article.
The TSO applicant is responsible for documenting all limitations and conditions
suitable for installation of the article. An applicant requesting approval for
installation of the article within a specific type or class of product is responsible for
determining environmental and functional compatibility.
It is recommended that when certifying (SCN 1000 or 1100) use the variable X
(1000.X) in the original certification package to ensure point changes will not affect
future certification requirements and to assure that the AFMS will not need to be
changed with point changes.
A. Applicable TSOs
(1) TSO-C109 (12/09/85): Airborne Navigation Data Storage System
(2) TSO-C115b (9/30/94): Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-sensor
Inputs
(3) TSO-C146b (2/14/07): Stand-Alone Airborne Navigation Equipment Using the
Global Positioning System Augmented by the Satellite Based Augmentation System
NOTE: All first time approvals using performance Vspeeds and engine thrust rating
computations for a specific aircraft model must be approved by TC or STC
process.
(4) ETSO-C146 ( ): Stand-Alone Airborne Navigation Equipment Using the Global
Positioning System Augmented by the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS)
(5) TSO-C190 (03/20/07): Active Airborne Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
Antenna
(6) JTSO C115b: Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-sensor Inputs
B. Applicable Advisory Circulars and Other References
(1) AC 20-129 (9/12/88): Airworthiness Approval of Vertical Navigation (VNAV)
Systems for use in the U.S. National Airspace System (NAS) and Alaska
(2) AC 20-130A (6/14/95): Airworthiness Approval of Navigation or Flight Management
Systems Integrating Multiple Navigation Sensors
Page 101
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) AC 20-138A (12/22/03): Airworthiness Approval of Global Navigation Satellite
System (GNSS) Equipment
(4) AC 23.1309-1C (3/12/99): Equipment, Systems and Installations in Part 23 Aircraft
(5) AC 25.1309-1A (6/21/88): System Design and Analysis
(5) AC 25-15 (11/20/89): Approval of Flight Management Systems in Transport
Category Airplanes
(6) AC 90-45A (02/21/75): Approval of Area Navigation Systems for use in the U.S.
National Airspace System
(6) AC 90-94 (12/14/94): Guidelines for Using Global Positioning System Equipment
For IFR Enroute And Terminal Operations And For Non-precision Instrument
Approaches In The U.S. National Airspace System
(7) AC 90-100A (03/01/07): U.S Terminal and En Route Area Navigation (RNAV)
Operations
(8) AC 91-49 (8/23/77): General Aviation Procedures for Flight in North Atlantic
Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications Airspace
(9) AC 120-33 (6/24/77): Operational Approval of Airborne Long Range Navigation
Systems for Flight within the North Atlantic Minimum Navigation Performance
Specifications Airspace
(9) LEAFLET NO 2 Rev 1 (14.05.97): JAA Guidance Material On Airworthiness
Approval And Operational Criteria For Use Of The Navigation Systems In European
Airspace Designated For Basic RNAV Operations (JAA Administrative & Guidance
Material Section 1/Part 3)
(10) LEAFLET NO. 3 Rev 1 (18.12.97): JAA Guidance Material on Airworthiness
Approval and Operational Criteria for the Use of the Navstar Global Positioning
System (GPS)
(11) LEAFLET NO. 10: JAA Guidance Material on Airworthiness and Operational
Approval for Precision RNAV Operations in Designated European Airspace
C. Reference Documents
(1) RTCA/DO-160E (9 December 2004): Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment
(2) RTCA/DO-178B (1 December 1992): Software considerations in Airborne Systems
and Equipment Certification
(3) RTCA/DO-187 (13 November 1984): Minimum Operational Performance Standards
for Airborne Area Navigation Equipment Using Multi-Sensor Inputs
(4) RTCA/DO-301 (13 December 2006): Minimum Operational Performance Standards
for Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Airborne Active Antenna Equipment
for the L1 Frequency Band
(5) RTCA/DO-229D: Minimum Operational Performance Standards for Global
Positioning System/Wide Area Augmentation System Airborne Equipment
Page 102
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(6) RTCA/DO-236B (28 October 2003): Minimum Aviation System Performance
Standards: Required Navigation Performance for Area Navigation
(7) RTCA/DO-254 (19 April 2000): Design Assurance Guidance for Airborne Electronic
Hardware
(8) RTCA/DO-283A (28 October 2003): Minimum Operational Performance Standards
for Required Navigation Performance for Area Navigation
(9) ARINC Specification 419-3 (11 December 1984): Digital Data System Compendium
(10) ARINC Specification 424-18 (November 2005): Navigation Systems Data Base
(11) ARINC Specification 429-ALL: Mark 33 Digital Information Transfer System (DITS)
(12) ARINC Specification 561-11 (17 January 1975): Air Transport Inertial Navigation
System (INS)
(13) ARINC Characteristic 571-2 (15 May 1974): Inertial Sensor System (ISS)
(14) ARINC Specification 578 (October 1988): Airborne ILS Receiver
(15) ARINC Specification 600 (10 March 1996): Air Transport Avionics Equipment
Interfaces
(16) ARINC 702 (December 2006): Advanced Flight Management Computer System
(17) ARINC Characteristic 704-6 (March 1993): Inertial Reference System
(18) ARINC Characteristic 706-4 (January 1988): Mark 5 Subsonic Air Data System
(19) EUROCAE ED-58 (June 1988): Minimum Operational Performance Specification
for Area Navigation Equipment Using Multi-Sensor Inputs
(20) EUROCAE ED-72A (April 1997): Minimum Operational Performance Specification
for Airborne GPS Receiving Equipment Used for Supplemental Means of Navigation
(21) Universal Avionics Report No. RPRT-2009-1004, Engineering Assisted Field
Approval Process for the Installation Upgrade of Universal Avionics FMS Approved
fort 3D Coupled Approaches to Universal Avionics SBAS FMS with LPV Approach
Capability.
Use this document for upgrades that fall under these categories:
The existing FMS installation must be laterally and vertically integrated to the flight
instruments capable of meeting the scaling requirements of TSO-C146c and
RTCA/DO 229D. Note that the flight instruments do not require approval to TSO-
C146c, only that they must meet the scaling requirements. Analog / mechanical flight
instruments inherently meet these scaling requirements as deviation scaling is under
the control of the FMS.
The existing FMS installation must be approved for lateral and vertical coupled
operation to the Fight Guidance System (FGS). Interfaces to the FGS using the
analog ILS channel inherently meet these scaling requirements as deviation scaling is
under the control of the FMS.
The existing FMS installation in the candidate aircraft must be approved by FAA TC,
FAA STC, or Field Approval.
Page 103
34-60-52 3 February 2011
D. TSO Deviations
In accordance with the provisions outlined in 14 CFR 21.609, Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation has been granted deviations from TSO-C146b for the following paragraphs
within RTCA/DO-229D.
(1) Paragraph 2.1.3.2.2.3 – FDE Prediction
The FMS will continue to remove satellites from the position solution when
deselected by the pilot. This protocol is used in Universal’s TSO-C129a GPS-1000,
GPS-1200 and GNSS-2400 products as well as throughout the FMS product line.
Universal Avionics’ position is that this feature is a valuable aid in demonstrating
compliance to the MPS accuracy and integrity requirements, both in the lab and flight
testing.
(2) Paragraph 2.2.1.1.4.5 - Alphanumerics
The FMS identifies each waypoint as per the charted procedure. The waypoints are
not specifically labeled as IAW, FAWP, MAWP or Missed Approach Holding Fix.
The FAWP is readily identifiable to the crew by the corresponding approach label
“GPS 08” or “ILS 27”. MAWP is identified by the runway identifier, waypoint name
when applicable, and the End of Approach label *EOA*. The missed approach
holding fix is identified by the waypoint name and holding pattern annunciation.
(3) Paragraph 2.2.1.1.6 – Set of Standard Function Labels
Universal Avionics consistently employs the same set of labels and messages across
the entire FMS product line. Universal chooses to retain the human interface currently
in use throughout our product line and operated by thousands of flight crews today.
The modified MPS Table 2-6 shown below identifies current Universal labels and
messages where deviations were granted.
Table 2-6 Labels and Messages (Modified)
Function Label/Message Universal Label/Message/Function
CDU Keys
Suspend / Suspend (SUSP) Universal’s FMSs do not support the suspend/unsuspend function as it is
unsuspend unnecessary in our family of FMSs. The suspend functionality may be
automatic waypoint accomplished at any point on the flight plan by entering the FMS heading
sequencing mode. This allows maneuvering off the flight plan or onto subsequent leg
via the intercept mode The pilot may also enter a GAP into the active flight
plan. This functionality is accessed from the flight plan pages. When a
GAP has been inserted, the flight plan will not auto-sequence to the next
leg. Rather, the aircraft will fly an extension of the last leg. The pilot can
then enter into a heading mode and vector as required. To reestablish
waypoint sequencing to the original flight plan, the pilot may go "Direct To"
or edit the “gap” out of the flight plan.
Access to selecting OBS, CRS Universal’s FMS uses a well established “PVOR” function for this
a course to or from procedure, which allows the creation of courses to or from any waypoint in
a waypoint the flight plan. The PVOR is accessed from either the NAV MENU page or
the DTO mode key. The pilot then is given the option to enter a waypoint
and select the desired track to or from the selected waypoint.
Clear previous Clear (CLR) Universal’s FMS utilizes the “BACK” key. The back key is analogous to the
entry, no, or delete Backspace key on a computer keyboard.
Page 104
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Table 2-6 Labels and Messages (Modified)

Function Label/Message Universal Label/Message/Function
CDU Keys
Access Direct-To Direct To Universal’s FMS utilizes the “DTO” Key for this function.
function
Access to nearest Nearest (NRST) Universal’s FMS utilizes a “DIVERT” line select key on the DTO page for
airports or other this function. The DIVERT page displays a list of up to 12 of the closest
fixes airports with associated bearing, range, and longest runway based on
current present position. There is a prompt where the pilot can select the
airport for automatic insertion into the flight plan.
Select Vectors-to- Vectors-to-Final The flight crew can initiate this function by pressing the “ACT APPR” Line
Final (Section (VTF) Select key any time the approach is armed. Once the approach is
2.2.3.2.1) activated, the option to intercept the Final Approach course becomes
available via FMS heading mode.
Annunciations
Indication of loss of LOI “Loss of Universal’s FMS uses an amber “INTEG” annunciation on EFIS or a
integrity monitoring Integrity - Cross separate annunciator.
Check NAV.”
Indication of WPT (flashing) Universal’s FMS uses the message “WAYPOINT ALERT. The Universal
impending turn or “Turn to [next FMS provides a discrete that flashes at waypoint sequencing. In the UASC
heading] in King Air certification aircraft, the waypoint name that is being sequenced
[distance] nm” flashes on the EFI-890R map display and lower left hand corner where the
TO waypoint is displayed. The EFI-890R primary flight display also flashes
the TO waypoint name in the lower left corner upon waypoint sequencing.
(4) Paragraph 2.2.1.3.16 - Parallel Offsets

The FMS provides bearing, distance, time and To/From to the original flight plan
waypoint to comply with SAE 4102/9, Flight Management Systems (FMS), paragraph
3.2.2.17.
Universal’s philosophy is that situational awareness is best served by referencing the

original flight plan since the map display and ATC directions both reference the
original flight plan path. Offset reference points are not named nor shown on any
chart. It should also be noted that some map displays used bearing and distance to
draw the TO waypoint. Subsequent waypoints are drawn using geo-referenced
coordinates or other means independent of bearing and distance. With these displays,
the effect of this requirement would be that the map display would show the TO
waypoint as an offset, and subsequent waypoints on the original path.
The FMS meets the requirement of not propagating through unreasonable path
geometries. The FMS terminates the offset when the approach becomes active rather
than at the IAF. FMS offsets are not terminated at leg discontinuities. Guidance will
be provided to an extension of the previous leg and the pilot is presented with a
“Current Leg Extended” message.
Page 105
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(5) Paragraph 2.2.3.3.1 - Approach Path Definition
The FMS has the capability for activating a VTF function throughout the product line.
When an approach is manually activated by a line select key labeled ACT APPR all
waypoints in the approach are sequenced and a CF leg is created to the FAF (FAWP)
or the FACF if one is present in the approach coding. This allows the FMS Heading
Mode (FHDG) to be entered and a heading to intercept the final approach course
programmed. Regardless of heading, the deviations are always provided to the first
approach leg according to the procedure. This MPS requirement does not allow
conformance to the published procedure when a FACF is present.
Universal understands the inclusion of this requirement because of concerns with
overshoot of the lateral approach path. However, Universal is able to demonstrate
acceptable performance up to 80 degrees course change at the FAF when it is not
designated as “Overfly”. Suspending sequencing means that if the pilot takes no
action the aircraft will most certainly overshoot the approach course.
2. Software Criticality
The software embedded in the FMS is categorized as DO-178B Level C (Major). Level C
software is defined as “software whose anomalous behavior, as shown by the system safety
assessment process, would cause or contribute to a failure of system function resulting in a
major failure condition for the aircraft.”
TSO-C146b designates erroneous guidance during an LPV or LP approach to be a severe-
major hazard. Therefore, all software involved in LPV or LP, guidance, and I/O processing is
categorized as DO-178B Level B (Hazardous/Severe-Major) with redundant hardware to
support required integrity. UASC chose to meet this level with dual FMS/WAAS in which all
precision approach guidance, I/O, and cross-channel monitoring is performed by the DO-
178B Level B WAAS subsystem.
3. Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness, FAR 23.1529, 25.1529,
27.1529 and 29.1529
Permission is hereby granted to use all or part of our statement for STC/337 certification
purposes.
Our statement in compliance with FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529 follows:
A. General Information
SYSTEM: UNS-1Lw Flight Management System
Modification of an aircraft by this Supplemental Type Certificate or Form 337 obligates the
aircraft operator to include the maintenance information provided by this document in the
operator’s Aircraft Maintenance Manual and the operator’s Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance
Program.
(1) Maintenance Manual information for the UNS-1Lw (system description, removal,
installation, testing, etc.) is contained in Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s
(UASC) Installation Manual 34-60-52. System operation is described fully in the
UASC Operator’s Manual Report No. 2423sv1000 where 1000 equals the system
software.
Page 106
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the FAA Approval section adjacent Page 106.
Purpose
This Temporary Change adds LP Approach Limitation.
Instructions
Add the following text to page 106 after paragraph (5):
(6) Paragraph 2.1 – General Requirements (LP Approach Limitation)

The UNS-1( )w does not implement LP approaches. While a formal FAA TSO deviation was
not requested, the FAA was aware of the absence of LP approach capability and issued the
TSO Authorization without issue. LP Approach types are removed from the navigation
databases at every cycle, and therefore, cannot be added to a flight plan directly in the FMS
or using the off-line flight planning (UFP) software. No safety hazards have been identified
with the lack of LP approach support.
Page 1 of 1
34-60-52 10 September 2012

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Purpose
This Temporary Change removes the term "LP" from the software criticality description.
Instructions
Replace the second paragraph under Software Criticality with the following:
TSO-C146b designates erroneous guidance during an LPV approach to be a severe-major
hazard. Therefore, all software involved in LPV, guidance, and I/O processing is categorized
as DO-178B Level B (Hazardous/Severe-Major) with redundant hardware to support required
integrity. UASC chose to meet this level with dual FMS/WAAS in which all precision
approach guidance, I/O, and cross-channel monitoring is performed by the DO-178B Level B
WAAS subsystem.
Page 1 of 1
34-60-52 10 September 2012
(2) Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) part numbers and other necessary part numbers
contained in the installation data package should be placed in the aircraft operator’s
appropriate aircraft Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC).
(3) Wiring diagram information contained in this data package should be placed into the
aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals.
(4) Revision to this document will be accomplished via Service Bulletin and /or
Installation Manual Revision.
B. Airworthiness Limitations
Scheduled Maintenance
Program tasks to be added to the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft maintenance program
are as follows:
(1) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Servicing Tasks: None Required.
(2) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Preventative Maintenance Tests/Checks to
Determine System Condition and/or Latent Failures: None Required.
(3) Recommended Periodic Inspections: None Required.
(4) Recommended Periodic Structural Inspections: None Required.
(5) Recommended Replacement Interval: None Required
Unscheduled Maintenance
Unscheduled maintenance may include upgrade of the program software contained in the
FMS. If the FMS is removed and the software changed, the configuration settings should be
checked and amended as necessary in accordance with the instructions contained in
applicable manuals.
4. Environmental Qualification Forms
The environmental categories under which the FMS is approved (reference RTCA DO-160E)
are listed on the accompanying Environmental Qualification Forms in this section.
Page 107
34-60-52 3 February 2011
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
NOMENCLATURE: UNS-1Lw Flight Management System and Configuration Module
PART NO.: 3116-X2-111X & 31921
TSO NUMBER: C115b & C146b
DO178B: Level B/Level C
MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATION AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION:
Contained in the appropriate Technical Manual
MANUFACTURER: Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
3260 E. Universal Way
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Conditions Category Description of Conducted Tests
Section
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 A2E1 -55°C/-15°C
Operating Low Temperature
Low Operating Temperature 4.5.2 A2E1 -15°C,-20°C
Ground Survival High Temperature 4.5.3 A2E1 +85°C/+70°C
Short Term High Operating Temperature
High Operating Temperature 4.5.4 X
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.5 W Not Required
Altitude 4.6.1 A2E1 +15,000 feet, +70,000 feet
Decompression 4.6.2 A2E1 +70,000 feet
Overpressure 4.6.3 A2E1 -15,000 feet
Temperature Variation 5.0 B 5°C per minute
Humidity 6.0 A
Operational Shocks and Crash Safety 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 SB,SM
Explosion Proofness 9.0 H
Waterproofness 10.0 W
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 X Not Required
Sand and Dust 12.0 X Not Required
Fungus Resistance 13.0 X Not Required
Salt Spray 14.0 X Not Required
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Less than 0.3m to cause deflection of 1
degree
Power Input 16.0 Z
Voltage Spike 17.0 A
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 Z
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Z
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 M
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3,J33
Susceptibility
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X Not Required
Icing 24.0 X Not Required
Electric Discharge 25.0 A
Fire, Flammability 26.0 C
Page 108
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the FAA Approval section adjacent to Page 108.
Purpose
To correct the TSO Number for the UNS-1Lw FMS and Configuration Module.
Instructions
On the Environment Qualification Form for the UNS-1Lw FMS and Configuration Module,
replace TSO Number C146b with C146c.
Page 1 of 1
34-60-52 22 November 2011

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Purpose
This Temporary Change updates all 4-Inch FPCDU Environmental Qualification Forms
(EQF) and adds an EQF for the 4-Inch FPCDU with Mod 14.
Instructions
Update EQFs on Pages 109 thru 111 with the following and add EQF with Part Number
1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6 (with Mod 14) after Page 111.
Page 1 of 6
34-60-52 19 February 2013
NOMENCLATURE: 4-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit
PART NO.: 1117-XX
TSO NUMBER: C115b & C129a
DO-178B: Level C
Contained in the appropriate Installation Manual
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160C
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1D1 -20°C Operating, -55°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.2 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
High Temperature 4 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C Operating,
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Applicable
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 50,000 FT
Decompression 4.6.2 A1 50,000 FT
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1 -15,000 FT
Temperature Variation 5.0 B
Humidity 6.0 A 55°C, 95%, 48 HOURS
Operational Shock and Crash 7.0 Equipment Tested per DO-160C, Para. 7
Safety
Operational Shocks 7.2 6.0 g
Crash Safety 7.3 15.0g, 12.0 g
Vibration 8.0 B, M & N
Explosion 9.0 X N/A, not spark producing and no hot surfaces
Waterproofness 10.0 X N/A, no exposed to falling water in normal
operation
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 X N/A, fluid containment no commonly encountered
Sand and dust 12.0 X N/A, not exposed to blowing sand and dust
Fungus Resistance 13.0 X N/A, not exposed to severe fungus contamination
Salt Spray 14.0 X N/A, not subjected to salt atmosphere
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
(radiated and conducted)
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 Z
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3E3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method
Susceptibility of AC 20-136
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X Equipment not externally mounted.
Icing 24.0 X Equipment not externally mounted.
Page 2 of 6
34-60-52 19 February 2013
PART NO.: 1117-X-XX3 and 1117-X-XX4
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1 -15°C Operating, -55°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.2 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C Operating,
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 V 30 Minute Minimum
Altitude 4.6.1 D1 50,000 FT
Shock 7.0 B Equipment Tested per DO-160D, Para. 7
Vibration 8.0 SM & SB Fixed Wing Turbo Jet , Turbo Fan (SB)
Fixed Wing Reciprocating, Turboprop (SM)
Explosion 9.0 X N/A, not spark producing and no hot surfaces
operation
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Less than 0.3m to cause deflection of one degree
Power Input 16.0 Z 28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Voltage Spike 17.0 A High degree of protection against voltage spikes
req’d
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 Z 28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Susceptibility – Power Inputs
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Z Interference free operation is required
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R&V Ref. DO-160D
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 M Equipment not in direct view of receiver antenna.
Equipment located in cabin or cockpit
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 XXE3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method
Susceptibility of AC 20-136
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X N/A, equipment not mounted externally
Icing 24.0 X N/A, equipment mounted in temperature controlled
area
ESD 25.0 A 15,000 Volts
Page 3 of 6
34-60-52 19 February 2013
PART NO.: 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6 (without Mod 14)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1D1 -55°C Survival , -15°C ( A1), -20°C (D1) Operating
4.5.2 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 15,000 ft (A1), 50,000 ft (D1)
Shock 7.0 B Equipment tested per DO-160D, Para. 7
Vibration 8.0 SB & SM Fixed Wing Turbo Jet , Turbo Fan (SB)
Fixed Wing Reciprocating, Turboprop (SM)
Explosion 9.0 X Not spark producing and no hot surfaces
operation
required
28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Susceptibility
HIRF conditions are part of normal environment
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3, J33
Ref. DO-160D
Susceptibility
area
ESD 25.0 A 15,000 Volts
Page 4 of 6
34-60-52 19 February 2013
PART NO.: 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6 (with Mod 14)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Low Temperature Survival 4.5.1 A1D1 -55°C Survival , -15°C (A1), -20°C (D1) Operating
Low Temperature Short Term 4.5.1 A1D1
+85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
Operating
Low Temperature Operating 4.5.2 A1D1 -15°C (A1), 20 °C (D1)
High Temperature Survival 4.5.3 A1D1 +85°C
High Temperature Short Term 4.5.3 A1D1 +70°C
Operating
High Temperature Operating 4.5.4 A1D1 +55°C
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 15,000 ft (A1), 50,000 ft (D1)
Shock 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 SB Fixed Wing Turbo Jet , Turbo Fan
SM Fixed Wing Reciprocating, Turboprop
U Helicopters with unknown rotor related
frequencies
Explosion 9.0 X Not spark producing and no hot surfaces
operation
required
28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Susceptibility
HIRF conditions are part of normal environment
Page 5 of 6
34-60-52 19 February 2013
Conditions DO-160E Category

Description of Conducted Tests
Section
Susceptibility
area
ESD 25.0 A 15,000 Volts
Fire, Flammability 26.0 X N/A
Page 6 of 6
34-60-52 19 February 2013
PART NO.: 1117-XX
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160C
Section
High Temperature 4.5.2 and A1 +55°C Operating, +85°C Survival (+70°C Short
4.5.3 D1 Term)
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Applicable
7.0 Equipment Tested per DO-160C, Para. 7
Shock 7.2 6.0 g
7.3 15.0g, 12.0 g
Vibration 8.0 B, M & N
Explosion 9.0 X
Waterproofness 10.0 X
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 X
Sand and dust 12.0 X
Fungus Resistance 13.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 Z
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3E3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method
Susceptibility of
AC 20-136
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X
Icing 24.0 X
Page 109
34-60-52 3 February 2011
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1 -15°C Operating, -55°C Survival
4.5.3 D1 Term)
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 V
Decompression 4.6.2 A1D1 50,000 FT
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1D1 -15,000 FT
Shock 7.0 B Equipment Tested per DO-160D, Para. 7
Vibration 8.0 SM & SB
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R&V
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 XXE3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method
Susceptibility of
AC 20-136
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 110
34-60-52 3 February 2011
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 D1 -20°C Operating, -55°C Survival
4.5.3 D1 Term)
Decompression 4.6.2 D1 50,000 FT
Overpressure 4.6.3 D1 -15,000 FT
Shock 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 S
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R, RR
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 111
34-60-52 3 February 2011
PART NO.: 1018-XX-XXX
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160C
Section
Low Operating Temperature 4.5.2 A1D1 +55°C Operating, +85°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C Operating, +85°C Survival
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X N/A
Decompression 4.6.2 A1D1 50,000 FT
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1D1 -15,000 FT
Shock 7.0 B Equipment Tested per DO-160C
Vibration 8.0 S
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R, R
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 112
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the FAA Approval section adjacent to Page 113.
Purpose
To correct the TSO Number for the LP/LPV Monitor.
Instructions
On the Environment Qualification Form for the LP/LPV Monitor, replace TSO Number
C146b with C146c.
Page 1 of 1
34-60-52 22 November 2011
NOMENCLATURE: LP/LPV Monitor
PART NO.: 3116-52-1110
TSO NUMBER: C115b and C146b
DO178B: Level B
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Conditions Section Category Description of Conducted Tests
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 A2E1 -55°C/-40°C
Operating Low Temperature
Low Operating Temperature 4.5.2 A2E1 -20°C
Ground Survival High Temperature 4.5.3 A2E1 +70°C
Short Term High Operating Temperature
In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 A2E1
Altitude 4.6.1 A2E1 +70,000 feet
Decompression 4.6.2 A2E1 +70,000 feet
Overpressure 4.6.3 A2E1 -15,000 feet
Humidity 6.0 A
Vibration 8.0 SB
SM
Explosion Proofness 9.0 H
Waterproofness 10.0 W
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Less than 0.3m to cause deflection of 1
degree
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3
Susceptibility J33
Page 113
34-60-52 3 February 2011
NOMENCLATURE: Data Transfer Unit DTU-100
PART NO.: 1406-( )
TSO NUMBER: C109
DO-178B: Level D
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 C4 0°C
High Temperature 4.5.3 C4 +70°C
Altitude 4.6.1 C4 +35,000 ft.
Decompression 4.6.2 C4 +35,000 ft.
Overpressure 4.6.3
Humidity 6.0 A
Shock 7.0 E
Vibration 8.0 SM
SB
Explosion 9.0 E2
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 V
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 XXE3
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 114
34-60-52 3 February 2011
NOMENCLATURE: Solid State Data Transfer Unit
PART NO.: 1408-( )
TSO NUMBER: C109
DO178B: Level D
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 C4 -55° C Survival Low Temperature
Operating Low Temperature -20° C Operating Low Temperature
Ground Survival High Temperature 4.5.3 C4 +85° C Survival High Temperature
Short Term High Operating Temperature +70° C Operating High Temperature
In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Required
Altitude 4.6.1 C4 +35,000 feet
Decompression 4.6.2 C4 +35,000 feet
Overpressure 4.6.3 - -15,000 feet
Humidity 6.0 A Standard humidity environment
Vibration 8.0 SM, SB Standard vibration test
Explosion Proofness 9.0 H Hot spot non-spark producing surfaces
Waterproofness 10.0 X Not Required
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Deflection distance is less than 0.3 m
Power Input 16.0 Z DO-160E allows Z in place of B
Voltage Spike 17.0 A High degree of protection required.
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 Z DO-160E allows Z in place of B
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 ZC Interference-free operation is required
primary power is a constant freq. or DC
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R Installed in normal HIRF environment
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 E3
Susceptibility
Electric Discharge 25.0 A Air discharge applied to normally
accessible surfaces
Fire, Flammability 26.0 X Not required
Page 115
34-60-52 3 February 2011
NOMENCLATURE: WAAS (SBAS) GPS Antenna
PART NO.: 10708
TSO NUMBER: C190
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Temperature & Altitude 4.0 F2
Temperature Variation 5.0 A
Humidity 6.0 B
Shock 7.0 BD
Vibration 8.0 S(C,L,M,Y)
U (FF1)
Explosion 9.0 X
Waterproofness 10.0 SY
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 F
Sand and dust 12.0 S
Salt Spray 14.0 S
Power Input 16.0 X
Voltage Spike 17.0 X
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 X
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 ZCZW
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 Y
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 H
Susceptibility J44
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 2A
Icing 24.0 C
ESD 25.0 A
Page 116
34-60-52 3 February 2011
NOMENCLATURE: WAAS (SBAS) GPS/Sirius Antenna
PART NO.: 10709
TSO NUMBER: C190
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Temperature and Altitude 4.0 F2
Humidity 6.0 B
Shock 7.0 BD
U (FF1)
Explosion Proofness 9.0 X
Sand and Dust 12.0 S
Salt Spray 14.0 S
Power Input 16.0 X
Susceptibility
Susceptibility J44
Icing 24.0 C
Page 117
34-60-52 3 February 2011
NOMENCLATURE: WAAS (SBAS) GPS/XM Antenna
PART NO.: 10710
TSO NUMBER: C190
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Temperature and Altitude 4.0 F2
Humidity 6.0 B
Shock 7.0 BD
U (FF1)
Explosion Proofness 9.0 X
Sand and Dust 12.0 S
Salt Spray 14.0 S
Power Input 16.0 X
Susceptibility
Susceptibility J44
Icing 24.0 C
Page 118
34-60-52 3 February 2011
5. Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement [100X.X]
Prepare an Airplane Flight Manual Supplement using the following sample as a guide.
NOTE: Comments in angle brackets, < >, and italics are explanatory only and should not
appear in the final supplement.
<Name of Applicant> AFM Supplement for <Aircraft Model>

<Address>
Supplement No.
{SAMPLE}
FAA APPROVED
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
FOR
AIRCRAFT MAKE: ___________________________________________

AIRCRAFT MODEL: __________________________________________
AIRCRAFT REG: _____________________________________________
AIRCRAFT S/N: ______________________________________________
This supplement must be attached to the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual when the
airplane is modified by the installation of a Universal Avionics Systems Corporation (UASC)
UNS-1Lw Flight Management System (FMS), in accordance with STC
____________________________, (or Form 337).
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the basic manual only in those
areas listed herein. For limitations, procedures, and performance information not contained in
this supplement, consult the appropriate basic Airplane Flight Manual.
FAA Approved:
<Name>
<Title>
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION
<Name of Aircraft Certification Office>
<Address>
FAA Approved Date:
Page 1 of y
Page 119
34-60-52 3 February 2011
REVISION HISTORY
SHEET REV DESCRIPTION APPROVED

1-….. N/C Original Document Date:_______________
<Name>
<Title>
FEDERAL AVIATION
ADMINISTRATION
<Name of Aircraft Certification Office>
<Address>
Page x of y
Page 120
34-60-52 3 February 2011
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
1 General 4
2 Limitations 5
3 Emergency and Abnormal Procedures 8
4 Normal Procedures 9
5 Performance Data 12
Page x of y
Page 121
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Section I
A. Installation Description
<The following is a sample of how the introduction could read. Fully describe all interfaces
with the UNS-1Lw.>
The UNS-1Lw is a multi-sensor navigator that uses an optimal combination of sensor types
to provide unparalleled accuracy, integrity and availability. It contains an internal GNSS
sensor capable of using GPS augmented by WAAS and any other compatible Space Based
Augmentation System (SBAS). Outside SBAS coverage can integrate GPS with scanning
DME, VOR, TACAN, LORAN and IRS to provide continued navigation under any
circumstances.
The Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UNS-1Lw installation is interfaced with a
DME sensor and a VOR sensor for short-range navigation data. An internal GNSS provides
long-range position data, which is integrated with the VOR/DME position data. The internal
GNSS incorporates Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM).
The UNS-1Lw receives air data from an approved Air Data Computer. The system provides
navigation and steering data to the pilot’s EFIS and Flight Control System.
The UNS-1Lw contains software 1000.X, which provides capability for point-to-point
navigation, and approaches. Lateral and vertical steering is provided for enroute, terminal
area, and approach operation.
B. Lateral Navigation Approvals
Provided the UNS-1Lw multi-sensor navigation system is receiving usable signals, it has
been demonstrated capable of and has been shown to meet the accuracy specifications of:
(1) <The following is applicable to all dual installations or single WAAS/SBAS FMS
installations with a Universal LPV Monitor.>
This installation complies with AC 20-138A for navigation using GPS and WAAS
(within the coverage of a Space-Based Augmentation System complying with ICAO
Annex 10) for enroute, terminal area, non-precision approach operations (including
“GPS”, “or GPS” and “RNAV” approaches), approach procedures with vertical
guidance (including “LNAV/VNAV” and “LPV”). Navigation information is
referenced to the WGS-84 reference system, and should only be used for approach
where the Aeronautical Information Publication (including electronic data and
aeronautical charts) conform to WGS-84 or equivalent.
NOTE: For single FMS installations without the LPV Monitor, LPV approaches are
not available.
(2) <The following is applicable to dual installations.>
This dual installation complies with equipage and accuracy requirements of FAA
Order 8400.12A par 12(b)4 for Required Navigation Performance 10 (RNP10). This
does not constitute an operational approval.
Page x of y
Page 122
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
This Temporary Change supersedes Temporary Change 3 dated 15 July 2011. Remove and
discard Temporary Change 3. Insert this Temporary Change adjacent Page 122 in the FAA
Approval section.
Purpose
To update Lateral Navigation Approvals section in the Sample Airline Flight Manual
Supplement (AFMS).
Instructions
On page 122, replace “(1) <The following is applicable to all dual installations or single
WAAS/SBAS FMS installations with a Universal LPV Monitor>” and associated information
with the following:
(1) <The following is applicable to all dual installations or single WAAS/SBAS FMS
installations with a Universal LPV Monitor for SCN 1000.0/1100.0 through
1000.5/1100.5.>
This installation complies with AC 20-138C for navigation using GPS and WAAS
guidance (including “LNAV/VNAV” and “LPV”) with the following exceptions.
• Vertical navigation does not meet the requirements with respect to vertical
waypoint offset the bisector of the lateral course and total system error.
[AC 20-138C Para 10-2 b, 10-2 f(9)]
• FMS does not support fixed-radius transitions. [AC 20-138C Appendix A2-2 a]
Navigation information is referenced to the WGS-84 reference system, and should
only be used for approach where the Aeronautical Information Publication (including
electronic data and aeronautical charts) conform to WGS-84 or equivalent.
<The following is applicable to all dual installations or single WAAS/SBAS FMS
installations with a Universal LPV Monitor for SCN 1000.6/1100.6 or later.>
This installation complies with AC 20-138C for navigation using GPS and WAAS
guidance (including “LNAV/VNAV” and “LPV”) with the following exception.
Page 1 of 2
34-60-52 20 November 2013
• FMS does not support fixed-radius transitions. [AC 20-138C Appendix A2-2 a]
Navigation information is referenced to the WGS-84 reference system, and should
only be used for approach where the Aeronautical Information Publication
(including electronic data and aeronautical charts) conform to WGS-84 or
equivalent.
NOTES:
1. For single FMS installations without the LPV Monitor, LPV approaches are
not available.
2. Reference UASC SL2838 Rev. B or later for details and mitigation strategy
regarding compliance to AC 20-138C.
3. [Text in brackets] is for information only, and should not be inserted into the
AFMS.
Page 2 of 2
34-60-52 20 November 2013
(3) <The following is applicable to dual installations with two long-range sensors in
accordance with the NAT MNPS Advisory Circulars. Note that the internal
GPS/WAAS can be used as one of the two long range sensors, since it does
incorporate RAIM.>
Flight in the North Atlantic (NAT) Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications
(MNPS) airspace in accordance with AC 91-49 and AC 120-33.
(4) <The following is applicable to all installations.>
This installation complies with equipage and accuracy requirements of AC 90-96A
Appendix 1 paragraph 1,d,(3),(a) for B-RNAV in designated B-RNAV airspace, and
Appendix 2 paragraph 2,a,(3),(a) for P-RNAV in designated P-RNAV airspace. This
does not constitute an operational approval.
This installation complies with equipage and accuracy requirements of AC 90-100A
Paragraph 7,c,(4) for operations on U.S. Area Navigation (RNAV) routes (Q-routes
and T-routes), Departure Procedures (Obstacle Departure Procedures and Standard
Instrument Departures), and Standard Terminal Arrivals (STARs). This does not
constitute an operational approval.
(6) <The following is applicable to dual installations.>
This installation complies with equipage and accuracy requirements of FAA Order
8400.33 paragraph 9.b.(1).(c), Required Navigation Performance 4 (RNP-4) Oceanic
and Remote Area Operations when used in conjunction with the Universal Flight
Planning Program, which provides FDE prediction, PN 10751 with SCN 25.1 or later
FAA approved version. This does not constitute an operational approval.
8400.10 Volume 4, Chapter 1, Section 2, paragraph 52,D,(4), Required Navigation
Performance RNP-2, RNP-1 and RNP-0.3 when in enroute mode, terminal mode, or
non-precision approach modes respectively and the installed equipment provides
annunciation to the pilot of the mode that is in use. This does not constitute an
operational approval.
(8) <The following is applicable to Remote/Oceanic approval per Notice 8110.6.>
installations.>
The FMS installation with internal GPS/WAAS sensor has been found to comply
with the requirements for GPS primary means of navigation in oceanic and remote
airspace, when used in conjunction with the Universal Flight Panning RAIM
prediction program, P/N 10751 with SCN 25 or later FAA approved versions. This
does not constitute operational approval.
Page x of y
Page 123
34-60-52 3 February 2011
8900.1 CHG Par 4-32D, Required Navigation Performance RNP-2, RNP-1 and RNP-
0.3 when in en route mode, terminal mode, or non-precision approach modes
respectively and the installed equipment provides annunciation to the pilot of the
mode that is in use. This does not constitute an operational approval.
(10) <The following is applicable for all installations.>
This FMS installation complies with the RNAV requirements of AC 90-105 for RNP
approach, Terminal, and Enroute operations with the exception of fixed radius turns.
(11) <The following is applicable when no other external sensors are interfaced.>
The following is applicable when interfaced with an approved LORAN system:
VFR/IFR RNAV operations within the conterminous United States and Alaska in
accordance with the enroute criteria of AC 20-121A.
(12) <The following is applicable to installations with approved INS/IRS sensor(s).>
FAR Part 121, Appendix G Section 6 and Advisory Circular AC 25-4.
The table details time limitations placed on RNP-10 and BRNAV operations with
minimum sensors in NAV mode.
C. Vertical Navigation Approval

The UNS-1Lw Flight Management Systems meet the requirements for VFR/IFR Enroute,
Terminal Area and Approach VNAV operations within the conterminous United States and
Alaska in accordance with the criteria of AC 20-129.
Page x of y
Page 124
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Section 2
<The following limitations are representative. Refer to additional FAA guidance in Advisory
Circulars 20-130, 20-121A and 20-130A or 20-138A as applicable to your installation.>
A. Operator’s Manual
The FMS Operator’s Manual, Report No. 2423sv1000/1100 must be available to the flight
crew whenever navigation is predicated upon the use of the Universal Avionics Flight
Management System.
B. Navigation Equipment
Both FMSs or FMS and LP/LPV Monitor must be powered on and operational to fly RNAV
(GPS) approaches with LPV minima.
C. Annunciations
The pilot shall, while flying an RNAV(GPS) approach with LPV minima and annunciation,
verify that “LPV” is properly annunciated on the PFD (or LOS annunciators) and that there
are no navigation flags visible. This check shall take place inside the final approach fix and
in no case later than 1000 feet above the runway threshold.
D. Software Requirements
The system must utilize software version SCN 1000.X/1100.X, where X represents FAA
approved minor changes.
E. Database/Waypoint Verification
IFR, enroute and terminal navigation are prohibited unless the pilot verifies the currency of
the database or verifies each selected Waypoint for accuracy by reference to current approved
data.
F. Instrument Approaches
Instrument approaches must be accomplished in accordance with approved instrument
approach procedures that are retrieved from the FMS database.
(1) Instrument approaches must be conducted in the Approach mode, and GPS Integrity
monitoring (when using GPS/WAAS including “GPS”, “or GPS”, and “RNAV”
approaches) must be available at the Final Approach Fix, as indicated to the pilot by
the ‘INTEG’ amber annunciator being off.
(2) GPS/WAAS can only be used for approach guidance when navigation information is
referenced to the WGS-84 reference system, and should only be used where the
Aeronautical Information Publication (including electronic data and aeronautical
charts) conform to WGS-84 or equivalent.
(3) GPS/WAAS sensors will be retained for all GPS approaches and any approach with a
“G” suffix to the approach identifier on the approach arrival page. GPS will be
deselected for any pilot-defined “VOR” or “VOR/DME” RNAV approaches.
Page x of y
Page 125
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(4) Pilot-defined IFR approaches must be defined using Waypoints from the FMS
navigation database.
(5) The FMS is approved for pilot-defined VFR approaches as a VFR pilot aid only.
NOTE: All sensors remain selected for VFR approaches.
G. Latitude Limits
Displayed FMS navigation parameters are referenced to Magnetic North, and operation of the
aircraft is limited to latitudes between N73o and S60o, unless magnetic variation is manually
entered by the flight crew.
<Add appropriate comments about Mag/True switch if installed with IRS as a heading
source.>
H. VNAV Altitude Reference
When using VNAV, the Altimeter on each pilot’s panel must be used as the altitude
reference for all operations.
I. Fuel Display
Fuel display parameters are advisory only and do not replace primary fuel quantity or fuel
flow gauges for fuel load and range planning.
J. AFCS Limitations
The FMS is approved for lateral Flight Director and autopilot coupled GPS, NDB, RNAV,
VOR-DME and VOR approaches only when the UNS-1Ew is in the FMS Approach Mode
(which provides expanded HSI deviations).
K. Long Range Sensors
Navigation cannot be predicated on the use of non-GPS long range sensors alone while in
terminal areas or during departures from or approaches to airports or into valleys; e.g.,
between peaks in mountainous terrain or below Minimum Enroute Altitude (MEA).
Page x of y
Page 126
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Section 3
A. Emergency Procedures
No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
B. Abnormal Procedures
(1) If GPS RAIM becomes unavailable (indicated by a message and GPS INTEG amber
annunciator), the pilot should monitor position by cross reference to other navigation
sources as necessary.
(2) Should an FMS system component fail, in most cases the display will go blank or the
remote MSG light will flash. Pushing the MSG key will display the Message Page,
which will indicate the component which has failed.
(3) The FMS and associated components are protected by the following circuit breakers:
COMPONENT NAME BUS LOCATION
FMS DC
FMS AC
FMS ADC
TAT Probe HTR
FMS SIU
(4) In the event that a circuit breaker should “open”, the corresponding unit will be
switched off internally.
(5) If sensor information is intermittent or lost, use the remaining operational navigation
equipment as required.
(6) If VNAV information is intermittent or lost, disengage VNAV and use the altimeter
for vertical reference.
Page x of y
Page 127
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Section 4
A. Operation
Normal operating procedures are outlined in the FMS Operator’s Manual, Report
2423sv1000/1100.
B. Navigation Database Verification
After power-on self-tests have been completed, the INITIALIZATION page will appear. The
expiration date of the database will appear at the bottom of the display. If the actual date is
later than the expiration date, the FMS will notify the pilot with a “DATABASE EXPIRED”
message. Refer to the operator’s manual for navigation database update instructions.
C. System Annunciators
<Describe all external annunciators installed as part of the FMS>
The FMS generates outputs for the following annunciators on the pilot's and copilot’s
instrument panels located in or adjacent to the HSI and ADI
ANNUNCIATOR DESCRIPTION
MSG (amber) Indicates a message is to be acknowledged on the MSG
page.
WPT (Amber) Indication is displayed two minutes prior to waypoint in
enroute mode and 15 seconds prior in approach mode.
When this annunciator flashes, it indicates that an
upcoming vertical Flight Path Angle (FPA) change is within
two minutes.
SXT (Amber) Selected crosstrack is active.
HDG (Blue) The FMS is in heading sub.
APP (White) An approach has been activated.
GPS INTEG (Amber) GPS Integrity exceeds the allowable limit for phase of flight.
See also Section 3B, ABNORMAL PROCEDURES.
LP/LPV Indicates LP or LPV Approach is armed or activated.
FMS APPR (See Note) FMS Approach Mode is active.
LP/LPV (See Note) Indicates the available level of service based on the
selected SBAS Approach in the flight plan and WAAS
Subsystem integrity predictions.
LNAV (See Note) Indicates the available level of service based on the
VNAV (See Note) Indicates the available level of service based on the
NOTE: Color varies depending on installation requirements.
Page x of y
Page 128
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Purpose
This Temporary Change removes the term "LP" from the system annunciator table and adds
FMS LOS.
Instructions
Replace the table on Page 128 with the following:
ANNUNCIATOR DESCRIPTION
MSG (Amber) Indicates a message is to be acknowledged on the MSG
page.
WPT (Amber) Indication is displayed two minutes prior to waypoint in
enroute mode and 15 seconds prior in approach mode.
When this annunciator flashes, it indicates that an
upcoming vertical Flight Path Angle (FPA) change is within
two minutes.
SXT (Amber) Selected crosstrack is active.
HDG (Blue) The FMS is in heading sub.
APP (White) An approach has been activated.
GPS INTEG (Amber) GPS Integrity exceeds the allowable limit for phase of flight.
See also Section 3B, ABNORMAL PROCEDURES.
FMS APPR (See Note) FMS Approach Mode is active.
FMS LOS Indicates the available level of service based on the
LPV (Green) Indicates LPV Approach is armed or activated.
LNAV (Green) Indicates the available level of service based on the
VNAV (Green) Indicates the available level of service based on the
NOTE: Color varies depending on installation requirements.
Page 1 of 1
34-60-52 10 September 2012
D. Aircraft Integration
<The following is a sample of what the integration discussion could represent. Fully and
accurately describe all switching procedures and display options where applicable.>
(1) Collins EHSI-74 EHSI display of FMS Nav Information
NOTE: FMS can only be selected for use when a VOR frequency is tuned on the #1
Navigation receiver. Selection of an ILS frequency will cause the display to
revert to VHF Navigation.
When a valid navigation leg is selected on the FMS, guidance information can be
selected for display on the pilot's or copilot’s EHSI and ADI by selecting [FMS] on
the [FMS/NAV] switch on the Instrument Panel, adjacent to the ADI. Left/Right,
TO/FR, Nav Valid, Desired Track, Bearing to Waypoint, and Distance to Waypoint
will be depicted on the EHSI. With a valid VNAV leg defined on the FMS, vertical
deviation will be displayed
HSI DEVIATION SCALE FACTORS FOR 2 DOTS
MODE LATERAL VERTICAL
Enroute 2.0 nm 1500 ft.
Terminal 1.0 nm 492 ft.
Approach 2 degrees to 0.3 nm, then linear GPA/4
NOTE: (0.3 nm is the default and me be
designated by database.)
(2) Enroute Flight Director and Autopilot Operation

When a valid navigation leg is selected on the FMS, flight director lateral V-Bar
steering can be selected on the pilot’s ADI by selecting [NAV] mode on the APS-65
Flight Guidance Panel. Pushing [ENG] will couple the FMS steering to the autopilot.
NOTE: Only lateral steering is provided from the FMS. Select an appropriate vertical
mode on the APS-65.
(3) Approach Operation
Instrument approaches may be linked into the flight plan and laterally coupled to the
autopilot by selecting heading mode [HDG] then approach mode [APPR] on the
autopilot mode selector. A remote panel mounted APRCH annunciator illuminates
whenever FMS Approach Mode is active. Refer to Approach Procedures in the
Operator's Manual.
(4) Vertical Navigation
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) mode is available for descent only. Pitch steering
commands for ENROUTE VNAV descent are not provided.
Page x of y
Page 129
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Section 5
No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
Page y of y
Page 130
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Equipment Specifications
1. Equipment Identification
A. UNS-1Lw FMS Equipment
UNS-1Lw FMS Equipment
Component Name Part Number
FMS – Flight Management System 3116–X2–111X (see part number matrix for
explanation of variables)
Configuration Module 31921
5-Inch Flat Panel CDU 1018-X-XXX
4-Inch Flat Panel CDU 117-XX, 1117-X-XXX
Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU) 1025-01-X11
LP/LPV Monitor 3116-52-1110
DTU-100 – Data Transfer Unit 1406–01–1X
1407–01–1X (Portable unit)
SSDTU – Solid State Data Transfer Unit 1408-00-X
1409-00-2 (Portable Unit)
GNSS Antenna 10708
GPS/Sirius Antenna 10709
GPS/XM Weather and Radio Antenna 10710
Page 201
34-60-52 3 February 2011
B. Compatible Peripheral Equipment
Compatible Peripheral Equipment
Component Name Part Number
Application Server Unit (ASU) 3040-06-0X
LCS Loran-C Sensor 1040
LCS-850 Loran-C Sensor 1045–01
LCS – Loran–C Antenna 10401
10402 (LCS–850)
GPS-1000 GPS Sensor 1075–01
GPS-1000A GPS Sensor 1078-01
GPS-1200 GPS Sensor 1080–01
GLS-1250 GPS Landing System 1086-01-00
GNSS-2400 GPS/GLONASS Sensor 1078-02
RRS – Radio Reference Sensor 1058–01–1X
RTU – Radio Tuning Unit
Collins CSDB 1055
ARINC RTU 1056–01–1X
Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS) 3010-0X-0X
UL-600 UniLink 1065-XX-0X0
UL-601 UniLink 1066-XX-0X0
UL-700 UniLink 1067-XX-XXX
UL-701 UniLink 1068-XX-XXX
UniVision 3070-0X-0X
Vision-1 3015-00-00
Page 202
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. Technical Manuals
NOTE: Refer to the following manuals for further information about compatible peripheral
equipment. These manuals are available from Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation.
Technical Manuals
Component Report Number
Application Server Unit (ASU) Report No. 46-20-03
FMS Configuration Manual Report No. 34-61-XX
FMS Interface Manual Report No. 34-60-53
LCS - Loran–C Antenna Report No. 34-50-13
LCS – Loran-C Sensor Report No. 34-50-13
GPS-1000 GPS Sensor Report No. 34-50-03
GPS-1000A GPS Sensor Report No. 34-50-08
GPS-1200 GPS Sensor Report No. 34-50-04
GLS-1250 GPS Landing System Report No. 34-30-01
GNSS-2400 GPS/GLONASS Sensor Report No. 34-50-08
RRS - Radio Reference Sensor Report No. 34-50-10
RTU – Radio Tuning Unit Report No. 23-80-05
Collins CSDB
ARINC RTU
Terrain Awareness and Warning System Report No. 34-40-01
UL-600 UniLink Report No. 23-20-01
UniVision Report No. 23-30-03
Universal Cockpit Display (UCD) Report No. 46-20-01
Vision-1 Report No. 34-40-03
Page 203
34-60-52 3 February 2011
D. UNS-1Lw Part Number Matrix
3116 - X 2 - 1 1 1 X
Basic UNS-1Lw P/N
MMMS = 3
FMS = 4
4 Engine, ARINC: 5 Output/8 Input = 2
CPU Memory Board = 1
Auxilliary Board = 1
ARINC Board = 1
Dual ARINC (All Digital) = 0
ASCB Version A = 3
Dual ARINC & Analog = 6
E. Configuration Module
The part number of the Configuration Module is 31921.
F. 5-Inch FPCDU
1018 - X - X X X
Basic Part Number
No Video = 1
Video = 2
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
No Graphics = 0
UniLink Graphics Capable = 1
Standard Glass = 0
Hi-Resolution Glass = 3
Page 204
34-60-52 3 February 2011
G. 4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-XX)
1117 - X X
Basic P/N
Aft Position = 5
Forward Position = 6
Gray = 1
Black = 2
H. 4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-X-XXX)
1117 - X - X X X
Basic P/N
No Video = 1
Video = 2
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
No Graphics = 0
UniLink Graphics Capable = 1
Aft Position = 5
Forward Position = 6
I. Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU)

1018 - 0 1 - X 1 1
Basic P/N
Future Use Variable = 0
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
Page 205
34-60-52 3 February 2011
J. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100)
1406 - 01 - X
Basic Part Number for Cockpit DTU-100
Future Use
Gray Faceplate = 1
Black Faceplate = 2
K. Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU-100)

1407 - 01 - 1
Basic Part Number for Portable DTU-100
Future Use
L. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)

1408 - 00 - X
Basic Part Number for Cockpit SSDTU
Future Use
Gray Faceplate = 1
Black Faceplate = 2
M. Portable SSDTU
1409 - 00 - 2
Basic Part Number for Portable SSDTU
Future Use
Black Faceplate = 2
Page 206
34-60-52 3 February 2011
N. UNS-1Lw Part Number Configuration
(1) All Digital Configuration (P/N 3116–X2–1110)
This configuration has a CPU board, WAAS/ARINC board, WAAS/Analog board
and Auxiliary board. This option supports aircraft which do not require analog
interfaces other than annunciators and fuel flow inputs.
(2) ASCB Version A Configuration (P/N 3116–X2–1113)
This configuration has a CPU board, WAAS/ARINC board, WAAS/Analog board,
ASCB board and Auxiliary board. The ASCB board provides the FMS with an
interface to the ASCB Version A data bus that was developed by Honeywell and
supplements ARINC, CSDB and analog interfaces of the FMS. The ASCB board
hardware supports data bus Version A only.
(3) Digital and Analog Configuration (P/N 3116–X2–1116)
This configuration has a CPU board, WAAS/ARINC board, WAAS/Analog board,
Analog board and Auxiliary board. The Analog board supplies AC pitch steering
outputs. These options are wired for analog navigational signals.
(4) Standard Digital Interface Capabilities:
Long Range Nav Sensors (ARINC) IRS, IRGPS, LCS, GPS and GNSS
Radar Joystick Interfaces – ARINC 429, 571 or CSDB
Air Data Computer Input – ARINC 429 or 575
Sensor Inputs in Various Combinations of:
– Up to 3IRS or IRGPS
– 1 LCS
– 1 DME
– Up to 3 GPS/GNSS (two external and one internal)
Airborne Flight Information System (AFIS)
FMS Crossfill (Push or Pull)
ARINC Digital Data Output Buses
– 429 High–Speed
– 561 (6 wire)
– 429 Low–Speed
– 571
Analog Interface Capabilities
– Synchro Heading Input
– Roll Command Steering Output
– Standard Analog Outputs Including:
Desired Track – Synchro
Bearing To Waypoint – Synchro
Lateral and Vertical Deviation
Flags and Valids
TO/FROM
Page 207
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Fuel Flow Interface Capabilities – Fuel Flow Processing Available.
– Interfaces with fuel flow systems outputting:
DC Analog
G.E. AC pickoff
Pulse Width and Frequency
Intertechnique Pulse
ARINC Digital
– Interfaces include some models of the following manufacturers: Ametek,
Canadian Marconi (CMA), Eldec, X & O Engineering, General Electric
(G.E.), Gull, Howell, Intertechnique, J.E.T., Ragen, and Simmons fuel flow
systems.
– For fuel flow systems compatible with the NCU, refer to the Fuel Flow
Inputs section.
Page 208
34-60-52 3 February 2011
2. Power Specifications
Power specifications for the components of the FMS and compatible peripherals are as
follows:
NOTE: Current and power values for the FMS include powering one integrated FPCDU. In
addition, FMS power specifications are based on the particular configuration that
will consume the most power. All other configurations use less.
Component Current (A @ V) Power (W @ V)
Type Part Number 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V
Min Nominal Max Min Nominal Max
FMS 3116–X2–111X 3.21 2.70 2.64 60.99 74.25 84.48
5-Inch FPCDU 1018-X-XXX 0.9 0.6 0.6 17.1 16.5 19.2
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-XX 0.9 0.6 0.6 17.1 16.5 19.2
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-X-XX3 0.9 0.87 0.75 17.1 23.93 24.0
1117-X-XX4
w/o Mod 9
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-X-XX3 1.15 1.50 1.55 21.85 41.25 49.60
1117-X-XX4
with Mod 9
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-X-XX5 0.74 0.51 0.44 14.06 14.03 14.08
1117-X-XX6
LP/LPV Monitor 3116-52-1110 3.21 2.70 2.64 60.99 74.25 84.48
RTU 1055 0.5 0.3 0.3 9.5 8.3 9.6
RTU (ARINC) 1056-01-XX 0.7 0.5 0.4 13.8 13.2 12.8
DTU-100 1406 0.3 0.3 0.2 5.7 11.0 6.4
Portable 1407 0.3 0.4 0.2 5.7 11.0 6.4
DTU-100
SSDTU 1408-00-X 0.41 0.3 0.28 7.79 8.4 8.96
Portable 1409-00-2 0.41 0.3 0.28 7.79 8.4 8.96
SSDTU
RRS 1058 1.1 0.8 0.7 20.9 22.0 19.2
LCS 1040 1.1 0.7 0.6 20.9 19.3 19.2
GPS-1000 1075-01 0.33 0.23 0.20 6.27 6.33 6.40
GPS-1200 1080-01 0.4 0.3 0.3 7.6 8.3 9.6
Page 209
34-60-52 3 February 2011
3. Equipment Specifications
The following tables list the physical, environmental and electrical parameters of the Flight
Management System.
A. UNS-1Lw FMS (P/N 3116–X2–111X)
Characteristics Specifications
Size 2MCU – 2.24” W x 7.64” H x 15.26" D
Weight: 6.7 lbs.
Mounting 2MCU Rack
Power Requirements (nominal) 27.5 VDC, 2.70 A, 74.25 W
B. 5-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1018-X-XXX)

Size 5.75" W x 6.37" H x 4.177" D
Component Weight 1018-X-XX0 3.8 lbs.
1018-X-XX3 (w/o Mod 9) 4.1 lbs.
1018-X-XX3 (with Mod 9) 3.3 lbs.
Mounting 1/4 turn Dzus Fasteners
Power Requirements Power input from FMS 19.2 W maximum
(Startup may be higher)
Panel Lighting 0.46 A @ 28 V maximum or
1.54 A @ 5 V maximum
C. 4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-X-XXX)

Size 5.75" W x 4.50" H x 3.25" D
Component Weight 1117-XX 2.6 lbs.
1117-X-XX3 2.9 lbs.
1117-X-XX4 2.9 lbs.
1117-X-X05 2.41 lbs.
1117-X-X06 2.41 lbs.
1117-X-X15 2.47 lbs.
1117-X-X16 2.47 lbs.
Mounting 1/4 turn Dzus Fasteners
Power Requirements 1117-XX, 1117-X-XX3, 1117-X-XX4 - 0.5 A @
28 V maximum 1.6 A @ 5 V maximum
1117-X-XX5, 1117-X-XX6 - 0.4 A @ 28 V
maximum 2.07 A @ 5 V maximum,
also an internal heater for brightness
stabilization draws approximately 1.0 amp
Page 210
34-60-52 3 February 2011
D. LP/LPV Monitor (P/N 3116–52–1110)
Size 2MCU – 2.24” W x 7.64” H x 15.26" D
Weight: 6.7 lbs.
Mounting 2MCU Rack
E. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100)

Size 5.750" W x 2.124" H x 8.14" D
Component Weight 3.25 lbs. (P/N 1406–01–X)
5.8 lbs. (P/N 1407–01–1)
Power Requirements 18 VDC - 0.22 A
27.5 VDC - 0.350 A Nominal
Mounting 1/4 Turn DZUS Fasteners
(1406–01–X only)
F. SSDTU (P/N 1408-00-X)

Size 5.750” W x 2.250” H x 7.764" D
Weight 2.4 lbs.
Mounting 1/4 Turn Dzus Fastener
Page 211
34-60-52 3 February 2011
G. Portable SSDTU (P/N 1409-00-2)
Unit Size 6” W x 12.5” H x 5.5" D
Weight N/A
Power Requirements 27.5 VDC, 0.3 A, 8.4 W
Cooling N/A
Mounting SSDTU mounted in portable carrying case
Interconnect Wiring Harness P/N 81304072 – PSSDTU J1 to aircraft bulkhead J1
Part Numbers (see NOTE) (New installation and previous Portable DTU-100
Contact Universal Avionics for connection)
more information. P/N 81140811 – PSSDTU J2 to aircraft bulkhead J2
(Previous Portable DTU-100 connection)
P/N 81140821 – PSSDTU J2 to aircraft bulkhead J2
(New installation)
NOTE: When using the Portable SSDTU in new installations or upgrading the Portable
DTU-100 bulkhead connectors to the Portable SSDTU bulkhead connectors, up
to 8 Ethernet ports may be wired and configured.
When bulkhead connectors from a prior Portable DTU-100 installation are used
for the Portable SSDTU, up to 4 Ethernet ports may be available for use and
configuration. Consult aircraft wiring diagrams to verify the number of Ethernet
ports that are wired.
Page 212
34-60-52 3 February 2011
H. GPS Antenna (P/N 10708)
Weight 0.5 lbs.
Frequency 1575.42 ±10.23 MHz
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Polarization Right Hand Circular
Radiation Pattern Elevation Angle Gain (dBic)
(degrees
0 -5
5 -3.5
10 0
20 2
30 2
30<Elev.<75 2.5
>75 3.0
Impedance 50 Ohms
Gain 30 ±3 dB
Stability Unconditionally stable for any source or load
impedance
Power Handling 1 Watt
Power Requirements 4.5-15 VDC
Power Consumption 60.0 mA (max)
Rejection @ SatCom frequency of 1625 >60 dB
MHz
Icing With 0.050” thick hard ice on radome, a gain
decrease of no greater than 2 dB from no ice
condition when signal viewed at 30 degrees or
greater elevation with respect to horizon.
TSO C190
Page 213
34-60-52 3 February 2011
I. WAAS (SBAS) GPS/Sirius Antenna (P/N 10709)
Overall Antenna Specifications
Weight 0.5 lbs.
Altitude 55,000 ft.
Operating Temperature -55ºC to +71ºC
Storage Temperature -55ºC to +85ºC
GPS Connector TNCF
SIRIUS Connector TNCF
WAAS (SBAS) GPS Antenna Specifications

Axial Ratio 3 dB Max at Bore Site
0º -5
5º -3.5
10º 0
20º 2
30º 2
30º< Elev. ≤75º 2.5
>75º 3.0
Gain 30 ±3 dB
Impedance 50 Ohms
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Power Consumption 60.0 mA (Max)
Sirius Antenna Specifications

Frequency 2319.5 – 2332.5 MHz
Polarization Left Hand Circular
5º -10
15º -3
5º Increments 30º≤ Elev. ≤60º 0
Bore Site 5
Gain 24.5 ±2 dB
Impedance 50 Ohms
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Power Requirements 3.6-5.5 VDC
Page 214
34-60-52 3 February 2011
J. WAAS (SBAS) GPS/XM Weather and Radio Antenna (P/N 10710)
Overall Antenna Specifications
Weight 0.5 lbs.
Altitude 55,000 ft.
Operating Temperature -55ºC to +70ºC
Storage Temperature -55ºC to +85ºC
GPS Connector TNCF
XM Connector TNCF
WAAS/SBAS GPS Antenna Specifications

0º -5
5º -3.5
10º 0
20º +2
30º +2
30º< Elev. ≤75º +2.5
>75º +3.0
Gain 30 ±3 dB
Impedance 50 Ohms
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Rejection at SatCom Freq 1625 MHz 50 dB
XM Weather and Radio Antenna Specifications

Frequency 2332.5 – 2345 MHz
Polarization Left Hand Circular
20º 0.0
25º +0.5
5º Increments 30º≤ Elev. ≤60º +2.0
Bore Site -2.35
Gain 24 ±2 dB
Impedance 50 Ohms
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Band Rejection 25 dB @ F±230
Power Requirements 3.6-5.5 VDC
Page 215
34-60-52 3 February 2011
K. WAAS FMS Annunciators
NOTE: Annunciators are not available from Universal Avionics System Corporation.
The following is a suggested list of manufacturers, part numbers and descriptions of
annunciators used in a typical WAAS FMS installation.
Aerospace Optics Eaton Corporation
3201 Sandy Lane Aerospace Controls Division
Fort Worth, TX 76112 1640 Monrovia Ave.
(888) VIVISUN Costa Mesa , CA 92627
(888) 848 4786 (800) 300-9320
(949) 642-2427
Annunciator Color Company Part Number
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-39224 (4G3 FMS1 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS1 LPV
LOS Green Green Optics VNAV)
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton 582-20A0B0C3F84L520N15(G,G,G,G),P37,109
(FMS1,LOS/LPV/LNAV/VNAV)
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-39225 (4G3 FMS2 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40262 (4G3 FMS LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS LPV
FMS,LOS/LPV/LNAV/VNAV
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40263 (4A3 FMS1 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS1 LPV
LOS White Green Optics VNAV)
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton 582-20A0B0C3F84L520N15(D,G,G,G),P37,109
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40264 (4A3 FMS2 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40265 (4A3 FMS LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS LPV
(FMS,LOS/LPV/LNAV/VNAV)
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40266 (4T3 FMS1 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS1 LPV
LOS Blue Green Optics VNAV)
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton 582-20A0B0C3F84L520N15(L,G,G,G),P37,109
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40267 (4T3 FMS2 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS2 LPV
Page 216
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Annunciator Color Company Part Number
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40268 (4T3 FMS LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS LPV
NOTE: The following annunciators are applicable for use with Night Vision equipment.
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40269 (4J3 FMS1 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS1 LPV
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton 582-40A0B0C3F4L60N15(F,F,F,F),P37,109
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40270 (4J3 FMS2 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40271 (4J3 FMS LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40272 (4Q3 FMS1 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS1 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40273 (4Q3 FMS2 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40274 (4Q3 FMS LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40275 (4E3 FMS1 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS1 LPV
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton N/A (Eaton does not have blue NVG compatible annunciators.)
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40276 (4E3 FMS2 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40277 (4E3 FMS LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS LPV
Page 217
34-60-52 3 February 2011
4. Installation Kits
A. UNS-1Lw FMS Installation Kit P/N K12075
NOTE: Use this Installation Kit for installation of the LP/LPV Monitor.
NOTE: Configuration Module, P/N 31921, is not part of the NCU installation kit.
Quantity Part Number Description
1 80009000 Tray, 2 MCU
or
93921-1 Barry Controls
1 83303130 ARINC Plug, 2 MCU
or
S612MGLNW2P0004AN Souriau
SB612MGLNW2P0004AN Souriau
4 88600063 Screw, 6-32 x 3/8” Pan Head
or
MS51957-28
2 88600200 (see Note) Screw, 6-32 x 1.25” Pan Head
or
MS51957-35
4 88640094 Nut, #6, Hex, Self-Locking
or
MS21083C06
NOTE: The 1.25” screws (P/N 88600200) included with the kit are not used for the installation of
the LP/LPV Monitor.
B. 4-Inch and 5-Inch FPCDU Installation Kit P/N K12026-4

Quantity Part Number or Equivalent Description
1 83001150 (UASC) FPCDU connector, J1
or
91-577049-15S (Amphenol)
1 83002086 (UASC) Video connector, J2
or Amphenol/Bendix, Burndy/Souriau, ITT
MS27473T12F8S or Cannon, or Matrix Science
MS27473T12A8S or
MS27473T12B8S
1 83002087 Video connector backshell
or
M85049/49-2-12W or
M85049/49-2-12A or
M85049/49-2-12N
1 83001087-02 (UASC) UniLink connector, J3
or
MS27473T12F8SC
Page 218
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Installation Kit P/N K12050

1 83001150 Connector J1
or
91-577049-15S Amphenol
JT06RE-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
JT06RT-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
MS27473E14F15S(SR)
1 83002152 Connector, J2, Plug 15P Circular Size 14 (C
or CLKD)
MS27473T14F15SC
1 83001157-02 Strain Relief, Crimp Circular, Plug, Size 14,
or Olive Drab
M85049/49-2-14W
D. Portable DTU-100 Installation Kit P/N K12050-1

1 83000131 DTU Connector, J1, Receptacle, Size 10, 13-
or SKT, Crimp, Wall Mount, (STD CLK)
MS27472E10A35S
MS27472E10B35S
MS27472E10F35S
1 83002154 DTU Connector, J2, Receptacle,
or Circular, Size 14, 15P Male Crimp
Type, Panel Mount W/ Flange
MS27472E14B15PC
Page 219
34-60-52 3 February 2011
E. SSDTU Installation Kit P/N K12079-1

or
MS27473T16A35S
MS27473T16B35S
1 83000257 Backshell J2
or
M85049/49-2S16N
or
91-577049-15S Amphenol
JT06RE-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
JT06RT-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
MS27473E14F15S(SR)
1 83001157-1 Bushing for J1 Strain Relief
or
687-340-14 Glenair Inc.
F. Portable SSDTU Installation Kit P/N K12079-2

1 83000131 Connector SZ10
or
MS27472E10A35S Cadmium Finish
MS27472E10B35S Olive Drab Finish
MS27472E10F35S Electroless Nickel Finish
1 83000558 Connector SZ16
or
MS27472E16A35S Cadmium Finish
MS27472E16B35S Olive Drab Finish
MS27472E16F35S Electroless Nickel Finish
Page 220
34-60-52 3 February 2011
G. GPS 10708 Antenna Installation Kit P/N K12080

1 83211018 Connector, RF Coax, Crimp
or
225791-2 Tyco Electronics
1 83217010 Plug, TNC Angle, Crimp
or
31-2381 Amphenol
H. GPS 10709/10710 Antenna Installation Kit P/N K12082

2 83211018 Connector, RF Coax, Crimp
or
225791-2 Tyco Electronics
2 83217010 Plug, TNC Angle, Crimp
or
31-2381 Amphenol
Page 221
34-60-52 3 February 2011
5. Required Tools
A. Crimping Tools Required for Souriau Connectors
Quantity Description Manufacturer Part Number
1 and Crimping Tool/AF8 Daniels Mfg. M22520/1-01
1 Turret Die or Daniels Mfg. M22520/1-04
Positioner
1 and Crimping Tool Daniels Mfg. M22520/2-01
Positioner
1 and Crimping Tool Daniels Mfg. M22520/7-01
Positioner
1 and Crimping Tool/AFM8 Daniels Mfg. M22520/2-01
1 and Positioner Daniels Mfg. K13-1
1 Positioner Daniels Mfg. K181
1 or Crimp Gauge Daniels Mfg. G-125
1 Crimp Gauge Souriau 8660/162
1 Crimping tool for RRS AMP 220066-2
coax connector
B. Insertion/Extraction Tools Required

Quantity Used For Description Manufacturer Part Number
1 NCU Top/Middle Plug Insert/Extract Tool Souriau 8660-160
(All Pins) AMP 91066-1
MIL SPEC MS3156-22
1 NCU Bottom Plug Insert/Extract Tool Souriau 8522-20
(Pins 1, 4, 5 and 6) AMP 91066-4
MIL SPEC MS3447-20
(Pins 9, 10 and 11) AMP 91066-3
MIL SPEC MS3447-16
(Pins 2, 3, 7 and 8) AMP 91078-1
MIL SPEC MS27534-12
(Pins 12 and 13) ITT Cannon CET-C8
AMP 91074-1
1 5-Inch FPCDU Video Insert/Extract Tool M81969/14-10
Connector
1 5-Inch FPCDU Video Crimping Tool MS22520/1-01
Connector MS22520/2-01
MS22520/7-01
1 5-Inch FPCDU Video Turret Die or MS22520/1-4
Connector Positioner MS22520/2-10
MS22520/7-8
1 5-Inch FPCDU Video Crimp Contacts M39029/58-363
Connector Size 20
1 5-Inch FPCDU Video Crimp Contacts Bendix 10-251215-205
Connector Size 20
Page 222
34-60-52 3 February 2011
6. Insertion/Extraction Tool Manufacturers
The following is a list of connector manufacturers and representatives that can supply tools
necessary for installation:
Tool Suppliers and Manufacturers
Name and Address Mailing Address Phone and Fax
AMP Inc. (800) 722–1111
P.O. Box 3608 P.O. Box 3608 Fax (717) 540–2310
Harrisburg, PA 17105 Harrisburg, PA 17105
ITT Cannon (800) 845–7000
Daniels Mfg. Corporation (407) 855–6161
526 Thorpe Rd. P.O. Box 593872 Fax (407) 855–6884
Orlando, FL 32859 Orlando, FL 32859
Souriau – Manufacturer’s Rep (303) 202–0212
Con–Tek Marketing Fax (303) 202–0253
7. Wire and Cable Manufacturers

The following is a list of wire and cable manufacturers that can supply, but are not the only
sources of, multi-conductor cables for use during installations.
Wire and Cable Manufacturers
Name and Address Mailing Address Phone and Fax
A.E. Petsche Company, Inc. (817) 461-9473
2112 W. Division 2112 W. Division
Arlington, TX 76012 Arlington, TX 76012
Calmont Engineering and (714) 549-0336
Electronics Corporation
420 E. Alton Ave. 420 E. Alton Ave.
Santa Ana, CA 92707 Santa Ana, CA 92707
Electronic Cable Specialists (414) 421-5300
5300 W. Franklin Dr. P.O. Box 37497 Fax: (414) 421-5301
Franklin, WI 53132-8642 Milwaukee, WI 53237-0497
PIC Wire and Cable Supply, Inc. (414) 246-0500
N63 W22619 Main St. P.O. Box 330 (800) 742-3191
Sussex, WI 53089 Sussex, WI 53089-0330 Fax (414) 246-0450
Page 223
34-60-52 3 February 2011
8. Alternate Vendor Part Numbers
UASC Part Number Description Alternate Vendor Alternate Part Number
1219 Connector AMP, Inc. 208597-1
Tri-Star G0681-0101-1100
1219-1 Coaxial Insert AMP, Inc. 225791-2
1220 Connector MS27467T11F35P with
MS27506F-10-2
1254 Rack, 1/4 ATR Barry Controls 404A-25S D/D PXB-0
1255 Connector Cannon DPBX MA40-33S-0001
with 30 each contacts
031-9134-001
1256 Connector Amphenol 48-06R-14-15S-300 with 48-2343
or MS27291-3
1257 Connector Deutsch AFD56-12-10SN-059
1328 Connector Cannon BKAD1-065-30022 067400-0024
80009000 2MCU Rack Barry Controls 93921-1
83001150 Connector, 4-Inch FPCDU Amphenol 91-577049-15S(SR)
83303130 Connector Souriau SB612-MGLNW2P0004AN
83303139 Connector Souriau SB612-MG13W2PL301AN
FPCDU Video Connector Amphenol/Bendix, MS27473T12F8S or
Burndy/Souriau, MS27473T12A8S or
ITT Cannon or MS27473t12b8s
Matrix Science
FPCDU Video Connector Glenair, Inc. 620FS012M18 or
Backshell M85049/49-2-12W or
M85049/49-2-12A or
M85049/49-2-12N
Page 224
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the Equipment Specifications section adjacent Page 225.
Purpose
This Temporary Change updates the UNS-1Lw rear connector and 2MCU rack connector
keyguide drawings with the UNS-1Lw ASCB part number.
Instructions
Replace the drawings on Pages 225 and 226 with the following:
Page 1 of 3
34-60-52 9 October 2013
A.
2.170
ABCDEFGHJK ABCDEFGHJK
1
5
10
UNIVERSAL
15 7.50
1
6.36
UNS-1Lw (P/N 3116-X2-111X)
5
7.64
10
1.10
15
4 5
4.10
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
6 8 7 5 6 8 7 5
10 11 9 10 11 9
13 12 13 12 1.37
0.120
12.672
15.23
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
34-60-52
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 6.7 LBS.
3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12075.
4 REAR CONNECTOR OF UNS-1Lw FMS IS KEYED AT #99 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600 FOR P/N 3116-X2-1110 AND 3116-X2-1116.
5 REAR CONNECTOR OF UNS-1Lw FMS IS KEYED AT #98 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600 FOR P/N 3116-X2-1113.
9 October 2013
Page 2 of 3
0.18 DIA 4 PLCS B.
0.20 DIA 2 PLCS
14.92
1.50
9.00 2.38
1.77
1.312 12.756
2 PLACES 14.92
0.20 DIA 2 PLCS 2.50
0.69 12.457
4
UNS-1Lw 2MCU Rack (P/N 80009000))
5
7.28
NOTES:
34-60-52
2. WEIGHT: RACK = 11.2 ozs., CONNECTOR = 9.0 ozs.
4 CONNECTOR OF UNS-1Lw RACK IS KEYED AT #99 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600 FOR P/N 3116-X2-1110 AND 3116-X2-1116.
5 CONNECTOR OF UNS-1Lw RACK IS KEYED AT #98 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600 FOR P/N 3116-X2-1113.
9 October 2013
Page 3 of 3
A.
9.
2.170
ABCDEFGHJK
1
5
10
Equipment Drawings
UNIVERSAL
15 7.50
UNS-1Lw (P/N 3116-X2-111X)
1
6.36
5
7.64
10
1.10
15
4 4.10
4 3 2 1
6 8 7 5
10 11 9
13 12 1.37
0.120
12.672
15.23
NOTES:
34-60-52
4 REAR CONNECTOR OF UNS-1Lw FMS IS KEYED AT #99 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600.
3 February 2011
Page 225
0.18 DIA 4 PLCS
B.
0.20 DIA 2 PLCS
14.92
1.50
9.00 2.38
1.77
1.312 12.756
2 PLACES
0.20 DIA 2 PLCS
2.50
0.69 12.457
UNS-1Lw 2MCU Rack (P/N 80009000)
7.28
4
34-60-52
NOTES:
4 REAR CONNECTOR OF UNS-1Lw FMS IS KEYED TO #99 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600.
3 February 2011
Page 226
C. Configuration Module (P/N 31921)
0.315
2.055
± .02
1.425 0.325 0.480
0.650
± .02
0.375
±.02
WIRE LENGTH
0.142 TO 0.148 APPROX, 6.00
DIA. (2 PLCS.)
NOTES:
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 1.0 oz.
D. Configuration Module Installation

SELF
LOCKING NUT SCREW
P/N 88640094 P/N 88600200
RACK CONNECTOR
CONFIGURATION P/N 83303130
MODULE
P/N 31921
CONNECTOR
PINS ARE
NOT SHOWN
ON THIS
DRAWING
RACK P/N
80009000
SCREW P/N 88600063
Page 227
34-60-52 3 February 2011
E. 5-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1018-X-XXX)
TOP VIEW
5.000
3.617
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

UNIVERSAL
6.380 6.260
5.250 DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV
1 2 3
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N
BACK
0 MSG
O P Q R S T
ON/OFF
DIM ±
U V W X Y Z ENTER
5.365 0.560
3.25
5.750
REAR VIEW
J3
J2
J1
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 3.8 LBS
3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12026-4
Page 228
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Viewing Angles for the 5-Inch FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XX3 (Mod 10)
TOP VIEW
10
45
35
SIDE VIEW
NOTE: WHEN VIEWING TAWS ON THE 5-INCH FPCDU, THE MAXIMUM BOTTOM VIEWING
ANGLE IS 25 DEGREES.
Page 229
34-60-52 3 February 2011
F. 4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-( ))
(1) P/N 1117-XX, 1117-X-XX3 and 1117-X-XX4
0.884
4.985
2.300
J1
BACK VIEW TOP VIEW
5.750 0.585 3.634

5.365 3.250
MSG NAV
DATA DTO
4.500 FUEL FPL
TUNE VNAV 4.370

3.375
PREV LIST
NEXT A B C D E F G 1 2 3 MENU
PWR
DIM H I J K L M N 4 5 6 PERF
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
0.560 V W X Y Z ENTER BACK 0
NOTES:
Page 230
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) P/N 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6
4.974
3.787
2.662
0.874
4.974
3.049
4.370
J3
2.300
J1
1.549
J2
TOP VIEW
BACK VIEW
5.750 3.634
0.585
5.365 3.250
MSG NAV
DATA DTO
4.500 FUEL FPL
TUNE VNAV 4.370

3.375
PREV LIST
NEXT A B C D E F G 1 2 3 MENU
PWR
DIM H I J K L M N 4 5 6 PERF
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
0.560 V W X Y Z ENTER BACK 0
NOTES:
Page 231
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) Forward and Aft Mount Top View (P/N 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6)
X
MA
P/N 1117-X-XX5 and P/N 1117-X-XX6
E
GL
AN
EW
VI
45 deg.
CENTER LINE
SCREEN BOUNDRY
45 deg.
VI
EW
AN
GL
E
FWD AND AFT MOUNT MA
TOP VIEW X
(4) Aft Mount Side View (P/N 1117-X-XX5)

X
MA
E
GL
AN
EW
VI
P/N 1117-X-XX5
35 deg.
SCREEN BOUNDRY
CENTER LINE
10 deg.
VIEW A
NGLE M
AX
AFT MOUNT - SIDE VIEW
Page 232
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(5) Forward Mount Side View (P/N 1117-X-XX6)
P/N 1117-X-XX6
MAX
ANGLE
VIEW
10 deg.
CENTER LINE
SCREEN BOUNDRY
35 deg.
VI
EW
AN
GL
E
MA
X
FWD MOUNT - SIDE VIEW
Page 233
34-60-52 3 February 2011
G.
2.170
ABCDEFGHJK
1
5
10
UNIVERSAL
15 7.50
1
6.36
5
7.64
10
LP/LPV Monitor (P/N 3116-52-1110)
1.10
15
4 4.10
4 3 2 1
6 8 7 5
10 11 9
13 12 1.37
0.120
12.672
15.23
NOTES:
34-60-52
4 REAR CONNECTOR OF LP/LPV MONITOR IS KEYED AT #02 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600.
3 February 2011
Page 234
0.18 DIA 4 PLCS H.
0.20 DIA 2 PLCS
14.92
1.50
9.00 2.38
1.77
1.312 12.756
2 PLACES
14.92
0.20 DIA 2 PLCS 2.50
0.69 12.457
LP/LPV Monitor 2MCU Rack (P/N 80009000)
7.28
4
34-60-52
NOTES:

4 REAR CONNECTOR OF THE LP/LPV MONITOR IS KEYED TO #02 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600.
3 February 2011
Page 235
I. DTU-100 (P/N 1406-01-X)
UNIVERSAL
5.750
2.250
0.562
7.762
1.88
3.60 0.38
5.00 2.124
DTU CONNECTOR
PIN IDENTIFICATION
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES L

A
L
A
K M B K M B
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 3.25 LBS J R N C J R N C
P P
H D H D
G F E G F E
J1 J2
Page 236
34-60-52 3 February 2011
J. SSDTU (P/N 1408-00-X)
5.750
2.250
0.604
2.90
6.66
2.50 0.88
0.385
4.99 2.100
5.365
1.495 2.000
NOTES:
1.125 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 2.4 LBS
Page 237
34-60-52 3 February 2011
K. GPS Antenna Drawing (P/N 10708)
4X MOUNTING SCREWS
10-32 UNF-2A X 1.00 LONG
CROSS RECESSED
FLATHEAD S.S.
P/N MS24694-C276
0.50
0.75
TNC FEMALE NITRILE O-RING

CONNECTOR 2.375 ID X 0.130 WIDE X .070 DEEP
P/N MS28775-142
4.700 0.75
1.600 3.000
0.800
0.70
CONNECTOR
CLEARANCE 1.040
HOLE: 0.63 DIA.
4X 0.22 THRU 0.385 DIA.
0.610
100 DEGREE
3.300
NOTES:

2. WEIGHT APPROXIMATELY 0.5 LBS
Page 238
34-60-52 3 February 2011
L. WAAS (SBAS) GPS/Sirius Antenna (P/N 10709)
4X MOUNTING SCREWS
10-32 UNF-2A X 1.00 LONG
CROSS RECESSED
FLATHEAD S.S.
P/N MS24693-C276
0.65
0.75
BLUE YELLOW
GPS SIRIUS
TNC FEMALE TNC FEMALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
NITRILE O-RING
2.375 ID X 0.130 WIDE X 0.070 DEEP
CONNECTOR P/N MS28775-142
CLEARANCE
HOLE: 0.63 DIA.
4.700 0.88
1.600 3.000
SIRIUS
0.800
GPS
0.70
1.040
4X 0.22 THRU 0.385 DIA.
0.610 0.700
100 DEGREE
3.300
NOTES:
Page 239
34-60-52 3 February 2011
M. WAAS (SBAS) GPS/XM Weather and Radio Antenna (P/N 10710)
4X MOUNTING SCREWS
10-32 UNF-2A X 1.00 LONG
CROSS RECESSED
FLATHEAD S.S.
P/N MS24693-C276
0.65
0.75
BLUE YELLOW
GPS XM
TNC FEMALE TNC FEMALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
NITRILE O-RING
2.375 ID X 0.130 WIDE X 0.070 DEEP
CONNECTOR P/N MS28775-142
CLEARANCE
HOLE: 0.63 DIA.
4.700 0.88
1.600 3.000
0.800
GPS
XM
0.70
0.70 1.040
4X 0.22 THRU 0.385 DIA.
0.610 0.700
100 DEGREE
3.300
NOTES:
Page 240
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Installation and Wiring

1. General
The basic Flight Management System architecture is shown in the Description and Operation
section for single and dual systems. Non-shielded wires are MIL-W-22759, and shielded
wires are MIL-W-27500 or equivalent.
A. Form – Dimensions and Communications
This FMS is designed to comply with the dimensional standards specified in ARINC
Specification 600, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces.
Inter-unit communications between navigation sensors/equipment and the FMS, as well as
between the FMS and the flight guidance system are transmitted and received in two-wire
ARINC 429 digital format. The digital ARINC 571 and 575 are also standard formats for
interface with navigation and air data systems. The FMS utilizes an aircraft mounted or
portable DTU-100 Data Transfer Unit (DTU) connected through a 10base-T Ethernet for data
loading and downloading from Iomega Zip disks.
A representative listing of compatible sensors and systems with which the FMS can
communicate, are in the Digital Inputs, Analog Inputs, Digital Outputs, and Analog Outputs
tables. Information about the formats/types of input and output data required and used for
each of the sensors/systems is also indicated in the table.
The tables are used to determine and select compatible sensors/systems for use with the FMS,
and obtain data format/type information for system interconnection strapping when installing
the sensors/systems.
The FMS is configured to a specific aircraft installation by the use of a Configuration Module
that is a part of the aircraft installed FMS rack. At the time of installation, the configuration
module is programmed through CDU keypad inputs to completely define the sensor input
ports, fuel flow types, air data type, EFIS interface etc. A replacement FMS of both the same
part number and SCN can be installed without having to reprogram the FMS because the
configuration module retains the programmed information for the aircraft.
B. Sensor/Equipment Compatibility/Selection
When determining compatibility and selecting sensors, the following information applies:
The FMS is capable of receiving inputs from a variety of short and long-range sensors. The
signal input type from these sensors must be in a digital format to properly interface with the
FMS. The number of sensors the FMS is capable of using is determined by the type of FMS
and the number of available input ports. Some sensor inputs are port specific. This must be a
consideration when multiple sensor inputs are used.
(1) IRS or IRS/GPS Sensors
A maximum of three may be used configured in any order or combination. All IRS or
IRS/GPS sensors are to be of the same type.
Page 301
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) GPS Sensors
A maximum of three GPS sensors, including GLS, GNSS, GPS and Hybrid GPS and
IRS sensors may be used (including the internal GPS/WAAS). These sensors can be
configured in any order or combination.
The FMS, in conjunction with either an internal GPS/WAAS or an appropriate
external GPS, is certifiable for use as a primary means of navigation in
remote/oceanic airspace using GPS in accordance with the provisions of AC 20-138A
Appendix 1. There are specific FMS hardware and software requirements as well as
GPS/WAAS hardware and software requirements. Additionally, a RAIM prediction
program is required to verify that adequate integrity will exist for the proposed flight.
(3) RRS Sensor
An RRS may be used in place of DME/VOR/TACAN receivers. (The RRS contains
the electronics of a multi–channel DME/TACAN receiver-transmitter with a VOR
receiver. The RRS is tuned remotely by the FMS using the ARINC 429 data bus.)
(4) RRS/RTU
The RRS and RTU can be installed and used in the same aircraft. The RRS provides
radio navigation inputs and the RTU is used for pilot command tuning of radios. In
the event of an RRS failure, the pilot must select CSDB tuning of the DME (if
installed) to allow uninterrupted DME–DME navigation.
The FMS provides optional radio tuning of COM, NAV, ADFs and transponders via
CSDB or ARINC 429, depending on radio manufacture and type. It may also be
dependent on the use of Universal’s Radio Tuning Unit (RTU). If an RTU is used, the
RTU software version must be compatible with the FMS software. Tuning of the
VHF NAV and DME for navigation does not require an external RTU because tuning
is handled by the FMS.
(5) Air Data
Air data must be supplied in ARINC 429 or 575 formats. If an analog air data
computer is installed in the aircraft, an Air Data Converter Unit (ACU) may be an
option. The ACU will convert the analog air data to ARINC 429. If the aircraft has no
TAS source, an air data computer must be installed.
The type of air data input (barometric altitude, pressure altitude or both) provided by
the air data source must be verified. The FMS must be configured to exactly match
these inputs. Both barometric altitude and pressure altitude must be configured if the
advanced performance option is enabled with the FMS.
The accuracy of the air data is also a consideration when the FMS will be certified for
VNAV or 3D coupled approaches. If the accuracy is not sufficient, then only lateral
approach operation will be possible.
Universal requires the use of barometric altitude. Without barometric altitude, SIDs
and STARs with altitude terminators and missed approach procedures cannot be
flown. Also, VNAV operation below 18,000 feet is not possible and the system is
limited to enroute navigation and 2D approaches only. Flight manual supplement
limitations will be required.
Page 302
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(6) ARINC Radio Tune Unit (ARTU)
The ARTU provides interface between the FMS and the Collins 429 radios using the
Collins RTU-870 Radio Tuning Unit. Radios may be tuned via the UASC FMS or the
Collins RTU-870. The UASC FMS and the Collins RTU-870 are interactive and no
external switching is required.
(7) Display Interfaces
Instrument display input signal type must be determined (either analog or digital) and
if digital, the format (ARINC 429, 561, 571) must also be determined.
(a) Universal’s Electronic Flight Instrument (EFI) and Multi-Function Display
(MFD)
Universal EFIs (ND/HSI and ADI) and MFD when interfaced with
Universal’s FMS are capable of correctly displaying navigation and flight plan
data. EFI and MFD displays give the operator the capability to select and
display needed information on demand as flight data changes occur.
(b) Electro-mechanical Instruments
Aircraft that incorporate electro-mechanical instruments may not have
autocourse slewing. This requires the flight crew to manually position the
course pointer to display desired track. Bearing pointers may also not be
compatible due to load problems and may require the addition of an amplifier.
(c) EFIS
CAUTION: IF 429 ADV IS PROGRAMMED WITHOUT A
COMPATIBLE EFIS, THE FLIGHT PLAN WILL BE
DRAWN INCORRECTLY. 429 GAMA MUST BE
PROGRAMMED WITH ANALOG INSTRUMENT
INTERFACES OR NON-COMPATIBLE EFIS.
Collins EFIS 85/86 status B-4, B-14, C-4, C-14, E-F, E-14 or Bendix/King
EFIS 40/50 (SG 65 symbol generators) or equivalent can be configured for
interface by selecting 429 ADV. When 429 ADV is selected, the EFIS will be
capable of correctly displaying a flight plan on the map display when the flight
plan contains a gap or procedural leg. The map display will draw the flight
plan line to the last fixed waypoint before the gap or procedural leg and end
there. The flight plan display will start again at the next fixed waypoint after
the gap and be drawn to the following waypoints.
When interfaced to EFIS displays the FMS must be correctly configured for
signal type (429 ADV, 429 GAMA, EDZ 705, 429 DHC, ASCB, etc.).
Display scaling for each EFIS display must be addressed, not all EFIS displays
meet the necessary criteria for approaches. With ARINC 429 EFIS interfaces
where the EFIS is not compliant with TSO C-129 scaling requirements, the
system may be restricted to the use of flight director steering only for terminal
and approach operations. The installer should discuss the issue with the
certification agency before proceeding with the installation. Analog and
ARINC 561 displays usually present no problems.
Page 303
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(8) Universal’s Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS)
When interfaced with a Universal FMS, the TAWS system is able to provide terrain
awareness information based on information from the FMS. The information from the
FMS provides TAWS with the ability to determine the aircraft’s state and intent and
provide caution and warning alerts. The FMS is capable of displaying maps and
symbology generated by TAWS. TAWS provides “Flight Plan Look Ahead” terrain
alerts by comparing the FMS flight plan to terrain databases.
(9) Radar
The FMS can be configured to accept input from one or two radar sensors. When two
radar sensors are used, one must be a Doppler radar and the other must be a 429, 571,
or 1500 radar. The FMS supports the following radar systems:
Collins WXR–300 MFD
Sperry Data Nav III
Bendix Radar Nav IU–2023B
Bendix Radar 1500 IU–1507A
Racal Avionics Limited Doppler 91
AN/ASN–137 Doppler
NOTE: For further compatibility information on specific equipment, refer to the

applicable sensor manual.
(10) Annunciators
Standard annunciations provided by the FMS are: FMS HDG (heading), FMS SXTK
(selected crosstrack), MSG (message), WPT (waypoint), DR (dead reckoning) and
FMS APPR (approach). If utilizing GPS for approach or for GPS Primary Means of
Navigation, then GPS INTEG (GPS integrity) will be required. Universal’s FMS
outputs discretes for these annunciations. Annunciator signals are also provided on
the applicable busses for use in EFIS installations when desired. On EFIS systems
which display G/S (glideslope) in lieu of VNAV (vertical deviation) during FMS
approach mode, a PSEUDO ILS annunciator may be required to alert the flight crew
that the vertical display is FMS generated information and not sourced or provided
glideslope information. There may be minor variations to the actual nomenclature
displayed but the FMS modes must be in some way displayed and annunciated.
Level of Service (LOS) discretes are provided by the WAAS subsystem for SBAS
approaches. These non-configurable discretes are LPV, LNAV/VNAV and LNAV
(LOS 1, LOS 2 and LOS 3 respectively). These provide annunciation for the LOS in
installations not interfaced with Universal’s EFI-890R or EFI-550.
Page 304
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the Installation and Wiring section adjacent Page 304.
Purpose
To clarify annunciator requirements.
Instructions
Insert the following text to (10) Annunciators section on Page 304:
It is required that the approach type be annunciated in the pilot's primary field of
view.
For aircraft that have LPV approval, LPV, LNAV/VNAV and LNAV annunciators
must be installed.
Aircraft that do not have LPV approval, LNAV/VNAV and LNAV annunciators must
be installed.
Page 1 of 1
34-60-52 19 April 2012
(11) Enroute Steering Interfaces
Many existing long-range navigation systems have been interfaced in the past to flight
guidance/autopilot systems via left/right deviation steering only. This was adequate
for those systems capable of only enroute navigation. However, new and advanced
systems require that roll steering be used. By using a roll command interface the FMS
can provide steering for all procedural leg types including heading to altitude, DME
arcs, holding patterns, turn anticipation, procedure turns and other complex
maneuvers.
The FMS outputs roll command steering at 393 mV/deg for enroute and terminal
navigation and roll steering only approaches. Interface with flight director/autopilot
normally uses a designated LRN input to the F/D and A/P equipment or through the
HDG channel with external switching. F/D and A/P coupled operation utilizing L/R
deviation only is not recommended and is not certifiable.
If a designated LRN F/D and A/P input is not available (specifically the J.E.T. FC-
200 F/D and A/P) a Universal Steering Interface Unit (SIU) can be utilized to switch
the roll command steering signal to the F/D and A/P and properly scale the 393
mV/deg. The SIU will also command the necessary logic to annunciate the
appropriate modes of operation.
(12) Approach Functions and Options
Universal FMS systems have been certified in the United States and other countries
for GPS only, GPS overlay, VOR, VOR/DME, TACAN, RNAV and NDB non-
precision approaches using GPS as the navigation sensor. Approaches of these types
are contained in the FMS published navigation database include approach transitions
and missed approach segments. The FMS systems use GPS combined with other
navigation sensors and baro corrected altitude data to provide lateral and vertical
guidance from the Final Approach Fix (FAF) to the runway and then to the missed
approach and missed approach holding waypoints.
At approach initiation, when the approach mode is selected on the Control Display
Unit by the pilot, the GPS will remain selected when the approach definition data
used is contained within the FMS on-board published database as an approved GPS
approach. If the approach from the database is not a published GPS approach then the
sensor will automatically be deselected at approach initiation.
Generally there are several ways of installing Universal’s FMS for approach
operations. It must be decided how the FMS is to be certified concerning approaches;
whether or not the FMS approach capability will be roll steering only, or roll steering
with VDEV displayed, fully 3D coupled or RNAV(GPS) approach procedures using a
WAAS/GPS sensor calculated position. This determination will dictate which
additional annunciation(s) will be required to be added to the cockpit for certification,
which strapping will be required on certain EFIS systems, etc.
Page 305
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Using the WAAS/GPS sensor calculated position, the FMS provides localizer
performance and vertical guidance for WAAS approach procedures. A WAAS
approach is one that is charted as RNAV (GPS) and approved for WAAS. In addition
to standard Lateral Navigation (LNAV) guidance, the FMS provides lateral and
vertical guidance for Lateral Navigation/Vertical Navigation (LNAV/VNAV) and
Localizer Performance with Vertical Guidance (LPV) approach minimums for
WAAS approaches. LNAV/VNAV approaches use lateral and vertical guidance from
the FMS for a controlled descent to the runway. An LPV approach is similar to an
LNAV/VNAV approach except it has lower approach minimums and requires dual
FMS installation.
The FMS can also provide 2D coupled (along track and crosstrack) operation using
the roll steering input channel to the FGS. The approach gain for the roll steering
output from the FMS is configurable to provide a more aggressive path following for
approaches. A gain of ’3X’ is recommended. The FGS will remain in NAV mode; the
FMS will steer the approach transition segments and final approach using the same
roll steering command input that is used for enroute operations. In this case, it is very
desirable to provide a vertical display on the HSI of the pseudo glideslope VNAV
deviation. Coupled vertical approach will not be possible with this interface design
and it will be up to the flight crew to make the descent using another FGS mode.
From an interface standpoint, this is the simplest method to interface for approaches.
The limitation of this interface is the lack of coupled vertical ILS-like operation.
Some installations such as the LR-60, LR-31, Dash 8, Falcon 2000 and Astra SPX do
use pitch command for approach mode but this is not the typical scenario for retrofit
installations.
A third method of interfacing the FMS for approach involves 3D fully coupled
pseudo ILS approaches. This is accomplished by switching FMS analog lateral and
vertical deviation signals in place of real ILS data to the HSI and FGS. During the
approach transition segments with NAV mode selected on FGS and LRN selected for
display, the FMS (established inbound and less than 0.2nm cross track for auto-
activation) the FMS approach active annunciator output from the FMS is used to
provide relay logic to switch the FMS deviation to the HSI and FGS along with
simulated Tune-to-Localizer. FMS lateral and vertical deviations are switched to the
FGS and approach arm/capture functions are available for F/D and A/P operation.
The HSI and FGS will use the simulated ILS and thus ILS control laws of the FGS are
used. This generally results in approaches with better path following than roll steering
approaches. This type of installation obviously adds complexity and requires detailed
description in the AFM supplement as well as proper aircrew training.
Page 306
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. Electrical Connectors
The FMS uses low insertion force, size 2 shell, ARINC 600 service connectors. The
connector guide pins of the FMS are arranged differently to prevent their connection to non-
compatible racks. For the ARINC 600 index pin coding of the FMS connector, refer to the
FMS outline drawing in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual.
D. Remote Annunciators
The FMS provides outputs to remotely mounted panel annunciators. These include remote
Message, Waypoint Alert, Selected Crosstrack, GPS Integrity, FMS Heading and FMS
Approach advisories. In addition, a “System On” discrete output is available to the installer
for use in activating remote switching (if required).
Level of Service (LOS) discretes are provided by the WAAS subsystem for SBAS
approaches. These non-configurable discretes are LPV, LNAV/VNAV and LNAV (LOS 1,
LOS 2 and LOS 3 respectively). These provide annunciation for the LOS in installations not
interfaced with Universal’s EFI-890R or EFI-550.
E. FMS Mounting
The FMS must not be mounted next to excessive heat producing equipment or in such a way
as to impede normal convection cooling. The FMS can however be mounted in any
orientation with respect to the aircraft longitudinal axis. The FMS racks must be grounded to
the airframe by wire braid. This provides a positive grounding of the racks to which data
shields are connected.
The Configuration Module is mounted on the FMS rack. Refer to the Configuration Module
Installation drawing in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual.
The FPCDU is instrument or pedestal mounted using standard configuration Dzus rails.
Consideration should be given to the depth of the FMS and wire bundles when planning
installation.
F. GPS (WAAS) Antenna Mounting
(1) Installation Considerations
The antenna should be mounted on top of the fuselage near the cockpit. Avoid
mounting the antenna near any projections, the propeller, the T–Tail, and minimize
shadowing by the wing during maneuvers. The antenna should also be located with
proper spacing to other system antennas such that no performance degradation will
occur due to shadowing of signals and/or RF interference.
Minimum Antenna Separation
Antennas Distances
GPS-GPS 12 inches
GPS-SATCOM (INMARSAT, 1625 MHz) 4 feet
GPS-all other antennas 4 feet
Page 307
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Installation Instructions
Total attenuation losses due to antenna cabling and connections must not exceed the
minimum recommended specifications listed below. Attenuation losses will vary
depending on the type of RF cable connected to the antenna. The gain of the
antenna/preamplifier minus the loss of the cable and end connectors should be
between 20 (minimum) and 30 dB for optimum performance. For instance, if the GPS
is being connected to antenna P/N 10708, which has a nominal gain of 30 dB, total
attenuation losses, must not exceed 10 dB. To ensure a minimum 20 dB of gain from
the antenna input to the GPS/WAAS sensor.
It is also highly recommended that only high quality, low-loss cable such as ECS or
PIC RG-142, RG-400 or equivalent coax cable is used in the installation. Refer to the
following table for the maximum allowable cable loss specifications based on the
amount of antenna gain.
Gain/Loss Specifications
Antenna Part Number Antenna Gain Maximum Cable Loss
10708 30 ± 3 dB 10 dB
10709 30 ± 3 dB 10 dB
10710 30 ± 3 dB 10 dB
Mechanical structure modifications to install GPS antenna(s) should be carried out in

accordance with the guidelines of FAA Advisory Circular AC 43.13. Installation of
the antenna, its electrical bonding to the structure, coaxial cable routing and clamping
should also be accomplished per this advisory. Refer to the antenna installation
drawing contained in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual for detailed
information.
To assure maximum protection from a possible lightning strike, the antenna base
should conduct to the mounting surface. This can be accomplished by removing paint
in the area of contact between the antenna base and the aircraft skin.
The hole for TNC connector should be about 0.75-inch diameter. Make the smallest
practical hole in the pressure vessel.
Fasten the antenna with four screws of sufficient length to assure that at least two full
threads protrude beyond the locking nut or threaded backing plate (if used). Apply a
maximum torque of 10 in. lbs. to avoid cracking the plastic radome of the antenna.
Apply a sealant (RTV is recommended) over screw heads and around the periphery of
the antenna to exclude moisture.
Check bonding of the antenna to the aircraft skin by measuring the resistance between
the skin of the aircraft and the antenna connector housing using a shunt-type
ohmmeter such as a Wheatstone Bridge or Kelvinometer. There should be no more
than 100 milliohms resistance measured. This measurement is accomplished from the
inside of the aircraft with the antenna installed.
Page 308
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) Long Cable Runs
In installations with very long cable runs, it is permissible to use a low loss coax
cable (such as Electronic Cable Specialists P/N 311501) for the run from the antenna
to a bulkhead connector. Then use a smaller coax (such as ECS P/N 3C3160
M17/113-RG316) from the bulkhead connector to the UNS–1Lw. Components for
this application are listed below.
Coax cable P/N 311501 3C3160
Attenuation 1.575 GHz = 0.087 dB/ft. 1.575 GHz = 0.405 dB/ft.
Minimum Bend Radius 1.22 in. (nominal) 1.02 in. (nominal)
RF Connectors P/Ns
TNC Straight CTS922 31-2315-1000
TNC 90º CTR922 KA-59-281
Bulkhead TNC BTS922 N/A
BNC Straight CBS922 225395-7
BNC 90º CBR922 KC-59-318
Complete FMS GPS cable assemblies as well as bulk coax cable and connectors
are available from Electronic Cable Specialists. Refer to Wire and Cable
Manufacturers in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual.
Page 309
34-60-52 3 February 2011
G. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)
Installation Considerations
The SSDTU is available in two models, a fixed installation model that is permanently
installed in the aircraft and a portable model which is carried into the aircraft, attached to an
interface connector, used, then disconnected and removed prior to flight. The SSDTU is the
same fit as a DTU-100.
The SSDTU may be used as a replacement for a DTU-100 and can be directly installed
without any modifications to the aircraft or wiring using connector P1, which allows the use
of a single Ethernet connection. If the aircraft is wired for the DTU-100 using four Ethernet
ports, connector P2 must be replaced with connector P/N 83000255 which is included in the
SSDTU installation kit P/N K12079-1, no additional wiring is needed. To have all eight
Ethernet ports available on the SSDTU, the P2 connector must be replaced and additional
wiring must be installed.
If the aircraft is wired for a Portable DTU-100, use the wiring harness (P/N 81304072) to
connect bulkhead connector P1 to the Portable SSDTU J1 and the retrofit wiring harness
(P/N 81140811) to connect bulkhead P2 to J2 of the Portable SSDTU. This allows one
Ethernet connection on P1 and three Ethernet connections on P2. For the additional four
Ethernet ports to be available to the Portable SSDTU, the existing P2 bulkhead connector
must be replaced with connector P/N 83000558 and additional wiring must be installed.
Refer to the applicable pin identification tables and wiring diagrams in this section.
J1 Pin Crossover
SSDTU SSDTU DTU-100 DTU-100
Functions Pins Functions Pins
EIA-485 (Side A) (FMS 485 A) A RS-422 A A
EIA-485 (Side B) (FMS 485 B) B RS-422 B B
Ethernet #1 RX (+) C Ethernet #0 RX (+) C
Ethernet #1 RX (-) D Ethernet #0 RX (-) D
Ethernet #1 Shield E Ethernet #0 Shield E
Ethernet #1 TX (+) F Ethernet #0 TX (+) F
Ethernet #1 TX (-) G Ethernet #0 TX (-) G
H Option Pin 0 H
J Option Pin 1 J
K K
Chassis Ground L Chassis Ground L
Power 28 VDC M Power 28 VDC M
EIA-232 RX N Aux Port RX (RS-232 RX) N
Ground P Ground P
EIA-232 TX R Aux Port TX (RS-232 TX) R
Page 310
34-60-52 3 February 2011
J2 Pin Crossover
NOTE: Pin numbers/letters not listed are not used or assigned any function.
SSDTU SSDTU DTU-100 DTU-100
Functions Pins Functions Pins
Ethernet #3 RX (+) 1 Ethernet #2 RX (+) E
Ethernet #3 TX (+) 2 Ethernet #2 TX (+) G
Ethernet #2 RX (-) 4 Ethernet #1 RX (-) B
Ethernet #3 RX (-) 6 Ethernet #2 RX (-) F
Ethernet #3 TX (-) 7 Ethernet #2 TX (-) G
Ethernet #4 TX (-) 8 Ethernet #3 TX (-) N
Ethernet #4 TX (+) 9 Ethernet #3 TX (+) L
Ethernet #2 TX (-) 10 Ethernet #1 TX (-) D
Ethernet #2 RX (+) 11 Ethernet #1 RX (+) A
Ethernet #3 Shield 13
Ethernet #4 RX (-) 15 Ethernet #3 RX (-) K
Ethernet #4 RX (+) 16 Ethernet #3 RX (+) J
Ethernet #2 TX (+) 18 Ethernet #1 TX (+) C
Ethernet #2 Shield 19 Ethernet Shield P
Ethernet #8 TX (-) 27
Ethernet #8 RX (-) 28
Ethernet #5 TX (+) 31
Ethernet #8 RX (+) 36
Page 311
34-60-52 3 February 2011
2. FMS Interfaces
Interconnection wiring information between the aircraft, FMS, CDU, DTU is provided in the
following paragraphs and wiring diagrams. Information about the connection to VOR, DME,
TACAN, radar, flight control and fuel flow systems is provided in the WAAS FMS Interface
Manual, 34-60-53. Configuration of the FMS can be found in the WAAS FMS Configuration
Manual 34-61-XX.
A. Analog Inputs
Input Description Plug/Pin Characteristics
Altitude Coarse Synchro/Roll TP 1H (X) DC ARINC 565 Coarse Synchro
TP 1J (Y) Reference or Coarse Altitude
TP 1K (Z) Common or Roll
Altitude Fine Synchro/Pitch TP 1D (X) Sin ARINC 565 Fine Synchro
TP 1E (Y) Cos or Fine Resolver Altitude
TP 1F (Z) Common or Pitch
Altitude Synchro or Altitude Synchro TP 1A (H) 26 VAC 400 Hz
Reference TP 1B (C) 26 VAC 400 Hz
Autopilot Reference MP 11D (H) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
MP 11E (C) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
Input Voltage: 26 VAC RMS ± 10%,
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80 kΩ (minimum)
Input Load: 2 mA (maximum)
Fuel Flow #1 MP 15A (A) Depends on Configuration
MP 15B (B)
Fuel Flow #2 MP 15C (A) Depends on Configuration
MP 15D (B)
Fuel Flow #3 MP 15E (A) Depends on Configuration
MP 15F (B)
Fuel Flow #4 MP 15G (A) Depends on Configuration
MP 15H (B)
Heading Synchro MP 9A (X) Impedance = 33 kΩ
MP 9B (Y) Impedance = 33 kΩ
MP 9C (Z) Impedance = 24 kΩ
Standard ARINC 407 three–wire synchro
transmitter (or equivalent) with two–wire
reference signal from aircraft compass
system.
Heading Synchro Reference MP 9D (H) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
MP 9E (Common) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80k Ω (minimum)
Input Load: 2 mA (maximum)
Page 312
34-60-52 3 February 2011
A. Analog Inputs (continued)
Instrument Synchro Reference MP 1E (H) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
(Applicable to Analog configuration MP 1F (Common) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
P/N 3017-XX-211 only)
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80k Ω (minimum)
Input Load: 2 ma (maximum)
Static Air Temperature TP 3E Reference Voltage ARINC 565
TP 3F DC Return Reference and Signal
TP 3G Signal Voltage ARINC 565
True Airspeed TP 3A Reference Voltage ARINC 565
TP 3B DC Return Reference and Signal
TP 3C Signal Voltage ARINC 565
WAAS Crosschannel Lateral Deviation TP 2G (H)
(Applicable to Analog configuration TP 2H (L)
P/N 3017-XX-211 only)
WAAS Crosschannel Vertical Deviation TP 2J (H)
(Applicable to Analog configuration TP 2K (L)
P/N 3017-XX-211 only)
Page 313
34-60-52 3 February 2011
B. Discrete Inputs
Discrete Input 1 MP 6G Ground / Open (Configurable)
See System Data Installation for list of
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 2 MP 6H Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 3 MP 6J Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 4 MP 15J Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 5 MP 11H Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 6 MP 15K Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 7 MP 6A Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 8 MP 6E Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 9 MP 6F Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 10 MP 11G Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 11 MP 6B Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Altitude or Attitude Valid TP 3J 28 VDC / Open
Altitude Valid TP 3K Ground / Open
FMS #2 MP 11J Ground / Open (Ground = FMS #2)
FMS #3 MP 11K Ground / Open (Ground = FMS #3)
Heading Input MAG/TRUE MP 9G 28 VDC / Open
(Open = MAG / 28 VDC = TRUE)
Heading Input Valid MP 9F 28 VDC / Open
SAT Valid TP 5E 28 VDC / Open
TAS Valid TP 5A 28 VDC / Open
WAAS Crosschannel Level of Service TP 4H Ground / Open
WAAS Crosschannel Fail TP 4G Ground / Open
Steering Valid MP 11C 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
WAAS Crosschannel Vertical Guidance TP 4J 28 VDC / Open
Monitor
WAAS Crosschannel Lateral Guidance TP 4K 28 VDC / Open
Monitor
Power Control BP 4 Ground / Open (FMS Power On/Off)
Page 314
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. Digital Inputs
(1) ASCB Inputs (SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and later)
bus developed by Honeywell and supplement the ARINC, CSDB, and analog
interfaces of the FMS.
ASCB Discrete In 1 TP 9A Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 2 TP 9B Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 3 TP 9D Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 4 TP 9F Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 5 MP 3A Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 6 MP 3B Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 7 MP 5J Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 8 TP 9C Ground / Open
ASCB A Clock 1 + MP 1C
ASCB A Clock 1 – MP 3C
ASCB A Data 1 + MP 1A
ASCB A Data 1 – MP 1B
ASCB B Clock 2 + MP 1G
ASCB B Clock 2 – MP 1H
ASCB B Data 2 + MP 5G
ASCB B Data 2 – MP 5K
NOTE: Assuming NCU #1 is to be configured for TX/RX on Left ASCB bus, ASCB A Port
(On-Side) is connected to the Left ASCB Bus and ASCB B Port (Off-Side) is
connected to the Right ASCB Bus.
Page 315
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) CSDB Inputs
Some sensors are restricted to certain input ports. The allowable CSDB port
assignments and their pin numbers are found in the WAAS FMS Configuration
Manual 34-61-XX.
Receive From External CDU #1 (Note) MP 2A (H) External CDU
MP 2B (L)
Receive From External CDU #2 (Note) MP 2C (H) External CDU
MP 2D (L)
CSDB Receiver Port 1 MP 14C (H) Depends on Configuration
MP 14D (L)
CSDB Receiver Port 2 MP 2G (H) Depends on Configuration
MP 2H (L)
CSDB Receiver Port 3 MP 14A (H) Depends on Configuration
MP 14B (L)
CSDB Receiver Port 4 MP 14E (H) Depends on Configuration
MP 14F (L)
WAAS Differential Timemark A TP 10A (A) RS-422
WAAS Differential Timemark B TP 10B (B) RS-422
Page 316
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) ARINC Input Ports

Some sensors are restricted to certain input ports. The allowable ARINC port
Manual 34-61-XX.
Port Plug/Pin Description Notes
Port 0 TP-10C (A) ARINC 429 or 419 (LS) 1, 2, 3
TP-10D (B)
Port 1 MP-4G (A) ARINC 429 or 419 (LS)

MP-4H (B)
Port 2 MP-12C (A) ARINC 429 or 419 (LS)

MP-12D (B)
Port 3 MP-12G (A) ARINC 429 or 419 (LS)

MP-12H (B)
Port 4 MP-8A (A) ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)

MP-8B (B)
Port 5 MP-8C (A) ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)

MP-8D (B)
Port 6 MP-8E (A) ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)

MP-8F (B)
Port 7 MP-8G (A) ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)

MP-8H (B)
WAAS Port 0 MP-10F (A) WAAS Offside FMS 4

MP-10E (B)
WAAS Port 1 MP-10G (A) WAAS Cross-channel Receive 4
MP-10H (B)
WAAS Port 2 TP-2A (A) WAAS Cross-channel Monitor #1 (Guidance 4
Bus)
TP-2B (B)
WAAS Port 3 TP 2C (A) WAAS Cross-channel Monitor #2 (Guidance 4
Bus)
TP 2D (B)
NOTES: 1. In all dual WAAS FMS installations, RX Port 0 must be configured to WAAS n
(where n represents 1 for FMS#1 or 2 for FMS#2) This is required because the
internal WAAS subsystem uses the configuration information for RX Port #0 to
setup the speed for the WAAS ARINC 743A TX port.
2. In single WAAS FMS with LP/LPV Monitor installations, RX Port #0 must be
configured for WAAS 1. In this installation, the configuration information for RX
Port #0 is used to setup the speed for the WAAS ARINC 743A TX port of the internal
WAAS subsystem and the LP/LPV Monitor.
3. Port #0 should not be connected to any external system.
4. For WAAS use only, not a configurable port.
Page 317
34-60-52 3 February 2011
D. Analog Outputs
Output Description Plug/Pin Characteristics
Desired Track MP 3A (X) Synchro X
MP 3B (Y) Synchro Y
MP 3C (Z) Synchro Z
Lateral Deviation MP 3F (H) +R – Fly Right, Left of Course
MP 3G (L) +L – Fly Left, Right of Course
See Lateral Deviation Characteristics
Table Below
Pitch Command MP 1G (H) AC or DC pitch
MP 1H (L) Pitch Return
Roll Steering MP 11A (H) 0.393 VAC RMS/Degree
MP 11B (L) Right Roll in Phase
To/From MP 5J (H) + To 180-250 mV Output
MP 5K (L) + From
Vertical Deviation MP 7F (H) +Up – Fly Up, Below Course
MP 7G (L) +Down– Fly Down, Above Course
See Vertical Deviation Characteristics
Table Below
Waypoint Bearing/Drift Angle MP 1A (X) Synchro X
MP 1B (Y) Synchro Y
MP 1C (Z) Synchro Z
(1) Lateral Deviation Characteristics

Range 2 Dot Value Invalid Stow Value
Low Level Configuration
Enroute –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 2NM –150 to +150 mVDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Terminal –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 1NM –150 to +150 mVDC 0.0 VDC N/A
0.3 NM –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 0.3NM –150 to +150 mVDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Approach –250 to +250 mVDC L/R (angular) –150 to +150 mVDC 0.0 VDC N/A
High Level Configuration
Enroute –10 to +10 VDC L/R 2NM –6 to +6 VDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Terminal –10 to +10 VDC L/R 1NM –6 to +6 VDC 0.0 VDC N/A
0.3 NM –10 to +10 VDC L/R 0.3NM –6 to +6 VDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Approach –10 to +10 VDC L/R (angular) –6 to +6 VDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Page 318
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Vertical Deviation Characteristics

Range 2 Dot Value Invalid Stow Value
Low Level Configuration
Enroute –205 to +205 mVDC L/R 1476 ft. –150 to +150 mVDC 750 mVDC 1.3 VDC
Terminal –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 492 ft. –150 to +150 mVDC 750 mVDC 1.3 VDC
0.3 NM –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 200 ft. –150 to +150 mVDC 750 mVDC 1.3 VDC
Approach –250 to +250 mVDC L/R (angular) –150 to +150 mVDC 750 mVDC 1.3 VDC
High Level Configuration
Enroute –2.78 to +2.78 VDC L/R 1476 ft. –2 to +2 VDC 3.5 VDC 8.12 VDC
Terminal –3.33 to +3.33 VDC L/R 492 ft. –2 to +2 VDC 3.5 VDC 8.12 VDC
0.3 NM –3.33 to +3.33 VDC L/R 200 ft. –2 to +2 VDC 3.5 VDC 8.12 VDC
Approach –3.33 to +3.33 VDC L/R (angular) –2 to +2 VDC 3.5 VDC 8.12 VDC
Page 319
34-60-52 3 February 2011
E. Discrete Outputs
All discrete outputs, except the NAV Flag and Vertical Flag, are of two types: Ground/Open
and 28VDC/Open. Both the Ground/Open and 28VDC/Open discrete outputs may be either
configurable or non-configurable. Non-configurable discretes must be assigned to a specific
pin. Configurable discretes may be assigned to any one of a specific set of pins.
(1) Non-Configurable Discretes
Digital Valid MP 5G 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
Message Annunciator Output MP 13A Ground / Open (GND = Message, 350mA
is the maximum allowable load)
Nav Valid MP 3H 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
MP 3K
Nav Flag MP 3J 800 mV to 1.2 V (Circuitry in the
motherboard converts the 28V to a voltage
within the specified range to set the flag.)
Pitch Command Valid MP 1J 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
MP 1K
Steering Valid MP 11C 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
Vertical Valid MP 7H 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
MP 7K
Vertical Flag MP 7J 800 mV to 1.2 V (Circuitry in the
motherboard converts the 28V to a voltage
within the specified range to set the flag.)
Level of Service 1 TP 4A Ground / Open
Level of Service 2 TP 4B Ground / Open
Level of Service 3 TP 4C Ground / Open
WAAS Crosschannel Fail TP 4E Ground / Open
Page 320
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Configurable Discretes
Discrete Output 1 MP 6K Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 2 MP 13B Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 3 MP 13C Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 4 MP 13D Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 5 MP 13E Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 6 MP 7A Ground / Open(Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 7 MP 7B Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 8 MP 6C Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 9 MP 13F 28 VDC / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Page 321
34-60-52 3 February 2011
F. Digital Outputs
The following tables show a list of the configurable CSDB and ARINC 429 outputs along
with the ports to which they default when the configuration module is initialized. Each of
these ports is configurable.
Some sensors are restricted to certain output ports. The allowable ARINC port assignments
and their pin numbers are found in the WAAS FMS Configuration Manual 34-61-XX.
(1) CSDB Output Ports
CSDB TX 1 MP 2J (H)
MP 2K (L)
CSDB TX 2 MP 10A (H)
MP 10B (L)
(2) ASCB Outputs (SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and later)

bus developed by Honeywell and supplement the ARINC, CSDB, and analog
interfaces of the FMS.
ASCB Discrete Out 1 MP 5E ASCB Discrete Out 1 (28 V/OPN)
ASCB Discrete Out 2 MP 5A ASCB Discrete Out 2 (28V/OPN Spare)
ASCB Discrete Out 3 MP 5C ASCB Discrete Out 3 (GND/OPN Spare)
ASCB Discrete Out 4 MP 1J ASCB Discrete Out 4 (GND/OPN)
NOTE: Assuming NCU #1 is to be configured for TX/RX on Left ASCB bus, ASCB A Port (On-
Side) is connected to the Left ASCB Bus and ASCB B Port (Off-Side) is connected to the
Right ASCB Bus.
Page 322
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) ARINC Output Ports
The following table shows a list of the configurable ARINC 429 outputs along with
the ports to which they default when the configuration module is initialized. Each of
these ports is configurable.
Some sensors are restricted to certain output ports. The allowable ARINC port
Manual 34-61-XX.
Port Plug/Pin Default Configuration Notes
Port 0A MP-4A (A) ARINC 429 HS
MP-4B (B)
Port 0B MP-12A (A)
MP-12B (B)
Port 1 MP-4E (A) ARINC 571
MP-4F (B)
Port 2A MP-4J (A) ARINC 429 LS 1, 2, 3,
MP-4K (B) 4, 6
Port 2B MP-12J (A)
MP-12K (B)
Port 2C MP-10C (A)
MP-10D (B)
Port 3 MP-12E (A) ARINC 429 Crossfill HS
MP-12F (B)
Port 4 TP-10E (A) ARINC 429 Tune LS
TP-10F (B)
WAAS Port 0 TP-10J (A) WAAS Crosschannel Transmit 5
TP-10K (B)
WAAS Port 1A MP-10J (A) WAAS Transmit ARINC 743A Data 5
MP-10K (B)
WAAS Port 1B MP-4C (A) WAAS Transmit ARINC 743A Data 5
MP-4D (B)
Page 323
34-60-52 3 February 2011
NOTES: 1. (SCN 1000.2/1100.2 and earlier) In dual WAAS FMS Installations, Transmit Port
#2 must be configured for one of the following bus types: 429 HS, 429 LS, HS429
MOD 1, HS429 MOD 2, 429 LS GPS/XPDR or UNS HS429-1 to setup the speed
for the WAAS OFFSIDE RECEIVE.
2. (SCN 1000.3/1100.3 and later) In dual WAAS FMS Installations, Transmit Port #2
must be configured for one of the following bus types: 429 HS, 429 LS, HS429
MOD 2, HS429 MOD 3, HS429 MOD 4, GPS XPDR LS, GPS XPDR HS or UNS
HS429-1 to setup the speed for the WAAS OFFSIDE RECEIVE.
3. (SCN 1000.2/1100.2 and earlier) In single WAAS FMS with LP/LPV Monitor
Installations, Transmit Port #2 must be configured for one of the following bus
types: 429 HS, 429 LS, HS429 MOD 1, HS429 MOD 2, 429 LS GPS/XPDR or
UNS HS429-1 to setup the speed for the WAAS OFFSIDE RECEIVE of the
internal WAAS subsystem and the LP/LPV Monitor.
4. (SCN 1000.3/1100.3 and later) In single WAAS FMS with LP/LPV Monitor
Installations, Transmit Port #2 must be configured for one of the following bus
types: 429 HS, 429 LS, HS429 MOD 2, HS429 MOD 3, HS429 MOD 4, GPS
XPDR LS, GPS XPDR HS or UNS HS429-1 to setup the speed for the WAAS
OFFSIDE RECEIVE of the internal WAAS subsystem and the LP/LPV Monitor.
5. Not a configurable port.
6. (SCN 1000.3/1100.3 and later) Configuring any of the following bus types will
cause manual de-selection of geostationary satellites to not be supported: HS429
MOD 2, HS429 MOD 3, UNS HS429-1, GPS XPDR LS and GPS XPDR HS.
Page 324
34-60-52 3 February 2011
3. Pin Assignment
A. UNS-1Lw – All Digital (P/N 3116-X2-1110)
(1) Connector TP (Top Plug)
Pin Function Pin Function
1A NC 4G WAAS Discrete In XChannel Fail Monitor
1B NC 4H WAAS Discrete In XChannel LOS Monitor
1C NC 4J WAAS Discrete In XChannel Vertical Guidance
Flag Monitor
1D NC 4K WAAS Discrete In XChannel Lateral Guidance
Flag Monitor
1E NC 5A NC
1F NC 5B NC
1G NC 5C NC
1H NC 5D NC
1J NC 5E NC
1K NC 5F NC
2A WAAS XChannel Monitor (H) (Guidance Bus) 1 5G NC
(WAAS RX Port 2)
2B WAAS XChannel Monitor (L) (Guidance Bus) 1 5H NC
(WAAS RX Port 2)
2C WAAS XChannel Monitor (H) (Guidance Bus) 2 5J NC
(WAAS RX Port 3)
2D WAAS XChannel Monitor (L) (Guidance Bus) 2 5K NC
(WAAS RX Port 3)
2E NC 6A NC
2F NC 6B NC
2G WAAS XChannel Lateral Deviation (H) 6C NC
2H WAAS XChannel Lateral Deviation Return 6D NC
2J WAAS XChannel Vertical Deviation (H) 6E NC
2K WAAS XChannel Vertical Deviation Return 6F NC
3A NC 6G NC
3B NC 6H NC
3C NC 6J NC
3D NC 6K NC
3E NC 7A NC
3F NC 7B NC
3G NC 7C NC
3H NC 7D NC
3J NC 7E NC
3K NC 7F WAAS Monitor Return
4A WAAS Level of Service (LOS) 1 7G RS232 WAAS Monitor Transmit
4B WAAS Level of Service (LOS) 2 7H RS232 WAAS Monitor Receive
4C WAAS Level of Service (LOS) 3 7J NC
4D WAAS Discrete Out Spare #3 7K NC
4E WAAS Discrete Out XChannel Fail Output 8A NC
4F WAAS Discrete Out Spare #1 8B NC
Page 325
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(1) Connector TP (Top Plug) (continued)
8C NC 12B Ethernet TX 1 (L)
8D NC 12C Ethernet TX 1 Shield
8E NC 12D Ethernet RX 1 (H)
8F NC 12E Ethernet RX 1 (L)
8G NC 12F Ethernet TX 0 (H)
8H NC 12G Ethernet TX 0 (L)
8J NC 12H Ethernet TX 0 Shield
8K NC 12J Ethernet RX 0 (H)
9A NC 12K Ethernet RX 0 (L)
9B NC 13A NC
9C NC 13B NC
9D NC 13C NC
9E NC 13D NC
9F NC 13E NC
9G NC 13F NC
9H NC 13G NC
9J NC 13H NC
9K NC 13J NC
10A WAAS Differential Timemark 1A 13K NC
10B WAAS Differential Timemark 1B 14A NC
10C ARINC RX Port 0 (A) 14B NC
10D ARINC RX Port 0 (B) 14C NC
10E ARINC TX Port 4 (A) 14D NC
10F ARINC TX Port 4 (B) 14E NC
10G NC 14F NC
10H NC 14G NC
10J WAAS ARINC TX Port 0 (A) 14H NC
10K WAAS ARINC TX Port 0 (B) 14J NC
11A NC 14K NC
11B NC 15A NC
11C NC 15B NC
11D NC 15C NC
11E NC 15D NC
11F NC 15E NC
11G NC 15F NC
11H NC 15G
11J NC 15H
11K NC 15J NC
12A Ethernet TX 1 (H) 15K NC
Page 326
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Connector MP (Middle Plug)

1A NC 4G ARINC RX Port 1 (A)
1B NC 4H ARINC RX Port 1 (B)
1C NC 4J ARINC TX Port 2A (A)
1D NC 4K ARINC TX Port 2A (B)
1E NC 5A NC
1F NC 5B NC
1G NC 5C NC
1H NC 5D NC
1J NC 5E NC
1K NC 5F NC
2A CDU 1 RX (H) 5G NC
2B CDU 1 RX (L) 5H NC
2C CDU 2 RX (H) 5J NC
2D CDU 2 RX (L) 5K NC
2E CDU TX (H) 6A Discrete In 7 (GND/Open)
2F CDU TX (L) 6B Discrete In 11 (GND/Open)
2G CSDB RX Port 2 (H) 6C Discrete Out 8 (GND/Open)
2H CSDB RX Port 2 (L) 6D NC
2J CSDB TX Port 1 (H) 6E Discrete In 8 (GND/Open)
2K CSDB TX Port 1 (L) 6F Discrete In 9 (GND/Open)
3A NC 6G Discrete In 1 (GND/Open)
3B NC 6H Discrete In 2 (GND/Open)
3C NC 6J Discrete In 3 (GND/Open)
3D NC 6K Discrete Out 1 (GND/Open)
3E NC 7A Discrete Out 6 (GND/Open)
3F NC 7B Discrete Out 7 (GND/Open)
3G NC 7C NC
3H NC 7D NC
3J NC 7E NC
3K NC 7F NC
4A ARINC TX Port 0A (A) 7G NC
4B ARINC TX Port 0A (B) 7H NC
4C WAAS TX Port 1B (A) ARINC 743A Data 7J NC
4D WAAS TX Port 1B (B) ARINC 743A Data 7K NC
4E ARINC TX Port 1 (A) 8A ARINC RX Port 4 (A)
4F ARINC TX Port 1 (B) 8B ARINC RX Port 4 (B)
Page 327
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Connector MP (Middle Plug) (continued)
8C ARINC RX Port 5 (A) 12B ARINC TX Port 0B (B)
8D ARINC RX Port 5 (B) 12C ARINC RX Port 2 (A)
8E ARINC RX Port 6 (A) 12D ARINC RX Port 2 (B)
8F ARINC RX Port 6 (B) 12E ARINC TX Port 3 (A)
8G ARINC RX Port 7 (A) 12F ARINC TX Port 3 (B)
8H ARINC RX Port 7 (B) 12G ARINC RX Port 3 (A)
8J NC 12H ARINC RX Port 3 (B)
8K NC 12J ARINC TX Port 2B (A)
9A Heading X 12K ARINC TX Port 2B (B)
9B Heading Y 13A Message Annunciator (GND/Open)
9C Heading Z 13B Discrete Out 2 (GND/Open)
9D Heading Reference (H) 13C Discrete Out 3 (GND/Open)
9E Heading Reference Return 13D Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open)
9F Heading Valid Input (28 V/Open) 13E Discrete Out 5 (GND/Open)
9G Heading Input True/Magnetic (28 V/Open) 13F Discrete Out 9 (28 V/Open)
9H NC 13G Monitor Transmit
9J NC 13H Monitor Receive
9K NC 13J NC
10A CSDB TX Port 2 (H) 13K NC
10B CSDB TX Port 2 (L) 14A CSDB RX Port 3 (H)
10C ARINC TX Port 2C (A) 14B CSDB RX Port 3 (L)
10D ARINC TX Port 2C (B) 14C CSDB RX Port 1 (H)
10E WAAS RX Port 0 (B) – Offside FMS 14D CSDB RX Port 1 (L)
10F WAAS RX Port 0 (A) – Offside FMS 14E CSDB RX Port 4 (H)
10G WAAS RX Port 1 (A) – XChannel RX 14F CSDB RX Port 4 (L)
10H WAAS RX Port 1 (B) – XChannel RX 14G Configuration Module Ground
10J WAAS TX Port 1A (A) – ARINC 743A Data 14H Configuration Module VDC
10K WAAS TX Port 1A (B) – ARINC 743A Data 14J Configuration Module Data Clock
11A Roll Steering (H) 14K Configuration Module Data I/O
11B Roll Steering (L) 15A Fuel Flow 1 (H)
11C Steering Valid Discrete 15B Fuel Flow 1 (L)
11D Autopilot Reference (H) 15C Fuel Flow 2 (H)
11E Autopilot Reference (L) 15D Fuel Flow 2 (L)
11F NC 15E Fuel Flow 3 (H)
11G Discrete In 10 (28 V/Open) 15F Fuel Flow 3 (L)
11H Discrete In 5 (GND/Open) 15G Fuel Flow 4 (H)
11J FMS 2 Discrete Input 15H Fuel Flow 4 (L)
11K FMS 3 Discrete Input 15J Discrete In 4 (GND/Open)
12A ARINC TX Port 0B (A) 15K Discrete In 6 (GND/Open)
Page 328
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) Connector BP (Bottom Plug)
1 On Battery Annunciator Discrete Output 8 FMS DC Return
2 28 VDC Input 9 NC
3 28 VDC Input Battery 10 NC
4 Power Control 11 CDU DC Power Return
5 NC 12 NC
6 CDU 28 VDC Power 13 GPS Coax
7 FMS Chassis Ground
Page 329
34-60-52 3 February 2011
B. UNS-1Lw – ASCB Version A (P/N 3116-X2-1113)
1A NC 4G WAAS Discrete In XChannel Fail Monitor
1B NC 4H WAAS Discrete In XChannel LOS Monitor
Flag Monitor
1D NC 4K WAAS Discrete In XChannel Lateral Guidance
Flag Monitor
1E NC 5A NC
1F NC 5B NC
1G NC 5C NC
1H NC 5D NC
1J NC 5E NC
1K NC 5F NC
(WAAS RX Port 2)
(WAAS RX Port 2)
(WAAS RX Port 3)
(WAAS RX Port 3)
2E NC 6A NC
2F NC 6B NC
3A NC 6G NC
3B NC 6H NC
3C NC 6J NC
3D NC 6K NC
3E NC 7A NC
3F NC 7B NC
3G NC 7C NC
3H NC 7D NC
3J NC 7E NC
3K NC 7F WAAS Monitor Return
Page 330
34-60-52 3 February 2011
9A ASCB Discrete In 1 12K Ethernet RX 0 (L)
9B ASCB Discrete In 2 13A NC
9C ASCB Discrete In 8 13B NC
9D ASCB Discrete In 3 13C NC
9E NC 13D NC
9F ASCB Discrete In 4 13E NC
9G NC 13F NC
9H NC 13G NC
9J NC 13H NC
9K NC 13J NC
10G NC 14F NC
10H NC 14G NC
11A NC 14K NC
11B NC 15A NC
11C NC 15B NC
11D NC 15C NC
11E NC 15D NC
11F NC 15E NC
11G NC 15F NC
11H NC 15G
11J NC 15H
11K NC 15J NC
Page 331
34-60-52 3 February 2011

1A ASCB A Data + 4G ARINC RX Port 1 (A)
1B ASCB A Data - 4H ARINC RX Port 1 (B)
1C ASCB A Clock + 4J ARINC TX Port 2A (A)
1E NC 5A ASCB Discrete Out 2 (28 VDC/Open Spare)
1F NC 5B NC
1G ASCB B Clock + 5C ASCB Discrete Out 3 (28 VDC/Open Spare)
1H ASCB B Clock - 5D NC
1J ASCB Discrete Out 4 (28 VDC/Open Spare) 5E ASCB Discrete Out 1 (28 VDC/Open)
1K NC 5F NC
2A CDU 1 RX (H) 5G ASCB B Data +
2C CDU 2 RX (H) 5J ASCB Discrete In 7
2D CDU 2 RX (L) 5K ASCB B Data -
3A ASCB Discrete In 5 6G Discrete In 1 (GND/Open)
3B ASCB Discrete In 6 6H Discrete In 2 (GND/Open)
3C ASCB A Clock - 6J Discrete In 3 (GND/Open)
3F NC 7B Discrete Out 7 (GND/Open)
3G NC 7C NC
3H NC 7D NC
3J NC 7E NC
3K NC 7F NC
4A ARINC TX Port 0A (A) 7G NC
4B ARINC TX Port 0A (B) 7H NC
4C WAAS TX Port 1B (A) ARINC 743A Data 7J NC
4D WAAS TX Port 1B (B) ARINC 743A Data 7K NC
Page 332
34-60-52 3 February 2011
9B Heading Y 13A Message Annunciator (GND/Open)
9K NC 13J NC
10C ARINC TX Port 2C (A) 14B CSDB RX Port 3 (L)
10D ARINC TX Port 2C (B) 14C CSDB RX Port 1 (H)
Page 333
34-60-52 3 February 2011
2 28 VDC Input 9 NC
5 NC 12 NC
Page 334
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. UNS-1Lw – Analog (P/N 3116-X2-1116)
1A Altitude/Attitude Reference (H) 4G WAAS Discrete In XChannel Fail Monitor
1B Altitude/Attitude Reference Return 4H WAAS Discrete In XChannel LOS Monitor
Flag Monitor
1D Altitude Fine/Pitch Synchro X 4K WAAS Discrete In XChannel Lateral Guidance
Flag Monitor
1E Altitude Fine/Pitch Synchro Y 5A TAS Valid Discrete (28 V/Open)
1F Altitude Fine/Pitch Synchro Z 5B NC
1G NC 5C NC
1H Altitude Coarse/Roll Synchro X 5D NC
1J Altitude Coarse/Roll Synchro Y 5E SAT Valid Discrete (28 V/Open)
1K Altitude Coarse/Roll Synchro Z 5F NC
(WAAS RX Port 2)
(WAAS RX Port 2)
(WAAS RX Port 3)
(WAAS RX Port 3)
2E NC 6A NC
2F NC 6B NC
3A TAS Reference Voltage 6G NC
3B TAS Reference Return 6H NC
3C TAS DC Voltage 6J NC
3D NC 6K NC
3E SAT Reference Voltage 7A NC
3F SAT Reference Return 7B NC
3G SAT DC Voltage 7C NC
3H NC 7D NC
3J Altitude/Attitude Valid Discrete (28 V/Open) 7E NC
3K Altitude Valid Discrete Return 7F WAAS Monitor Return
Page 335
34-60-52 3 February 2011
9A NC 12K Ethernet RX 0 (L)
9B NC 13A NC
9C NC 13B NC
9D NC 13C NC
9E NC 13D NC
9F NC 13E NC
9G NC 13F NC
9H NC 13G NC
9J NC 13H NC
9K NC 13J NC
10G NC 14F NC
10H NC 14G NC
11A NC 14K NC
11B NC 15A NC
11C NC 15B NC
11D NC 15C NC
11E NC 15D NC
11F NC 15E NC
11G NC 15F NC
11H NC 15G NC
11J NC 15H NC
11K NC 15J NC
Page 336
34-60-52 3 February 2011

1A Waypoint Bearing X 4G ARINC RX Port 1 (A)
1B Waypoint Bearing Y 4H ARINC RX Port 1 (B)
1C Waypoint Bearing Z 4J ARINC TX Port 2A (A)
1E Instrument Reference (H) 5A ARINC 561 Sync (A)
1F Instrument Reference (L) 5B ARINC 561 Sync Return
1G Pitch Command (H) 5C ARINC 561 Data (H)
1H Pitch Command Return 5D ARINC 561 Data Return
1J Pitch Valid 5E ARINC 561 Clock (H)
1K Pitch Valid Return 5F ARINC 561 Clock Return
2A CDU 1 RX (H) 5G Digital Valid
2C CDU 2 RX (H) 5J To/From (H)
2D CDU 2 RX (L) 5K To/From Return
3A Desired Track X 6G Discrete In 1 (GND/Open)
3B Desired Track Y 6H Discrete In 2 (GND/Open)
3C Desired Track Z 6J Discrete In 3 (GND/Open)
3F Lateral Deviation (H) 7B Discrete Out 7 (GND/Open)
3G Lateral Deviation Return 7C NC
3H Navigation Valid Discrete Out (28 V) 7D NC
3J Nav Valid Flag 7E NC
3K Nav Valid Return 7F Vertical Deviation (H)
4A ARINC TX Port 0A (A) 7G Vertical Deviation Return
4B ARINC TX Port 0A (B) 7H Vertical Deviation Valid Discrete Out (28 V/Open)
4C WAAS TX Port 1B (A) ARINC 743A Data 7J Vertical Flag
4D WAAS TX Port 1B (B) ARINC 743A Data 7K Vertical Valid Return
Page 337
34-60-52 3 February 2011
9B Heading Y 13A Message Annunciator
9K NC 13J NC
10C ARINC TX Port 2C (H) 14B CSDB RX Port 3 (L)
10D ARINC TX Port 2C (L) 14C CSDB RX Port 1 (H)
Page 338
34-60-52 3 February 2011
2 28 VDC Input 9 NC
5 NC 12 NC
Page 339
34-60-52 3 February 2011
D. 5-Inch FPCDU Pin Identification Chart P/N 1018-X-XXX
J1 Connector
Pin Description
A Red
B Red Return
C Green
D Green Return
E Blue
F Blue return
G Sync
H Sync Return
J2 Connector
Pin Function
A CDU Receive Data (H)
B CDU Receive Data (L)
C CDU Receive Data Shield
D
E +28 VDC Keypad Lighting
F Ground Keypad Lighting
G +5 VDC or 5 VAC Keypad Lighting
CAUTION: Use 5 V or 28 V power for keypad lighting but not both.
H
J CDU Transmit Data (H)
K CDU Transmit Data (L)
L CDU Transmit Data Shield
M +28 VDC Power Input
N
P Power +28 VDC Return
R Power On Control Output
J3 Connector
Pin Description
A
B RS-422 Display Data TX (H)
C RS-422 Display Data TX (L)
D Ground
E RS-422 Display Data RX (H)
F RS-422 Display Data RX (L)
G Remote (Repeater) CDU when grounded
H Ground
Page 340
34-60-52 3 February 2011
E. 4-Inch FPCDU Pin Identification Chart
(1) P/N 1117-XX, 1117-1-X0X (No Video or Graphics Capability)
J1 Connector
Pin Function
D #2 CDU Strap
H
N Ground
NOTE: Do not connect Pin N when using the 4-inch FPCDU with the UNS-1Lw.
(2) 1117-2-X1X (With Video and Graphics Capability)

J1 Connector
Pin Function
D #2 CDU Strap
H
N Ground
NOTE: Do not connect Pin N when using the 4-inch FPCDU with the UNS-1Lw.
Page 341
34-60-52 3 February 2011
J2 Connector
Pin Description
A Red Input
B Red Return
C Green Input
D Green Return
E Blue Input
F Blue Return
G Sync Input
H Sync Return
J3 Connector
Pin Description
A
B RS-422 Display Data TX (H)
C RS-422 Display Data TX (L)
D Ground
E RS-422 Display Data RX (H)
F RS-422 Display Data RX (L)
G Remote (Repeater) CDU when grounded
H Ground
Page 342
34-60-52 3 February 2011
F. LP/LPV Monitor – Pin Assignment
(1) Connector – Top Plug
2A WAAS XChannel Monitor (H) (Guidance 4H WAAS Discrete In XChannel LOS Monitor
Bus 1
2B WAAS XChannel Monitor (L) (Guidance 4J WAAS XChannel Vertical Guidance Flag
Bus 1 Monitor
2C WAAS XChannel Monitor (H) (Guidance 4K WAAS XChannel Lateral Guidance Flag
Bus 1 Monitor
2D WAAS XChannel Monitor (L) (Guidance 7F WAAS Monitor Return
Bus 2
2G WAAS XChannel Lateral Deviation (H) 7G RS-232 WAAS Monitor Transmit
2H WAAS XChannel Lateral Deviation Return 7H RS-232 WAAS Monitor Receive
2J WAAS XChannel Vertical Deviation (H) 10A WAAS Differential Timemark 1A
2K WAAS XChannel Vertical Deviation Return 10B WAAS Differential Timemark 1B
4D WAAS Form Factor Select 10J ARINC 429 WAAS Transmit 0 (A)
4E WAAS Discrete Out XChannel Fail Out 10K ARINC 429 WAAS Transmit 0 (B)
4F WAAS SDI Select
(2) Connector – Middle Plug

4C WAAS Transmit 1B (H) – ARINC 743A Data 10F WAAS Receive 0 (H) – Offside FMS
4D WAAS Transmit 1B (L) – ARINC 743A Data 10G WAAS Receive 1 (H) – X-Channel Receive
8J WAAS Flight Data Recording – Lab Only 10H WAAS Receive 1 (L) – X-Channel Receive
8K WAAS Flight Data Recording – Lab Only 10J WAAS Transmit 1A (H) – ARINC 743A Data
10E WAAS Receive 0 (L) – Offside FMS 10K WAAS Transmit 1A (L) – ARINC 743A Data
(3) Connector – Bottom Plug

1 On Battery Annunciator Discrete Output 7 FMS Chassis Ground
2 +28 VDC Input 8 FMS DC Power Return
3 +28 VDC Battery Input 13 GPS Coax
4 Power Control
Page 343
34-60-52 3 February 2011
G. SSDTU – Pin Assignment
(1) Connector – J1
A EIA-485 (Side A) (FMS 485 A) J
B EIA-485 (Side B) (FMS 485 B) K
C Ethernet #1 RX (+) L Chassis Ground
D Ethernet #1 RX (-) M SSDTU Power 28 VDC
E Ethernet #1 Shield N EIA-232 RX
F Ethernet #1 TX (+) P SSDTU Ground
G Ethernet #1 TX (-) R EIA-232 TX
H
1 Ethernet #3 RX (+) 29 Ethernet #8 Shield
2 Ethernet #3 TX (+) 30 Ethernet #5 Shield
3 31 Ethernet #5 TX (+)
4 Ethernet #2 RX (-) 32
5 33
7 Ethernet #3 TX (-) 35 Ethernet #8 TX (+)
8 Ethernet #4 TX (-) 36 Ethernet #8 RX (+)
9 Ethernet #4 TX (+) 37
10 Ethernet #2 TX (-) 38 Ethernet #5 RX (+)
11 Ethernet #2 RX (+) 39 Ethernet #5 TX (-)
12 40 Ethernet #7 RX (+)
13 Ethernet #3 Shield 41 Ethernet #7 RX (-)
14 42 Ethernet #7 Shield
16 Ethernet #4 RX (+) 44 Ethernet #6 Shield
17 45
18 Ethernet #2 TX (+) 46 Ethernet #5 RX (-)
19 Ethernet #2 Shield 47 Ethernet #7 TX (+)
20 48 Ethernet #7 TX (-)
21 49
22 50 Ethernet #6 TX (+)
23 Ethernet #4 Shield 51 Ethernet #6 RX (+)
24 52
25 53
26 54 Ethernet #6 TX (-)
27 Ethernet #8 TX (-) 55 Ethernet #6 RX (-)
28 Ethernet #8 RX (-)
Page 344
34-60-52 3 February 2011
H. DTU-100 – Pin Assignment
A RS-422 (A) J Option Pin 1
B RS-422 (B) K Option Pin 2 (Not Used)
C Ethernet #0 RX (+) L Chassis Ground
D Ethernet #0 RX (-) M Power 28 VDC
E Ethernet #0 Shield N Aux Port RS-232 RX
F Ethernet #0 TX (+) P Power Return
G Ethernet #0 TX (-) R Aux Port RS-232 TX
H Option Pin 0
A Ethernet #1 RX (+) J Ethernet #3 RX (+)
B Ethernet #1 RX (-) K Ethernet #3 RX (-)
C Ethernet #1 TX (+) L Ethernet #3 TX (+)
D Ethernet #1 TX (-) M Not Used
E Ethernet #2 RX (+) N Ethernet #3 TX (-)
F Ethernet #2 RX (-) P Ethernet Shield
G Ethernet #2 TX (+) R Not Used
H Ethernet #2 TX (-)
Page 345
34-60-52 3 February 2011
4. UNS–1Lw Wiring
The following wiring diagrams represent the basic FMS wiring, including ARINC, discrete,
CSDB, analog and other inputs and outputs. The diagrams also include ancillary equipment
such as the FPCDU and Data Transfer Unit. For all other interfaces such as radar and radios,
refer to WAAS FMS Interface Manual, Report No. 34-60-53.
Wiring diagrams apply to all versions of the UNS-1Lw unless otherwise noted on the wiring
diagram. Reference to the Pin Identification Charts found later in this section will be helpful
in understanding the differences between FMS versions. There is also an FMS Part Number
Matrix in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual, which will further aid in
understanding FMS differences.
The information, drawings and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a
reference for engineering planning only. The drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein
do not represent any specific STC or Form 337 aircraft installation. It is the installer’s
responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. This manual and the
drawings contained herein may not be used as a substitute for an STC or Form 337 drawing
package.
Page 346
34-60-52 3 February 2011
A. UNS-1Lw All Configurations
(1) Power and Configuration Module
UNS-1Lw 3116-X2-111X
MP
GND 14G 24 AWG BROWN

CONFIGURATION
+5 VDC 14H 24 AWG RED MODULE
CONFIG P/N 31921
MODULE DATA CLK 14J 24 AWG YELLOW
3
DATA I/O 14K 24 AWG BLUE
MSG ANNUNCIATOR OUT 13A REMOTE MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR
FMS #2 SELECT 11J GND IF APPLICABLE

4
FMS #3 SELECT 11K GND IF APPLICABLE
BP
FMS ON BATTERY 1 6
ANNUNCIATOR OUT
28 VDC IN 2 16 5 28 VDC AIRCRAFT BUS
28 VDC BATTERY IN IN 3 16 5 EMERGENCY BATTERY IF INSTALLED 5
CHASSIS GND 7 16
POWER RETURN 8 16
WAAS GPS COAX 13
WAAS GPS ANTENNA

P/N 10708
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 A.W.G. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
2. DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 THE CONFIGURATION MODULE IS PROGRAMMED THROUGH THE NCU AND IS MOUNTED ON, AND BECOMES PART
OF THE NCU RACK. WIRES SHOWN ARE PART OF THE CONFIGURATION MODULE.
4 FMS SELECT PINS MP11J and MP11K ARE USED TO TELL THE NCU WHICH FMS NUMBER IT IS.
FMS #1 - NEITHER PIN CONNECTED
FMS #2 - PIN MP11J IS GROUNDED
FMS #3 - PIN MP11K IS GROUNDED
5 BATTERY INPUT (28 VDC) APPLIES ONLY IF EMERGENCY BATTERY IS USED.
6 SHOULD ONLY BE CONNECTED AND CONFIGURED IF EMERGENCY BATTERY IS USED.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL
AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 347
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Dual WAAS FMS – Analog Configuration (page 1 of 2)
FMS #1 FMS #2
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-1116 UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-1116
TP TP
4H WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
LOS MONITOR
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL 4H
LOS MONITOR
4A LP/LPV LP/LPV 4A WAAS LOS #1
WAAS LOS #1
ANNUNCIATOR ANNUNCIATOR
WAAS LOS #2 4B LNAV/VNAV LNAV/VNAV WAAS LOS #2
4B
2 2
LNAV LNAV
WAAS LOS #3 4C 4C WAAS LOS #3
4K WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
LATERAL VALID MONITOR
4J WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
VERTICAL VALID MONITOR
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL 4K 10J A
LATERAL VALID MONITOR WAAS ARINC 429
TX PORT #0
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL 4J 10K B
VERTICAL VALID MONITOR
MP
A 10J 10G A
WAAS ARINC 429 WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
TX PORT #0 INPUT RX PORT #1
B 10K 10H B
MP
A 10G
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
INPUT RX PORT #1 B 10H
LATERALDEVIATION VALID 3H HSI #1 HSI #2 3H LATERAL DEVIATION VALID

28V DISCRETE OUT 28V DISCRETE OUT
VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID 7H HSI #1 HSI #2 7H VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID

28 V DISCRETE OUT 28 V DISCRETE OUT
A
1 ARINC 429 RX PORT
B
A 4C GPS/WAAS GPS/WAAS 4C A
WAAS TX PORT #1B TO TAWS, WAAS TX PORT #1B
TO TAWS,
ARINC 743A DATA B 4D VISION-1, ETC. 4D ARINC 743A DATA
VISION-1, ETC. B
A
ARINC 429 RX PORT 1
B
APPROACH APPROACH
FMS APPROACH 13D 13D FMS APPROACH
ANNUNCIATOR DISCRETE ANNUNCIATOR DISCRETE
NOTES:
1. FOR WAAS INSTALLATIONS, FMS SYSTEMS MUST BE WIRED AS ILLUSTRATED.
2 MULTIPLE CONFIGURABLE PORTS. REFER TO THE WAAS FMS CONFIGURATION MANUAL FOR DETAILS.
3 USE DIODE P/N IN2222A.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED

BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 348
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) Dual WAAS FMS – Analog Configuration (page 2 of 2)
FMS #1
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-1116 FMS #2
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-1116
TP TP
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL 4E 4G WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL

FAIL DISCRETE OUT MONITOR DISCRETE IN
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL 4G 4E WAAS CROSSCHANNEL

MONITOR DISCRETE IN FAIL DISCRETE OUT
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL 10A 10A WAAS DIFFERENTIAL

TIMEMARK 1A 2 2 TIMEMARK 1A
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL 10B 10B WAAS DIFFERENTIAL
TIMEMARK 1B TIMEMARK 1B
2G H
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
2H L MONITOR #1
2J H
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
2K L MONITOR #2
H 2G
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
MONITOR #1 L 2H
H 2J
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
MONITOR #2 2K
L
MP
MP
H 3F 3F H
LATERAL DEVIATION HSI #1 HSI #2 LATERAL DEVIATION
L 3G 3G L
H 7F 7F H
VERTICAL DEVIATION HSI #1 HSI #2 VERTICAL DEVIATION
L 7G 7G L
A 10C 10F A WAAS OFFSIDE FMS

ARINC 429 PORT #2C INPUT RX PORT #0
B 10D 10E B
A 10F 10C A
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS ARINC 429 PORT #2C
INPUT RX PORT #0 B 10E 10D B
NOTES:
2 DIFFERENTIAL TIMEMARK IS USED IN SPECIAL MISSIONS APPLICATIONS WHERE SYNCHRONIZATION

WITH EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT IS DESIRED.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED
Page 349
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(4) Dual WAAS FMS – Digital Configuration (page 1 of 2)
FMS #1 FMS #2
TP TP
LOS MONITOR
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL 4H
LOS MONITOR
4A LP/LPV LP/LPV 4A WAAS LOS #1

WAAS LOS #1
WAAS LOS #2 4B LNAV/VNAV LNAV/VNAV WAAS LOS #2

4B
3 3
LNAV LNAV
WAAS LOS #3 4C 4C WAAS LOS #3
A 10J 10J A
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0 10K ARINC 429 TX PORT #0
B 10K B
MP
10G A
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
ARINC 429 RX PORT #1
10H B
A 10G
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
ARINC 429 RX PORT #1
B 10H
4 4
A 4A 4A A
PRIMARY NAV PRIMARY NAV
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0A ARINC 429 TX PORT #0A
DISPLAY DISPLAY
B 4B 4B B
A
ARINC 429 RX PORT
2
B
WAAS TX PORT #1B WAAS TX PORT #1B
TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
ARINC 743A DATA B 4D ARINC 743A DATA
VISION-1, ETC. VISION-1, ETC. 4D B
A
ARINC 429 RX PORT 2
B
APPROACH APPROACH
FMS APPROACH 13D 13D FMS APPROACH
ANNUNCIATOR DISCRETE ANNUNCIATOR DISCRETE
NOTES:
4 ARINC 429 TX PORT #0 MUST BE CONFIGURED AS HS429, LS429, IC-600-01, IC615-01, HS429 MOD 2, HS429 MOD 3, 571 LRN,
P4-01 IOC, P4-02 IOC, P4-03 IOC, P4-04 IOC, P4-05 IOC, LS429 MOD 1, UNS HS429-1, BAE-146, AN HS429-1, PL21-01, IMS-01, IMS-02A, IMS-02B.
Page 350
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(5) Dual WAAS FMS – Digital Configuration (page 2 of 2)
FMS #1 FMS #2
TP TP
A 2A 2A A
MONITOR 2B MONITOR
B 2B B
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL 4E 4G WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL

FAIL DISCRETE OUT MONITOR DISCRETE IN
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL 4G 4E WAAS CROSSCHANNEL

MONITOR DISCRETE IN FAIL DISCRETE OUT

MP MP
A 10C 10F A WAAS OFFSIDE FMS

ARINC 429 TX PORT #2C INPUT RX PORT #0
B 10D 10E B
A 10F 10C A
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS ARINC 429 TX PORT #2C
INPUT RX PORT #0 B 10E 10D B
3
12A A
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0B
12B B
3
A 12A
B 12B
NOTES:
2 DIFFERENTIAL TIMEMARK IS USED IN SPECIAL MISSIONS APPLICATIONS WHERE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT IS DESIRED.
Page 351
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(6) Dual WAAS FMS – EFI-890 Digital Configuration
FMS #1 FMS #2
TP TP
A 2A 2A A
MONITOR #1 2B MONITOR #1
B 2B B
WAAS LOS #1 4A 4H WAAS CROSSCHANNEL

LOS MONITOR
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL 4H 4A WAAS LOS #1
LOS MONITOR
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL 4E 4G WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
DISCRETE OUT MONITOR DISCRETE IN
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL 4G 4E WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
MONITOR DISCRETE IN DISCRETE OUT
A 10J 10J
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL A
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
OUTPUT TX PORT #0 B 10K
10K B OUTPUT TX PORT #0
MP
10G A
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
MP
INPUT RX PORT #1
10H B
A 10G
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
INPUT RX PORT #1 10H
B
4 4
A 4A 4A A
EFI-890R EFI-890R
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0A ARINC 429 TX PORT #0A
DISPLAY DISPLAY
B 4B 4B B
A
1 ARINC 429 RX PORT
B
WAAS TX PORT #1B WAAS TX PORT #1B
ARINC 743A DATA TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
B 4D VISION-1, ETC. 4D B ARINC 743A DATA
VISION-1, ETC.
A
ARINC 429 RX PORT 1
B
A 10C 10F A
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS
ARINC 429 TX PORT #2C INPUT RX PORT #0
B 10D 10E B
A 10F 10C A
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS
ARINC 429 TX PORT #2C
INPUT RX PORT #0
B 10E 10D B
12A A 4
12B B
4
A 12A
B 12B
NOTES:
Page 352
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(7) LP/LPV Monitor Power Installation
LP/LPV MONITOR
P/N 3116-52-1110
TP
5 WAAS FORM 4D
FACTOR SELECT
6 WAAS SDI SELECT #3 4F
BP
FMS ON BATTERY 1 4
ANNUNCIATOR OUT
28 VDC IN 2 16 5 28 VDC AIRCRAFT BUS
28 VDC BATTERY IN 3 16 5 EMERGENCY BATTERY IF INSTALLED 3
POWER CONTROL 4 16
CHASSIS GND 7 16
POWER RETURN 8 16
WAAS GPS COAX 13
WAAS GPS ANTENNA

P/N 10708
NOTES:

2. DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 BATTERY INPUT (28 VDC) APPLIES ONLY IF EMERGENCY BATTERY IS USED.
4 SHOULD ONLY BE CONNECTED AND CONFIGURED IF EMERGENCY BATTERY IS USED.
5 PIN TP 4D MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND TO ACTIVATE LP/LPV CAPABILITY.
6 SDI VALUE FOR THE ARINC 743A BUS

PIN TP 4D - GROUNDED, SDI = 1
PIN TP 4D - OPEN, SDI = 2
Page 353
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(8) Single WAAS FMS (Analog Configuration) to LP/LPV Monitor
FMS #1 LP/LPV MONITOR
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-1116 2 2
P/N 3116-52-1110
TP TP
4G 4E WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
FAIL DISCRETE OUT
MONITOR DISCRETE IN WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
4H
LOS MONITOR
LP/LPV
WAAS LOS #1 4A H
ANNUNCIATOR 2G WAAS LATERAL
L DEVIATION MONITOR
LNAV/VNAV 2H
WAAS LOS #2 4B
ANNUNCIATOR
5
2J H
LNAV WAAS VERTICAL
WAAS LOS #3 4C
ANNUNCIATOR 2K L DEVIATION MONITOR
NAVIGATION VALID MONITOR
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL 10A 4J WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
TIMEMARK 1A 4 VERTICAL VALID MONITOR
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL 10B 10J A WAAS TX PORT #0
TIMEMARK 1B CROSSCHANNEL
10K B OUTPUT
MP
WAAS TX PORT #0 A 10J 10G A

WAAS RX PORT #1
CROSSCHANNEL CROSSCHANNEL
OUTPUT B 10K 10H B
MP
H 3F
LATERAL DEVIATION HSI #1
L 3G
H 7F
VERTICAL DEVIATION HSI #1
L 7G
NAVIGATION VALID 3H HSI #1

28V DISCRETE OUT
VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID 7H HSI #1

28V DISCRETE OUT
A 10G
WAAS RX PORT #1
CROSSCHANNEL B 10H
A 10C 10F A
WAAS RX PORT #0
ARINC 429 TX PORT #2 OFFSIDE FMS
B 10D 10E B
WAAS TX PORT #1 WAAS TX PORT #1
TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
ARINC 743A DATA 4D ARINC 743A DATA
B VISION-1, ETC. VISION-1, ETC. 4D B
A
ARINC 429 RX PORT 3
B
NOTES:
2 THE PRECISION APPROACH SUBSYSTEM (PAS) SCN USED BY THE WAAS FMS MUST BE THE SAME AS THAT OF THE LP/LPV MONITOR,
OTHERWISE LPV APPROACH WILL NOT FUNCTION. THE PAS SCN IS INDICATED ON THE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE.
5 USE ISOLATION DIODE P/N IN2222A.
Page 354
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(9) Single WAAS FMS (Digital Configuration) to LP/LPV Monitor
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-1110 2 2
P/N 3116-52-1110
TP TP
LOS MONITOR
4A LP/LPV
WAAS LOS #1
ANNUNCIATOR
LNAV/VNAV
WAAS LOS #2 4B
ANNUNCIATOR
5
LNAV
WAAS LOS #3 4C
ANNUNCIATOR
FAIL DISCRETE OUT
MONITOR DISCRETE IN
2A A WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
MONITOR #1
2B B INPUT RX PORT #2
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL 10A
TIMEMARK 1A 4
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL 10B
10J A
TIMEMARK 1B WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
MP
A 10J 10G A
OUTPUT TX PORT #0 INPUT RX PORT #1
B 10K 10H B
MP
6 A 4A
GUIDANCE BUS #1 PRIMARY NAV
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0 B DISPLAY 1
4B
A 10G
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
A 10C 10F A
WAAS RX PORT #0
B 10D 10E B
TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
A
ARINC 429 RECEIVE PORT 3
B
NOTES:
6 ARINC 429 TX PORT #0 AND/OR #7 MUST BE CONFIGURED AS HS429, LS429, IC-600-01, IC615-01, HS429 MOD 2, HS429 MOD 3, 571 LRN,
Page 355
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(10) Single WAAS FMS (Analog/Digital Configuration) to LP/LPV Monitor (page 1 of 2)
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-1116 2 2
P/N 3116-52-1110
TP TP
LOS MONITOR
4A LP/LPV
WAAS LOS #1
ANNUNCIATOR
LNAV/VNAV
WAAS LOS #2 4B
ANNUNCIATOR
5
LNAV
WAAS LOS #3 4C
ANNUNCIATOR
FAIL DISCRETE OUT
MONITOR DISCRETE IN
2A A WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
MONITOR #1
2B B INPUT RX PORT #2
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL 10A
TIMEMARK 1A 4
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL 10B
10J A
TIMEMARK 1B WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
MP
A 10J 10G A
OUTPUT TX PORT #0 INPUT RX PORT #1
B 10K 10H B
MP
6 A 4A
GUIDANCE BUS #1 PRIMARY NAV
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0 B DISPLAY 1
4B
A 10G
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
A 10C 10F A
WAAS RX PORT #0
B 10D 10E B
TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
A
ARINC 429 RECEIVE PORT 3
B
NOTES:
6 ARINC 429 TX PORT MUST BE CONFIGURED AS HS429, LS429, IC-600-01, IC615-01, HS429 MOD 2, HS429 MOD 3, 571 LRN, P4-01 IOC, P4-02 IOC,
P4-03 IOC, P4-04 IOC, P4-05 IOC, LS429 MOD 1, UNS HS429-1, BAE-146, AN HS429-1, PL21-01, IMS-01, IMS-02A, IMS-02B.
Page 356
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(11) Single WAAS FMS (Analog/Digital Configuration) to LP/LPV (page 2 of 2)
FMS #1 LP/LPV MONITOR 2
2 P/N 3116-52-1110
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-1116
TP
2G H
WAAS LATERAL
L DEVIATION MONITOR
2H
2J H
WAAS VERTICAL
2K L DEVIATION MONITOR
MP
H 3F
LATERAL DEVIATION HSI #1
L 3G
H 7F
VERTICAL DEVIATION HSI #1
L 7G
NAVIGATION VALID MONITOR
NAVIGATION VALID 3H HSI #1
28V DISCRETE OUT
4J WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
HSI #1 VERTICAL VALID MONITOR
VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID 7H
28V DISCRETE OUT
NOTES:
Page 357
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(12) 4-Inch Flat Panel Display Control Unit (FPCDU) (without Video and Graphics)
(P/N 1117-XX and 1117-1-X0X)
4-INCH FPCDU
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X P/N 117-XX AND 1117-1-X0X
MP J1
H 2E A H
CDU DATA TX CDU DATA RX
RS422
L 2F B L
2 2 C
H 2A J H
CDU DATA RX CDU DATA TX
RS422
L 2B K L
L
BP
FMS POWER CONTROL 4 R POWER ON CONTROL OUT
+28 VDC CDU POWER 6 20 AWG M 28V POWER INPUT
POWER RETURN 11 20 AWG P POWER RETURN
3 28 VDC 20 E H
20 F L FPCDU LIGHTING 3
5 VDC
3 OR 20 G H
5 VAC
NOTES:
2 DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 USE EITHER 5 VDC OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 358
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(13) 4-Inch FPCDU with Video and Graphics Display (P/N 1117-2-X1X)
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X 4-INCH FPCDU P/N 1117-2-X1X
MP J1
H 2E A H
RS422 L
L 2F B
4 4
C
H 2A J H
CDU DATA RX CDU DATA TX
RS422
L 2B K L
L
BP
28 VDC CDU POWER 6 20 AWG M 28V POWER INPUT
2 28 VDC 20 E H
2
20 F L FPCDU LIGHTING
5 VDC
2 OR 20 G H
5 VAC
J2
A RED
B RED RETURN
C GREEN
2
D GREEN RETURN
VIDEO
E BLUE
F BLUE RETURN
G SYNC
H SYNC RETURN
UNILINK P/N 106X-XX-XXX

J3
H E H DISPLAY DATA RX
RS422 TX 3 RS422
L F L
H B H DISPLAY DATA TX
RS422 RX 3 RS422
L C L
NOTES:
3 REFER TO APPROPRIATE UNILINK INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
4 DO NOT DAISY CHAIN SHIELD GROUNDS.
Page 359
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(14) Dual 4-Inch FPCDUs (without Video and Graphics) (P/N 1117-XX and 1117-1-X0X)
#1 4-INCH FPCDU
P/N 1117-XX AND 1117-1-X0X
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X
BP J1
28 VDC CDU POWER 6 20 AWG M 28 VDC

POWER INPUT
POWER CONTROL 4 R POWER ON

CONTROL OUT
5
MP 2 2
H 2E A H
L 2F B L
H 2A J H
CDU DATA RX #1 CDU DATA TX
L 2B K L
20 E 28 VDC
AIRCRAFT BUS 3
20 F GROUND FPCDU
LIGHTING
20 G 5 VAC/VDC
#2 4-INCH FPCDU
J1 P/N 1117-XX AND 1117-1-X0X
2
A H
CDU DATA RX
B L
5 C
R POWER ON
CONTROL OUT
A 2C J H
B 2D K L
L
28 VDC 4
+28 VDC
AIRCRAFT 20 AWG M POWER INPUT
2
BUS
20 AWG P POWER RETURN
6 D #2 CDU STRAP
20 E 28 VDC
AIRCRAFT BUS 3
NOTES: 20 F GROUND FPCDU

LIGHTING
1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 20 G 5 VAC/VDC
2 DO NOT "DAISY CHAIN" SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 USE ONLY 5 V OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.
4 USE TRANSORB (P/N 1N6284A) FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION.
5 DIODE P/N IN4006 OR EQUIVALENT IS REQUIRED FOR DUAL FPCDU INSTALLATIONS.
6 P1-D MUST BE GROUNDED TO IDENTIFY IT AS #2 FPCDU.
CAUTION: FPCDU LIGHTING CIRCUITS MAY BE DAMAGED IF P2 PINS E, F, AND G ARE WIRED INCORRECTLY. THESE
PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR THE FPCDU ARE DIFFERENT FROM THOSE FOR OTHER UASC CONTROL DISPLAY UNITS.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED
Page 360
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(15) Dual 4-Inch FPCDUs with Video and Graphics (P/N 1117-2-X1X) – Sheet 1 of 2
4-INCH FPCDU
P/N 1117-2-XXX and 1117-X-X1X
J1 UNILINK
4
28 VDC J3 P/N 106X-XX-XXX
AIRCRAFT 20 AWG E H 3
BUS
20 AWG F L FPCDU H E
LIGHTING DISPLAY DATA RS422 TX
RX RS422
GRAPHICS
5 VAC/VDC 20 AWG G H L F
UNS-1Lw 5
P/N 3116-X2-111X
H B
BP DISPLAY DATA RS422 RX
TX RS422
L C
+28 VDC CDU POWER 6 20 AWG M 28 VDC POWER INPUT
D
CDU POWER RETURN 11 20 AWG P POWER RETURN
POWER CONTROL 4 R POWER ON CONTROL J2

OUTPUT RETURN
8
RED A
MP 2 2
RED RETURN B
A 2E A H
CDU DATA TX CDU DATA RX GREEN C
B 2F B L 6
GREEN RETURN D
VIDEO
C
BLUE E
7
A 2A J H
CDU DATA TX BLUE RETURN F
CDU DATA RX #1
B 2B K L
SYNC G
L
SYNC RETURN H
4-INCH FPCDU
P/N 1117-2-XXX and 1117-X-X1X
UNILINK
4
J1 J3 P/N 106X-XX-XXX
2
H H E
A DISPLAY DATA RS422 TX
CDU DATA RX
GRAPHICS
RX RS422
B L L F
5
C
8 H B
DISPLAY DATA RS422 RX
R POWER ON CONTROL TX RS422
OUTPUT RETURN L C
A 2C J H D
B 2D K L
L
J2
9
28 VDC
AIRCRAFT 20 AWG M 28 VDC POWER INPUT
2 RED A
BUS
RED RETURN B
D
GREEN C
28 VDC
AIRCRAFT 20 AWG E H 3 6
GREEN RETURN D
VIDEO
BUS
20 AWG F L FPCDU
LIGHTING BLUE E
7
5 VAC/VDC 20 AWG G H
BLUE RETURN F
SYNC G
SYNC RETURN H
Page 361
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(16) Dual 4-Inch FPCDUs with Video and Graphics – Sheet 2 of 2
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
4 GRAPHICS ONLY AVAILABLE ON FPCDU P/N 1117-X-X1X.
5 REFER TO APPROPRIATE UNILINK INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
6 VIDEO ONLY AVAILABLE ON FPCDU P/N 1117-2-XXX.
7 REFER TO APPROPRIATE VIDEO DEVICE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
8 DIODE P/N IN4006 IS REQUIRED FOR DUAL FPCDU INSTALLATIONS.
9 USE TRANSORB (P/N IN6284A) FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION.
CAUTION: FPCDU LIGHTING CIRCUITS MAY BE DAMAGED IF J1 PINS E,F, AND G ARE WIRED INCORRECTLY. THESE PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR THE FPCDU
ARE DIFFERENT FROM THOSE FOR OTHER UASC CONTROL DISPLAY UNITS.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 362
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(17) Single 5-Inch FPCDUs (P/N 1018-X-XXX)
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X 5-INCH FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XXX
MP J2
H 2E A H
CDU DATA TX
CDU DATA RX
RS422
L 2F B L
2 2 C
H 2A J H
CDU DATA RX
CDU DATA TX
RS422
L 2B K L
L
BP
+28 VDC CDU POWER 6 20 AWG M 28V POWER INPUT
3 28 VDC 20 E H
3
20 F L FPCDU LIGHTING
5 VDC
3 OR 20 G H
5 VAC
J1
A RED
B RED RETURN
C GREEN
3
D GREEN RETURN
VIDEO
E BLUE
F BLUE RETURN
G SYNC
H SYNC RETURN
UNILINK P/N 106X-XX-XXX
J3
E H DISPLAY DATA RX
H
RS422 TX 4 RS422
F L
L
H B H DISPLAY DATA TX
RS422 RX 4 RS422
L C L
NOTES:
2 DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
4 REFER TO APPROPRIATE UNILINK INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
Page 363
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(18) Dual 5-Inch FPCDUs (P/N 1018-X-XXX) – Sheet 1 of 2
#1 5-INCH FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XXX
J2 UNILINK
28 VDC J3 P/N 106X-XX-XXX
BUS
20 AWG F L FPCDU H E
LIGHTING DISPLAY DATA RS422 TX
RX RS422
GRAPHICS
5 VAC/VDC 20 AWG G H L F
4
UNS-1Lw P/N H B
3116-X2-111X DISPLAY DATA
BP RS422 RX
TX RS422
L C
+28 VDC CDU POWER 6 20 AWG M 28 VDC POWER INPUT
D
CDU POWER RETURN 11 20 AWG P POWER RETURN
POWER CONTROL 4 R POWER ON CONTROL J1

OUTPUT RETURN
6
RED A
MP 2 2
RED RETURN B
H 2E A H
CDU DATA TX CDU DATA RX GREEN C
L 2F B L
GREEN RETURN D
VIDEO
C 5
BLUE E
H 2A J H
CDU DATA TX BLUE RETURN F
CDU DATA RX #1
L 2B K L
SYNC G
L
SYNC RETURN H
#2 5-INCH FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XXX

UNILINK
J2 J3 P/N 106X-XX-XXX
H E
A H DISPLAY DATA
CDU DATA RX RS422 TX
RX RS422
GRAPHICS
B L L F
6 C
H B 4
DISPLAY DATA RS422 RX
R POWER ON CONTROL TX RS422
OUTPUT RETURN L C
H 2C J H D
L 2D K L
L REMOTE G
8
J1
7
28 VDC
AIRCRAFT 20 AWG M 28 VDC POWER INPUT
2 RED A
BUS
RED RETURN B
D
GREEN C
28 VDC
GREEN RETURN D
VIDEO
BUS
20 AWG F L FPCDU
LIGHTING 5
BLUE E
5 VAC/VDC 20 AWG G H
BLUE RETURN F
SYNC G
SYNC RETURN H
Page 364
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(19) Dual 5-Inch FPCDUs (P/N 1018-X-XXX) – Sheet 2 of 2
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
4 REFER TO APPROPRIATE UNILINK INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
5 REFER TO APPROPRIATE VIDEO DEVICE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
6 DIODE P/N IN4006 IS REQUIRED FOR DUAL FPCDU INSTALLATIONS.
7 USE TRANSORB (P/N IN6284A) FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION.
8 GROUND PIN J3 G TO IDENTIFY THE REMOTE (REPEATER) 5-INCH FPCDU.
CAUTION: FPCDU LIGHTING CIRCUITS MAY BE DAMAGED IF J2 PINS E,F, AND G ARE WIRED INCORRECTLY. THESE PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR THE FPCDU
ARE DIFFERENT FROM THOSE FOR OTHER UASC CONTROL DISPLAY UNITS.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
Page 365
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(20) DTU-100
DTU 100
(P/N 1406-01-X)
P1
H OPTION PIN 0
1
FMS #1 J OPTION PIN 1
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X
TP L CHASSIS GROUND
20
2
H 12F C H
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH0
L 12G D L
H 12J F H
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX G L TX CH0
L 12K
ETHERNET SHIELD 12H E SHIELD
20 P DC RETURN
28 VDC M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1
P2
A H
ETHERNET
RX CH1
B L
CONNECT TO
FMS #2
IF INSTALLED C H
ETHERNET
TX CH1
D L
E H ETHERNET
RX CH2
CONNECT TO F L
FMS #3
IF INSTALLED G H
ETHERNET
TX CH2
H L
J H
ETHERNET
RX CH3
K L
L H ETHERNET
TX CH3
N L
P ETHERNET SHIELD
NOTES:
1 INTERFACE PIN 0 PIN 1

RS422 OPEN OPEN
ETHERNET ONLY OPEN GND
RS422 & ETHERNET GND GND
2 ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 626 (10 BASE-T FOR AVIONICS USE) P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
Page 366
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(21) Portable DTU
FMS #1 PORTABLE DTU 100
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X BULKHEAD (P/N 1407-01-1)
TP CONNECTOR 1 P1
2
H 12F 9 9 C H
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX L RX CH0
L 12G 8 8 D
6 6 F H
H 12J
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX 7 G L TX CH0
L 12K 7
ETHERNET SHIELD 12H E SHIELD

5 5
1 1 A H
RS422 DATA
2 B L
2
H OPTION PIN 0
3
J OPTION PIN 1
12 12 P DC RETURN
20 11 11 L CHASSIS GROUND
28 VDC 20 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13 13
BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR
A A A H
ETHERNET
RX CH1
CONNECT TO B B B L
FMS #2
IF INSTALLED C C C H ETHERNET
TX CH1
D D D L
E E E H ETHERNET
RX CH2
CONNECT TO F F F L
FMS #3
IF INSTALLED G G G H ETHERNET
TX CH2
H H H L
J J J H
ETHERNET
RX CH3
K K K L
L L L H ETHERNET
TX CH3
N N N L
P P P ETHERNET SHIELD
NOTES:
1 THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THEPORTABLE DTU
2 ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 626 (10 BASE-T FOR AVIONICS USE)
P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT.
3 INTERFACE PIN 0 PIN 1

RS422 ONLY GND OPEN
ETHERNET ONLY OPEN GND
RS422 & ETHERNET GND GND
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
Page 367
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(22) SSDTU
SSDTU
(P/N 1408-00-X)
P1
A EIA-485 SIDE A
B EIA-485 SIDE B
FMS #1
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X
TP L CHASSIS GROUND
20
1 2
ETHERNET + 12F C +
ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- 12G D -
+ 12J F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- 12K G -
E SHIELD
ETHERNET SHIELD 12H
20 P DC RETURN
28 VDC M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1
P2
1 2
11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
P2 4 -
1 2
51 + 18 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH6 TX CH2
55 - 10 -
50 19 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH6 1 +
54 - ETHERNET
RX CH3
6 -
44 SHIELD
40 + 2 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH7 TX CH3
41 - 7 -
47 13 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH7 16 +
48 - ETHERNET
RX CH4
15 -
42 SHIELD
36 + 9 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH8 TX CH4
28 - 8 -
35 23 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH8 38 +
27 - ETHERNET
RX CH5
46 -
29 SHIELD
31 +
ETHERNET
TX CH5
39 -
30 SHIELD
NOTES:
1 USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT P/N 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT.
2 THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE
LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
Page 368
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(23) SSDTU Installation and DTU-100 Retrofit
SSDTU
(P/N 1408-00-X)
6 P1
A EIA-485 SIDE A
FMS #1 B EIA-485 SIDE B

UNS-1Lw P/N 31116-X2-111X
TP L CHASSIS GROUND
20
1 2
ETHERNET + 12F C +
ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- 12G D -
+ 12J F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- 12K G -
12H E SHIELD
ETHERNET SHIELD
20 P DC RETURN
28 VDC M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1
P2
1 2 5
11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
P2 4 -
1 2 5
51 + 18 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH6 TX CH2
55 - 10 -
50 19 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH6 1 +
54 - ETHERNET
RX CH3
6 -
44 SHIELD
40 + 2 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH7 TX CH3
41 - 7 -
47 13 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH7 16 +
48 - ETHERNET
RX CH4
15 -
42 SHIELD
36 + 9 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH8 TX CH4
28 - 8 -
35 23 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH8 38 +
27 - ETHERNET
RX CH5
46 -
29 SHIELD
31 +
ETHERNET
TX CH5
39 -
30 SHIELD
NOTES:
2 THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE LESS THAN
0.5 INCHES LONG.
3 CONNECT ETHERNET SHIELD TO BACKSHELL OF P3.
REPLACING A DTU-100 WITH AN SSDTU:

4. ETHERNET PORTS ON THE DTU-100 ARE NUMBERED ZERO(0) THRU THREE (3). PORTS ON THE SSDTU ARE NUMBERED ONE (1) THRU EIGHT (8).
5 TO HAVE ETHERNET PORTS TWO (2) THRU EIGHT (8) AVAILABLE WHEN REPLACING A DTU-100 WITH AN SSDTU, ADDITIONAL
WIRING MUST BE ADDED FOR PORTS FOUR (4) THRU EIGHT(8) AND THE DTU-100 P2 CONNECTOR MUST BE REPLACED WITH
CONNECTOR PART NUMBER 83000255 WHICH IS INCLUDED IN INSTALLATION KIT K12079-1.
6 WHEN REPLACING A DTU-100 WITH AN SSDTU, NO CHANGES ARE REQUIRED TO THE PLUG P1 OR WIRING.
Page 369
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(24) Portable SSDTU
FMS #1
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X J1 BULKHEAD HARNESS PORTABLE SSDTU
TP CONNECTOR P/N 81304072 P1 (P/N 1409-00-2)
2 3
+ 12F 9 9 C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- 12G 8 8 D -
+ 12J 6 6 F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- 12K 7 7 G -
ETHERNET SHIELD 12H 5 5 E SHIELD
1 1 A A
EIA-485 DATA
2 2 B B
12 12 P DC RETURN
28 VDC 20 13 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13
J2 BULKHEAD HARNESS
CONNECTOR P/N 81140821 P2
11 11 11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
2 4 4 4 -
J2 BULKHEAD
2 3 CONNECTOR P2
18 18 18 +
3 ETHERNET
51 51 TX CH2
51 + 10 10 10 -
ETHERNET
RX CH6
55 55 55 - 19 19 19 SHIELD #2
50 50 50 + 1 1 1 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX CH6 RX CH3
54 54 54 - 6 6 6 -
44 44 44 SHIELD #6 2 2 2 +
ETHERNET
40 40 TX CH3
40 + 7 7 7 -
ETHERNET
RX CH7
41 41 41 - 13 13 13 SHIELD #3
47 47 47 + 16 16 16 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX CH7 RX CH4
48 48 48 - 15 15 15 -
42 42 42 SHIELD #7 9 9 9 +
ETHERNET
36 36 36 TX CH4
+ 8 8 8 -
ETHERNET
RX CH8
28 28 28 - 23 23 23 SHIELD #4
35 35 35 + 38 38 38 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX CH8 RX CH5
27 27 27 - 46 46 46 -
29 29 29 SHIELD #8 31 31 31 +
ETHERNET
TX CH5
39 39 39 -
30 30 30 SHIELD #5
NOTES:
1. THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THE PORTABLE DTU.
Page 370
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(25) Portable SSDTU (Portable DTU-100 Retrofit)
FMS #1
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X J1 BULKHEAD HARNESS PORTABLE SSDTU
TP CONNECTOR 4 P1 (P/N 1409-00-2)
P/N 81304072
2 3
+ 12F 9 9 C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- 12G 8 8 D -
+ 12J 6 6 F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- 12K 7 7 G -
ETHERNET SHIELD 12H 5 5 E SHIELD
1 1 A A
EIA-485 DATA
2 2 B B
12 12 P DC RETURN
28 VDC 20 13 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13
J2 BULKHEAD HARNESS
CONNECTOR 4 P/N 81140811 P2
A A 11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
B B 4 -
C C 18 +
ETHERNET
TX CH2
D D 10 -
19 SHIELD #2
E E 1 +
ETHERNET
RX CH3
F F 6 -
G G 2 +
ETHERNET
TX CH3
H H 7 -
13 SHIELD #3
J J 16 +
ETHERNET
RX CH4
K K 15 -
L L 9 +
ETHERNET
TX CH4
N N 8 -
P P 23 SHIELD #4
NOTES:
1. THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE SSDTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THE PORTABLE SSDTU.
4 THE PORTABLE SSDTU MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF THE PORTABLE DTU BY USING WIRING HARNESS P/N 81304072 TO
CONNECT J1 AND P/N 81140811 TO CONNECT J2 OF THE SSDTU TO BULKHEAD CONNECTORS USED FOR THE PORTABLE
DTU. USING THE SSDTU IN THIS CONFIGURATION LIMITS THE ETHERNET PORTS TO #1-4, PORTS #5-7 ARE NOT AVAILABLE
IN THIS CONFIGURATION.
Page 371
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(26) Fuel Flow and Roll Steering
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X
MP
FD/AP COMPUTER
2 ROLL STEERING VALID 11C
H 11A
ROLL STRG OUTPUT
L 11B
H 11D 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS

26 VAC
1
A/P REF L 11E
H 15A
#1 #1 FUEL FLOW
L 15B
H 15C
#2 #2 FUEL FLOW
L 15D
FUEL
FLOW
INPUTS
H 15E
#3 #3 FUEL FLOW
L 15F
H 15G
#4 #4 FUEL FLOW
L 15H
NOTES:
1 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE MUST BE IN PHASE WITH THE FD/AP COMPUTER.
2 IN SOME INSTALLATIONS, THE ROLL STEERING COMMAND AND VALID CIRCUITS MAY BE CONNECTED THROUGH A RELAY
TO THE FD/AP COMPUTER. THE RELAY COMPLETES THE CIRCUITS WHILE FMS NAV IS
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY
OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 372
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(27) Heading and Radio Tune
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X
MP
COMPASS SYSTEM
X 9A
Y 9B
SYNCHRO HEADING
INPUT Z 9C
HEADING VALID 9F
1 28 VDC INPUT
SYNCHRO HEADING INPUT 9G

SELECT (MAG/TRUE)
H 9D 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS

ANALOG HEADING
5
REFERENCE L 9E
H 2J
CSDB TX PORT #1
L 2K
2
H 2G
CSDB RX PORT #2
L 2H
H 10A
CSDB TX PORT #2
L 10B
H 14A 3 4
CSDB RX PORT #3 CSDB TYPE RADIOS DME/VOR
L 14B
H 14C
CSDB RX PORT #1
L 14D
H 14E
CSDB RX PORT #4
L 14F
NOTES:
1 OPEN = MAGNETIC; +28 VDC = TRUE.
2 REFER TO RTU INSTALLATION AND SPECIFICATION MANUAL, REPORT NO. 2222 FOR WIRING INFORMATION.
3 IF RTU P/N 1055 OR 1056 SERIES UNITS ARE INSTALLED, REFER TO UASC REPORT NO. 2221 RADIO REFERENCE SENSORS
CONTAINED IN UASCS SENSOR MANUAL.
4 RS-422 NRZ DATA FORMAT FOR ALL CSDB LISTINGS.
5 ANALOG HEADING REFERENCE MUST BE IN PHASE WITH THE COMPASS SYSTEM.

Page 373
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(28) Analog Configuration (P/N 3116-X2-1116)
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-1116
MP
FD SWITCH UNIT HSI
H 3F
LATERAL DEV (XTK)
L 3G
NAV VALID 3H
NAV VALID FLAG 3J
NAV VALID RETURN 3K
H 7F
VERTICAL DEV
(ANALOG DC)
L 7G
VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID 7H
VERTICAL VALID FLAG 7J
VERTICAL VALID RETURN 7K
28 VDC
FMS PWR VHF NAV
FD NAV
SELECT FMS NAV
BEARING X / SIN 1A
SYNCHRO
=XYZ Y / COS 1B
RESOLVER
=SIN COS COM Z / RET 1C
DESIRED TRACK X / SIN 3A

SYNCHRO
=XYZ Y / COS 3B
RESOLVER Z / RTN 3C
=SIN COS COM
H 5C
DATA
OUT
L 5D
H 5A
ARINC 561
OUTPUT SYN
L 5B
H 5E
CLK
L 5F
ARINC 561 DATA VALID 5G
TO/FROM 5J
TO/FROM RETURN 5K
H 1E 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT
26 VAC INSTRUMENT
REFERENCE
L 1F
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER
THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 374
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(29) ARINC Input Ports
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X
TP
A 10C
ARINC 429 RX
1 PORT #0A
B 10D
MP
ARINC 429 RX A 4G
PORT #1
B 4H
A 12C
ARINC 429 RX
PORT #2 B 12D
1) POSITION SENSORS
2) RADAR
A 12G 3) ARINC DME/VOR
ARINC 429 RX
4) AFIS
PORT #3
B 12H 5) TAWS
6) ADC
7) UNILINK
A 8A
ARINC 429 RX 1) IRS3
PORT #4 B 2) AHRS1
8B
A 8C
ARINC 429 RX 1) IRS2
PORT #5 2) AHRS2
B 8D
ARINC 429 RX A 8E
PORT #6 1) IRS1
B 8F
ARINC 429 RX A 8G 1) XFILL, IF XSIDE FMS IS INSTALLED

PORT #7 2) AFIS
B 8H 3) POSITION SENSOR
NOTES:
1 THE GPS/WAAS OUTPUT IS INTERNALLY CONNECTED TO ARINC INPUT PORT 0 AND THE FOLLOWING RESTRICTIONS APPLY:
- INPUT PORT 0 MUST BE CONFIGURED AS DESCRIBED IN THE CONFIGURATION MANUAL.
- NO OTHER EXTERNAL DATA MAY BE INPUT TO PORT #0.

Page 375
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(30) ARINC Output Ports
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X
TP
A 10E
ARINC 429 TX
PORT #4
B 10F
MP
A 4A
ARINC 429 TX
PORT #0A B 4B
A 1) POSITION SENSORS
12A 2) RADAR
ARINC 429 TX
PORT #0B 3) ARINC DME/VOR
B 12B 4) AFIS
5) TAWS
6) ADC
A 4E 7) UNILINK
ARINC 429 TX
1 PORT #1 B 4F
A 4J
ARINC 429 TX
1
PORT #2A 4K
B
A 12J
ARINC 429 TX
PORT #2B 12K
B
A 12E
ARINC 429 TX XSIDE FMS IS INSTALLED
PORT #3 12F
B
NOTES:
1 THE GPS/WAAS OUTPUT IS INTERNALLY CONNECTED TO ARINC OUTPUT PORT #2 AND THE FOLLOWING RESTRICTIONS APPLY:
- OUTPUT PORT #2 MUST BE CONFIGURED AS DESCRIBED IN THE CONFIGURATION MANUAL.
Page 376
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(31) Discrete Inputs
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X
MP
DISCRETE #1 IN 6G
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #2 IN 6H
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #3 IN 6J
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #4 IN 15J
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #5 IN
(GND/OPEN) 11H
DISCRETE #6 IN 15K
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #7 IN
6A
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #8 IN 6E
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #9 IN 6F
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #10 IN 11G

(28 VDC/OPEN)
DISCRETE #11 IN 6B
(GND/OPEN)
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE AND VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 377
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(32) Discrete Outputs
UNS-1Lw P/N 3116-X2-111X
MP
DISCRETE #1 OUT 6K
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #2 OUT 13B

(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #3 OUT 13C

(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #4 OUT 13D

(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #5 OUT
(GND/OPEN) 13E
DISCRETE #6 OUT 7A
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #7 OUT
(GND/OPEN) 7B
DISCRETE #8 OUT 6C
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE #9 OUT 13F

(28 VDC/OPEN)
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE AND VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 378
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(33) ASCB Version A (SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and later)
UNS-1Lw 3116-X0-1113
TP
ASCB DISCRETE IN 1 9A
ASCB DISCRETE IN 2 9B
ASCB DISCRETE IN 3 9D
ASCB DISCRETE IN 4 9F
ASCB DISCRETE IN 8 9C
MP
+ 1A
ASCB A DATA
- 1B
+ 1C
ASCB A CLOCK
- 3C
+ 5G
ASCB B DATA
- 5K
+ 1G
ASCB B CLOCK
- 1H
ASCB DISCRETE IN 5 3A
ASCB DISCRETE IN 6 3B
ASCB DISCRETE IN 7 5J
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 1 5E

28 VDC/OPEN
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 2 5A
28 VDC/OPEN (SPARE)
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 3 5C

GND/OPEN (SPARE)
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 4 1J
GND/OPEN (SPARE)

Page 379
34-60-52 3 February 2011
System Data Installation

System data installation and system configuration instructions are contained in the WAAS
FMS Configuration Manual.
Applicable SCN Configuration Manual Report Number
SCN 1000.X/1100.X 34-61-01
Page 401
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Maintenance, Checkout and Troubleshooting

1. Maintenance
A. Flight Management System (FMS), P/N 3116-X2-111X
Do not schedule maintenance for the FMS. No maintenance is needed unless a problem is
found.
B. Configuration Module, P/N 31921
Do not schedule maintenance for the Configuration Module. No maintenance is needed
unless a problem is found.
C. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100), P/N 1406-XX or 1407-XX
Do not schedule maintenance for the DTU-100. No maintenance is needed unless a problem
is found.
D. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/N 1408-00-X or 1409-00-2
Do not schedule maintenance for the SSDTU. No maintenance is needed unless a problem is
found.
E. Control Display Unit (5-Inch FPCDU), P/N 1018-X-XXX
Do not schedule maintenance for the CDU. No maintenance is needed unless a problem is
found.
F. Control Display Unit (4-Inch FPCDU), P/N 1117-XX or 1117-X-XXX
Do not schedule maintenance for the CDU. No maintenance is needed unless a problem is
found.
G. LP/LPV Monitor, P/N 3116-52-1110
Do not schedule maintenance for the LP/LPV Monitor. No maintenance is needed unless a
problem is found.
Page 501
34-60-52 3 February 2011
2. Installation Checkout
Use these procedures as necessary to approve the Universal Avionics WAAS/SBAS FMSs or
WAAS/SBAS FMS and LP/LPV Monitor installations. Interfaces not included in the aircraft
may be omitted.
A. Ground Test Plan
UNS-1( )w NCU System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
FMC SCN:
PAS SCN:
Serial Number:
GPS Antenna System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
Serial Number:
Config Module System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
Serial Number:
Page 502
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(1) Pre-Test Requirements
Test: 1
Phase of Flight: Ground Test
Operation: Pre -Test Requirements
Function: Required equipment is installed and operational
Remarks:
Test Condition: Verify that all of the required equipment and compatible SCNs are installed and
operational. (DO-187§ 3.4.1.1)
Outcome: 1. FMSs (#1 and #2)
2. DTU
3. Pilot displays
4. Copilot displays
5. TAWS
6. Flight Director / Autopilot
7. Radio Altimeter
8. Air Data Computer(s)
9. VHF com systems
10. VHF NAV Receivers (#1 and #2).
11. ASU/EFB if installed
12. ACARS if installed
13. Attitude and heading sources
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 503
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Installation
Test: 2
Operation: Installation
Function: General Operation
Remarks:
Test Condition: General Requirements (DO-229D §2.1.1.1), (DO-187§ 3.1.3)
Outcome: 1. Airworthiness (DO-229D §2.1.1.1.1)
2. Design and manufacture of the airborne equipment shall support
installation so as not to impair the airworthiness of the aircraft.
3. General Performance (DO-229D §2.1.1.1.2 ), (DO-187§ 3.4.1.2) The
equipment shall perform its intended function.
4. Equipment Interfaces (DO-229D §2.1.1.1.4 ),(AC-20-138A §12.f.(2)), (DO-
187§ 3.4.1.3)
5. The interfaces with other aircraft equipment shall be designed such that,
properly installed with other adequately designed equipment, normal or
abnormal GPS/SBAS equipment operation shall not adversely affect the
operation of other equipment. Nor shall normal or abnormal operation of
other equipment adversely affect the GPS/SBAS equipment except as
specifically allowed.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 504
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) Initialization and LPV Annunciation Test
Test: 3
Operation: Initialization & LPV Annunciation Test
Function: FMS Power On Self Test
Remarks:
Test Condition: Power up and initialize the FMSs.
Outcome: 1. Power up and initialize the FMSs.
2. Verify that each FMS has the current database.
3. On DATA Page 3/4 Verify that the FMS positions on each unit correspond
to ramp position
4. Verify all data on DATA page 2/4 is accurate and reflects the configuration
and sensors installed.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 505
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(4) Configuration
Test: 4
Operation: Configuration
Function: Confirm Configuration
Remarks:
Test Condition: Configuration (AC-20-138A §18.a)
Antenna Offset (DO-229D §2.2.4.3.3)
Outcome: 1. Verify that the configurations comply with the configuration data for the
syatem.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 506
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(5) DTU
Test: 5
Operation: DTU
Function: DATABASE
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Load a navigation database into both FMSs from the DATA DISK MENU
page.
Outcome: 1. Verify proper operation and database loading. (DO-229D §2.2.1.5.1) &
(DO-229D §2.2.1.5.2)
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 507
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(6) Air Data Computer
Test: 6
Operation: Air Data Computer
Function: Sensors
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. On DATA page 2/4 verify that the ADC is deselected on each FMS.
2. Pull the ADC #1 and ADC #2 CBs.
3. Reset ADC #1 and ADC #2 CBs.
Outcome: 2. Verify that the ADC INPUT FAIL message appears on each FMS.
3. Verify that the values are returned to normal.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 508
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(7) SBAS GPS Sensor Evaluation
Test: 7
Operation: SBAS GPS Sensor Evaluation
Function: Sensors
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Inspect Data page 2/4 on FMS.
2. On #1 FMS deselect WAAS #1.
3. Reselect WAAS.
4. Repeat above steps for #2 FMS and by deselecting WAAS #2.
Outcome: 1. On FMS, verify onside WAAS displays RNP/ANP factor.
2. On FMS, verify offside WAAS is in SBAS mode.
3. On offside FMS, verify WAAS displays RNP/ANP.
4. After reselection verify onside WAAS returns to normal.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 509
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(8) DME/VOR Tuning and Inhibiting
Test: 8
Operation: DME/VOR tuning and navaid inhibiting.(If applicable)
Function: Sensors
Remarks: Normally on the ground VOR and DME are automatically deselected. (Test set may be
required)
Test Condition: 1. Access the DME page via DATA page 2/4 on each FMS.
2. Select the DME sensor.
3. Access the NVD INHBT page. Input a DME station to inhibit.
4. Access the VOR page via DATA page 2/4 on both FMSs.
5. Tune the VHF NAV to a local VOR, and select the VOR sensor.
6. After test deselect both the DME and VOR sensors.
Outcome: 1. Verify that the page indicates the DME is deselected.
2. Verify reception of local DMEs.
3. Verify proper operation of the navaid inhibit function.
4. Verify that the page indicates the VOR is deselected.
5. Verify proper radial display.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 510
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(9) Power Loss Test
Test: 9
Operation: Power Loss Test
Function: FMS
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Locate and Pull each FMS circuit breaker.
2. Reset the circuit breakers within 5 seconds.
3. Pull each FMS circuit breaker. Reset the breakers after 20 seconds.
Outcome: 1. Verify that the FMS loses power and that loss of navigation is output. (DO-
229D §2.1.1.13.2),(AC-20-138A §18.e), (DO-187§ 3.4.1.4)
2. Verify that the FMS returns to the page displayed prior to pulling the circuit
breaker. Verify that SYNC is not lost. (If Configured for SYNC)
3. Verify that each FMS requires pressing the ON key to power up. Verify that
the POWER FAIL page appears.
4. Verify that the FMS which was powered down properly Syncs to the other
FMS.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 511
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(10) ACARS
Test: 10
Operation: ACARS (if installed)
Function: ACARS
Remarks: NOTE: This test point can be deferred to flight if unable to accomplish on the
ground.
Test Condition: 1. Upload text weather
2. Upload graphics weather (if available).
3. Send text messaging.
Outcome: Verify that each FMS can send and receive ACARS messages over all
networks configured.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 512
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(11) TAWS Control
Test: 11
Operation: TAWS Control (If configured)
Function: TAWS
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. On the DATA TAWS MAINT page engage the test modes.
4. Add several altitudes to waypoints in the lateral flight plan.
Outcome: 1. Verify that the MAINT functions operate normally.
2. Verify line select keys for test functions operate normally.
3. Verify that the TAWS display on the specified display is as expected.
4. Verify the TAWS profile view accurately depicts intermediate crossing
waypoints.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 513
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(12) Overall Evaluation of Pilot Interface
Test: 12
Operation: Overall evaluation of Pilot Interface.
Function: General Operation
Remarks:
Test Condition: Verify the following items:
Outcome: Annunciators (DO-229D §2.2.1.1.5.1)
1. Brightness is controllable.
2. Capability to test external Annunciators.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 514
34-60-52 3 February 2011
B. Flight Test Plan
The following should be considered when the Universal Avionics WAAS/SBAS FMS with
LPV approach capability enabled is interfaced with the Flight Guidance System.
In a new WAAS/SBAS FMS installation or when upgrading an existing FMS to a
WAAS/SBAS FMS with LPV approach capability enabled, it is the applicant’s responsibility
to evaluate the equipment when interfaced with a Flight Guidance System (FGS) through the
use of properly authorized Systems and Equipment, Flight Test, or Flight Analyst DER. The
objective is to ensure that the WAAS/SBAS FMS equipment interface is compatible with the
aircraft.
The Systems and Equipment, Flight Test, or Flight Analyst DER should evaluate the effects
when the FGS de-gains during an LPV approach. Some FGS use a radio altimeter input, and
will use glide slope capture and passage over the middle marker beacon to reduce the gain if
the radio altimeter is failed. Certain FGS depend upon such inputs to enable the "glideslope
extension" function to reduce "porpoising" or aerodynamic instability when coupled to a
glideslope signal during the final approach phase. WAAS/SBAS FMS equipment designs do
not provide such signals
UNS-1( )w NCU System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
FMC SCN:
PAS SCN:
Serial Number:
GPS Antenna System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
Serial Number:
Config Module System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
Serial Number:
Page 515
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(1) Pre-Flight – Required Documents On-Board
Test: 1
Phase of Flight: Before Engine Start
Operation: Pre-Flight
Function: Required Documents on Board
Remarks:
Test Condition: Check for proper documentation aboard aircraft.
Outcome: 1. Registration Airworthiness Certificate
2. Current Weight and Balance
3. Required Flight Manuals and Supplements
4. Aircraft Flight Log
5. Aircraft Open Discrepancies
6. Aircraft Status Checked R&D/Show Compliance/Market Survey
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 516
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Pre-Flight - Briefing
Test: 2
Operation: Pre-Flight
Function: Briefing
Remarks:
Test Condition: Brief the flight test
Outcome: 1. Review Flight Test Requirements
2. Review any limitations
3. Brief the purpose of the test
4. Brief the intended route of flight
5. Brief TFRs
6. Brief weather
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 517
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) Pre-Test Requirements – Required Equipment is Installed and Operational
Test: 3
Operation: Pre-Test Requirements
Function: Required equipment is installed and operational
Remarks:
Test Condition: Verify that all of the required equipment and compatible SCNs are installed and
operational. (DO-187§ 3.3.2)
Outcome: 1. FMSs (#1 and #2)
2. DTU
3. Pilot displays
4. Copilot displays
5. TAWS
6. Flight Director / Autopilot
7. Radio Altimeter
8. Air Data Computer(s)
9. VHF com systems
10. VHF NAV Receivers (#1 and #2).
11. ASU/EFB if installed
12. ACARS if installed
13. Attitude and heading sources
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 518
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(4) All – Flight Guidance Interface
Test: 4
Phase of Flight: Before Engine Start/Duration of flight
Operation: All
Function: Flight Guidance Interface
Remarks:
Test Condition: During the course of the flight test observe and verify that the interface between
the FMS and flight guidance does not alter the cockpit design philosophy or
intended function of an FGS mode, switch or annunciation. (AC 20-138A
§18.g),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4))
Outcome: 1. Verify that the FMS or the FGS keeps the aircraft within the approved
operational envelope. (AC 20-138A §18.g.(2))
2. Verify that a positive, continuous and unambiguous indication is provided of
the FGS modes actually in operation. (AC 20-138A §18.g.(3))
3. Verify that there is consistent annunciation of engage/disengage timing of
the FGS. (AC 20-138A §18.g.(4))
4. Verify that those aircraft that have incorporated bank angle limiting,
consideration should be given to whether the GNSS equipment is defining
a path that cannot be flown. (AC 20-138A §18.g.(7))
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 519
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(5) All – Crew Workload
Test: 5
Phase of Flight: Before Engine Start/During flight
Operation: All
Function: Crew Workload
Remarks:
Test Condition: An analysis of crew workload when operating the GNSS equipment in
association with other piloting requirements should be conducted during all
phases of flight, including those non-normal procedures that can be evaluated
in flight. (AC 20-138A §23.b.(8))
Outcome: Before Engine Start/During flight
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 520
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(6) Initialization and LPV Annunciation Test – FMS Power On Self-Test
Test: 6
Phase of Flight: After Engine Start
Operation: Initialization & LPV Annunciation Test
Function: FMS Power On Self Test
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Power up and initialize both FMSs.
2. Enter information on Fuel pages as needed on only one FMS.
3. Enter a flight plan with the a SID and make the appropriate entries on the
FPL SUMMARY page.
Outcome: 1. Power up and initialize both FMSs.
2. Verify that both FMSs pass all items on the self test page.
3. Verify position matches the aircraft . Verify that the time and date are
correct.
4. Accept the position on FMS #1 and FMS #2 and verify that the reverse
video “I” disappears on both FMSs for SYNC operation.
5. Verify that FMS #1 and #2 have the current database.
6. Verify all data on DATA page 2/4 is accurate and reflects the configuration
and sensors installed.
7. Verify data on Fuel Pages 1 through 5 are correct. Verify that all fuel data
SYNC across.
8. Verify all data on FMS #2.
9. On Sensor page, verify WAAS1 Selected, WAAS2 “SBAS”"
10. Verify FMS #2 data was transferred from FMS #1. either by SYNC or XFILL
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 521
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(7) Fly the Assigned SID – Take-off and SID
Test: 7
Phase of Flight: Departure
Operation: Fly the assigned SID
Function: TAKE-OFF & SID
Remarks: Approach scaling on first leg of Missed Approach and on the first leg of a SID
Test Condition: Take off and fly the legs of the SID. (DO-187§ 3.4.2.3.c), (DO-187§ 3.4.2.3.b)
Outcome: 1. Verify proper leg sequencing (DO-229D §2.2.1.2.4) with turn anticipation.
(AC 20-138A §23.b.(2)),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4).(ii))
2. After takeoff verify ADC, DME, and VOR selected
3. Verify the data on NAV page 1/3.
4. Verify proper navigation of this procedure.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 522
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(8) Fly the Assigned SID – Take-off and SID
Test: 8
Phase of Flight: Departure
Operation: Fly the assigned SID
Function: TAKE-OFF & SID
Remarks: Approach scaling on first leg of Missed Approach and on the first leg of a SID
Test Condition: Take off and fly the legs of the SID. (DO-187§ 3.4.2.3.c), (DO-187§ 3.4.2.3.b)
Outcome: 1. Verify proper leg sequencing (DO-229D §2.2.1.2.4) with turn anticipation.
(AC 20-138A §23.b.(2)),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4).(ii))
2. After takeoff verify ADC, DME, and VOR selected
4. Verify proper navigation of this procedure.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 523
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(9) Antenna Placement – Antenna Shadowing
Test: 9
Phase of Flight: Enroute
Operation: Antenna placement
Function: Airframe Shadowing
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Perform 30 degree bank turns both left and right.
2. On the GPS STATUS page monitor the satellite health.
Outcome: 1. Verify the airborne system receives differential SBAS correction.
2. INTEG should remain in SBAS throughout the entire maneuver. (AC 20-
138A §23.a.)
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 524
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(10) Manual Leg Changes – NAV
Test: 10
Operation: Manual Leg Changes
Function: NAV
Remarks:
Test Condition: From NAV page 1/3, perform a manual leg change.
Outcome: 1. Verify proper interception of new active NAV leg
3. Verify proper indications on EFIS consistent with NAV page 1/3.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 525
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(11) SXTK
Test: 11
Operation: SXTK
Function: SXTK
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Perform a SXTK.
3. Cancel SXTK
Outcome: 1. Verify that SXTK mode is allowed.
2. Verify that it is correct and reasonable.
3. Verify that up to a 45 degree intercept is flown to the new offset course.
4. Verify that non-numeric cross-track deviation is readable and discernable.
(AC 20-138A §13.b.(5))
5. Verify that SXTK cancels and the aircraft returns to the original course via
up to a 45 degree intercept.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 526
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(12) VTO and TOD Calculations – VNAV
Test: 12
Operation: VTO & TOD Calculations
Function: VNAV
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Go to VNAV PATH 1/2 and VTO to a FPL WPT.
2. Perform a DTO to a waypoint downstream of the VNAV WPT.
3. Press the VNAV key to access the PATH VNAV. Select a waypoint on the
FPL with an altitude and finish the VNAV entries.
4. Go to VNAV PATH 1/1 and cancel VNAV
Outcome: 1. Verify VNAV display is correct and recalculated.
3. Verify VNAV display goes invalid and proper message is pushed.
4. Verify computed TOD distance is reasonable.
5. Two minutes prior to TOD, verify "TOP OF DESCENT ALERT" message is
displayed.
6. Upon reaching TOD, verify "VERTICAL WPT ALERT" message is
displayed.
7. Verify that the VNAV indicator on the EFIS display becomes armed and will
show proper deviation from and to the VPATH.
8. Verify VNAV display goes invalid and pushes an appropriate message.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 527
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(13) VHF and SATCOM Systems – ACARS
Test: 13
Operation: VHF & SAT COM systems (if installed)
Function: ACARS
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Request several VHF TEXT ONLY weather requests.
2. Request several weather maps.
Outcome: 1. Verify weather message received.
2. NOTE: If this was accomplished in the ground test, this step can be
skipped.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 528
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(14) Course TO or FROM Operations
Test: 14
Operation: Course TO or FROM Operations
Function: PVOR
Remarks:
Test Condition: Create a PVOR using one or more of the following functions, from or to any
given WPT.
1. TRACK
2. INBOUND
3. OUTBOUND
Outcome: 1. Verify that the NAV display is correct
2. Verify that the aircraft flys the proper direction. (AC 20-138A §23.b.(2))
3. Cancel with the use of a DTO
4. Cancel with the use of a manual leg change
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 529
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(15) Holding Patterns – HOLD
Test: 15
Operation: Holding Patterns
Function: HOLD
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Define a standard holding pattern at the TO waypoint using the current
course as the inbound leg of the hold and Activate. (TSO-C115b a.(2),(ix))
or
2. Define a standard holding pattern at a TO waypoint using a course as the
inbound leg of the hold so as to create a PARALLEL entry and Activate or
3. Define a standard holding pattern at a TO waypoint using a course as the
inbound leg of the hold so as to create a TEAR DROP entry and Activate.
Outcome: 1. Verify entry is as expected.
2. Verify aircraft enters and flies the holding pattern correctly. (AC 20-138A
§23.b.(2))
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 530
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(16) SBAS Approach – Approach LOS as Required
Test: 16
Phase of Flight: Approach
Operation: SBAS Approach ( minimum 3 approaches)
Function: Approach LOS as required
Remarks: SBAS APPROACH
Note: Verify that flight technical error (FTE) can be maintained at less than 1.0
NM for enroute and approach transition operating modes, and less than 0.25
NM for non-precision approaches, both with and without autopilot and/or flight
director use. (AC 20-138A §23.b.(3)),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4).(vi).(A))
Test Condition: 1. Assure that the correct LOS is selected and annunciated.
2. Continue the approach to the DA.
3. At the DA select TOGA and fly the missed approach procedure to the hold.
Repeat This Test Condition as necessary.
Outcome: 1. Verify that on the Approach Category Selection Page all available LOS are
listed.
2. Verify that the correct LOS is annunciated on the CDU. (DO-229D
§2.2.5.2.4),(AC 20-138A §19.c.(1))
3. Verify that the LOS is annunciated on the proper external light or display.
(DO-229D §2.2.1.6.1)
4. Verify that the aircraft properly follows the FMS HDG commands. (DO-
229D §2.2.3.2.1)
5. Verify that the aircraft properly intercepts the final approach course and flys
the approach with both vertical and lateral guidance.(DO-229D §2.2.3.3.1)
6. Upon commencing the missed approach confirm that the scaling remains
at 0.3 NM until the first turn point of the missed procedure.(DO-229D
§2.2.3.7.1.2)
7. Verify that the CDU displays Missed Approach and leg sequences
properly.(DO-229D §2.2.3.2.2)
8. Verify that the LPV annunciation extinguishes (if performing LPV LOS).
9. Verify that the aircraft enters and flys the hold as expected. (DO-229D
§2.2.1.3.11)
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 531
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(17) Non SBAS Approach – Additional Approaches
Test: 17
Phase of Flight: Approach
Operation: Non SBAS Approach (as req)
Function: Additional approaches (GPS, NDB, VOR, VOR DME, ILS or LOC BC) as
required for the specific installation.
Remarks: SBAS APPROACH
Note: Verify that flight technical error (FTE) can be maintained at less than 1.0
NM for enroute and approach transition operating modes, and less than 0.25
NM for non-precision approaches, both with and without autopilot and/or flight
director use. (AC 20-138A §23.b.(3)),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4).(vi).(A))
Test Condition: 1. Load the selected approach into the FMS
2. Continue the approach to the DA.
3. At the DA select TOGA and fly the missed approach procedure to the hold.
Repeat This Test Condition as necessary.
Outcome: Verify that the selected approach is execuited successfully
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 532
34-60-52 3 February 2011
3. Operational Checkout
You may make a copy of this section for recording the results of your checkout of the Flight
Management System. Mark the PASS or FAIL spaces and fill in the blanks as appropriate.
The contents of this section constitute the minimum Return to Service Procedures.
You should perform these checks when you install a new or repaired component of the Flight
Management System or related avionics equipment. You must know the aircraft’s
navigational configuration before you checkout the Flight Management System.
If the equipment fails any check, refer to the Troubleshooting section for corrective
troubleshooting procedures.
A. CDU / FMS Self-Test
These functional and self-tests should be performed after replacement of the FMS and/or the
4-Inch or 5-Inch FPCDU.
(1) Ensure that all system component connectors are connected and units are seated in
mounting racks where applicable. For GPS tests the aircraft must be located outside
the hangar and the antenna must have an unobstructed view of the sky.
(2) Reset any circuit breakers that may have been opened for replacement.
(3) Ensure that 28 VDC primary power is available on the bus supplying power to the
FMS.
(4) Ensure that 26 VAC power is available to supply reference voltages to the FMS.
(5) Ensure that the Air Data Computer system and Air Data Converter (if installed) are
powered up and functioning.
(6) Ensure that the Heading source system supplying heading data to the FMS is powered
up and valid.
(7) Select FMS for display on the flight instruments.
(8) Ensure that power for the FMS system annunciators is available and tested.
(9) Turn on all sensors having independent power control such as IRS.
(10) Push [ON/OFF DIM] on the CDU keypad. After a five-second warm-up, the self-test
page will be displayed.
Pass Fail
(11) The aircraft type appears on line two.
Pass Fail
(12) Check that all items on the self-test page display “PASS”.
Pass Fail
Record failures:
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Page 533
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(13) Observe system annunciators during self-test. The following annunciators, which are
remote from the CDU, should illuminate for about 45 seconds during FMS self-test.
NOTE: This test is not supported on the EFI displays.
WPT ALERT (Waypoint Alert) Pass Fail N/A
SXTK (Selected Crosstrack) Pass Fail N/A
APPR (Approach) Pass Fail N/A
HDG (Heading) Pass Fail N/A
MSG (Message) Pass Fail N/A
GPS INTEG (GPS Integrity) Pass Fail N/A
LNAV Pass Fail N/A
LNAV/VNAV Pass Fail N/A
LP/LPV Pass Fail N/A
(14) During the self-tests, with the FMS selected for display on the HSI, verify the
following indications:
NOTE: This test is not supported on the EFI-890 displays.
NAV FLAG – pulls out of view during self-test Pass Fail N/A
TO/FR FLAG – indicates TO condition Pass Fail N/A
COURSE POINTER – slews to 045 degrees Pass Fail N/A
BEARING POINTER – slews to 135 degrees Pass Fail N/A
LATERAL DEVIATION – moves 1 dot right (3.75 NM) Pass Fail N/A
VERTICAL DEVIATION – moves 1 dot up (1600 ft.) Pass Fail N/A
DISTANCE DISPLAY – shows 123.4 NM (or 123) Pass Fail N/A
ROLL COMMAND – 10 degree right bank Pass Fail N/A
NOTE: 1. Indications may differ with some equipment types and EFIS installations.
2. The terms Desired Track and Course Pointer are used interchangeably.
3. The terms Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and Lateral Deviation
Needle are used interchangeably.
4. The terms Glide Slope Needle and Vertical Deviation Needle are used
interchangeably.
Record any discrepancies:
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
NOTE: After completion of self-tests, the CDU will display the copyright page
followed by the Initialization page [INIT 1/1].
Page 534
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(15) Push [MSG] to display any system messages. Verify that no “FAIL” messages or
“DEMONSTRATION MODE” messages are displayed. “POSITION UNCERTAIN”
is normal until the system has been initialized. If any fail messages are displayed,
refer to the Messages Section in the Operator’s Manual for possible causes. Push
[MSG] again to return to the INIT 1/1 page. Pass Fail
(16) The latitude and longitude of the field should be displayed. Push ACCEPT line select
key (LSK) [5L] or [ENTER] to initialize the position. The cursor will advance to the
date field.
(17) If the date is correct push [ENTER] or enter the date numbers (DDMMYY), then
push [ENTER]. The cursor will advance to the UTC field.
(18) If the time is correct, push [ENTER] or enter the time numbers (HHMM), then push
[ENTER]. The cursor will advance to the ACCEPT line select location. Push
ACCEPT, LSK [5L].
(19) Fill in the following blanks with information from the last two lines of the INIT 1/1
page:
NAV DATABASE EXPIRES
_______________________________________________
FMC VER
_______________________________________________________________
NOTE: You may test the FMS with an expired database.
(20) Push [DATA] four times to display DATA 4/4 page. Verify that the correct aircraft
heading is displayed in the HDG data field. Pass Fail
(21) Manually slew the heading off 10 degrees using the slave switch. Verify that the
heading tracks correctly in both directions. Pass Fail N/A
Page 535
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(22) Push [NEXT] to display DATA 1/4 page and push MAINT, LSK [5R] to display
MAINT 1/1 page. From MAINT 1/1 push S/W VERS, LSK [5L] and observe the
version identification of the various software installed on the system. The FMC
version should match the version approved for the installation in the Airplane Flight
Manual Supplement or other approved documentation. Record the software versions
below.
FMC ____________________
CDU ____________________
AUX ____________________
ANA ____________________
RRS ____________________
BSTRP ____________________
WAAS ____________________
ASCB ____________________
RTU ____________________
Pass Fail
(23) Activate the panel lighting system that powers the CDU faceplate lighting for the
FMS and verify proper operation.
Pass Fail
Page 536
34-60-52 3 February 2011
B. CDU Keyboard Dimming and Display Offset
BRIGHT®
DIM®
CANCEL®
DISPLAY®
OFF/STBY®
Dimming Control Window

(1) With any page displayed, push [ON/OFF DIM]. Verify the dimming control window
is displayed on the right side of the active page with the options BRIGHT, LSK [1R],
DIM, LSK [2R], CANCEL, LSK [3R], DISPLAY, LSK [4R] and OFF/STBY, LSK
[5R].
Pass Fail
(2) Push and hold BRIGHT, LSK [1R], push and hold DIM, LSK [2R]. Verify that the
display brightens and dims.
Pass Fail
(3) Press DISPLAY, LSK [4R]. Verify the Display control window is displayed on the
right side of the active page with the UP, DOWN, CANCEL and (optional) VIDEO,
line select keys.
Push and hold UP, LSK [1R], push and hold DOWN, LSK [2R]. Verify that the
display moves up and down and can be adjusted to minimize parallax between the
arrows and line select keys.
Pass Fail
(4) Push [ON/OFF DIM] or any mode key to return to the previous display.
C. FMS Configuration Verification
The FMS’s Configuration Module was programmed to allow the FMS to interface with the
installed sensors, databases, etc. The CDU will display which aircraft hardware the
Configuration Module is programmed for.
To verify proper programming, check the Aircraft Configuration Data Sheets against the
CDU configuration displays. Refer to the applicable Configuration Module Programming
Procedures located in the WAAS FMS Configuration Manual for SCN 1000/1100 and
subsequent, Report No. 34-61-XX.
Pass Fail
Page 537
34-60-52 3 February 2011
D. Static Test
Selected analog and discrete static tests are available while the aircraft is on the ground.
NOTE: Static tests may not function correctly with some EFIS installations.
Static tests are selected from the maintenance page and confirm data exchange
synchronization between the aircraft and FMS during operation. Static tests verify two
sources of output: analog and digital.
(1) Analog Tests (P/N 3116-X2-1116)
Analog tests are available only for FMSs equipped with an analog board.
(a) From DATA 1/4 page, press the MAINT line select key and select STATIC
TEST from MAINT 1/1. Then press ANALOG Line select Key. ANALOG
1/2 page is displayed.
(b) Outputs to the flight guidance system are checked by pressing each line select
key and verifying the proper display on the HSI or ADI.
NOTE: Each option must be turned off by again pressing the line select key before a
new option can be tested.
ANALOG TESTS 1/2
BEARING 90 Pass Fail N/A
DSRTK 90 Pass Fail N/A
XTK LEFT Pass Fail N/A
XTK RIGHT Pass Fail N/A
XTK CENTER Pass Fail N/A
(c) Press [NEXT] for ANALOG TESTS 2/2.

ANALOG TESTS 2/2
VERT UP Pass Fail N/A
VERT DN Pass Fail N/A
VERT CTR Pass Fail N/A
TO Pass Fail N/A
FROM Pass Fail N/A
ROLL 20 DEG R Pass Fail N/A
ROLL 20 DEG L Pass Fail N/A
ROLL 0 DEG Pass Fail N/A
(d) Press RETURN for STATIC TEST 1/1.
Page 538
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Discrete Tests
(a) Press the DISCRETE line select key. DISCRETE 1/2 page is displayed. Each
discrete is labeled as it was configured and can be tested.
DISCRETE TST 1/2
DISC OUT 1 Pass Fail N/A
(b) Press [NEXT] for DISCRETE TESTS 2/2.
DISCRETE TST 2/2

Page 539
34-60-52 3 February 2011
4. Interface Checkout
A. HSI Test
(1) Press the DTO key then the LIST key. The LIST 1/10 page with VOR/PLT waypoints
will be displayed.
(2) Select any one of the waypoints by entering its corresponding number at the cursor
and pressing ENTER twice. NAV 1/3 will be displayed.
(3) Verify the desired track, bearing, distance and crosstrack (XTK) displayed on the HSI
is the same as on the CDU.
Pass Fail
(4) On DATA page 2 press the ADC line select key to display ADC 1/1.
(5) Press the line select key next to the TAS field and enter 100. Press ENTER.
NOTE: You must deselect GPS and INS before entering TAS as 100.
(6) On NAV 1/3 verify that the groundspeed displayed on the CDU matches that on the
HSI (if the HSI supports this option).
Pass Fail N/A
B. Winds Display (EFIS Only)
(1) Display NAV 1/2.
(2) Select Wind Display on the EFIS. Verify that the winds displayed on the HSI
correspond to those on the CDU.
Pass Fail N/A
(3) Turn the FMS off, then on before proceeding with additional tests.
C. DME Interface Test
Valid DME signals must be received by the DME or RRS system when testing the DME
interface. Local DME station signals, if available on the ground, are adequate to verify
operation of the interface. Otherwise a DME signal generator is required. Manual signal
generators capable of providing DME test frequencies of 108.00 and 108.05 can also provide
a lock-on and DME test of the DDC frequency of 108.20. Otherwise, a generator capable of
manually tuning this frequency should be used.
(1) If a local DME station can be received at the aircraft’s location, turn on and initialize
the FMS to the local airport reference point identifier. If a DME signal cannot be
received and a ramp tester is used, initialize the FMS to KDDC.
(2) Select DATA page 2. Press the DME line select key to display DME 1/1 page. Verify
that the STATUS field displays NORMAL (D).
(3) Press the SELECT DME line select key. The (D) will extinguish and the DME
identifiers will change on a four-second interval as the DME scan tunes to stations in
the area.
Page 540
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(4) Press the MAN DME line select key to place the cursor over the data field.
NOTE: Two MAN DME LSKs are displayed, select only one.
(5) Press the LIST key to display a list of DME stations in the area. If local DME is used,
choose the local DME from the list. If a signal generator is used and the FMS was
initialized to KDDC, select DDC from the list and press ENTER.
(6) Verify that the local distance to station or distance provided by the DME generator is
displayed.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail ❏ N/A
(7) If the FMS was initialized to KDDC, turn it off and then on again and initialize to the
local airport reference point to prevent confusion.
NOTE: The following steps apply to TACAN (RRS only).
(8) Display DATA page 2 (if applicable).
(9) Select TACAN Status page.
(10) Check radial displayed on CDU for reasonableness.
(11) Compare distance displayed on CDU with aircraft TACAN distance.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
D. VOR Test (without RRS)
(1) From DATA page 2 press the VOR line select key.
(2) Verify that the frequency displayed in the FREQ field corresponds to the active
frequency of the appropriate Nav Control Head.
E. DTU-100 Test
NOTE: 1. This test can only be performed on the ground.
2. It is necessary to have the correct UASC Database disk.
(1) From DATA page 1 press the DISK line select key.
(2) Insert the data disk into the DTU-100.
(3) Press DISK CONTENTS line select key.
(4) Verify that the DTU-100 reads the disk and the disk information is displayed on the
CDU.
Page 541
34-60-52 3 February 2011
F. SSDTU Test
NOTE: This test can only be performed on the ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to have a correct Universal Database on a USB or Secure Digital
(SD) data storage device.
(1) From DATA page 1 press the DISK line select key.
(2) Insert a mass storage device into the SSDTU.
(3) Press DISK CONTENTS line select key.
(4) Verify that the SSDTU reads the storage device and that database information is
displayed on the FMS CDU.
(5) Verify indicators are illuminated in accordance with the following table.
Indicator Color and Action
Indicator
Type Blank Green Green Amber Blue Blue
Solid Blinking Solid Solid Blinking
STATUS SSDTU Off Operational N/A CBIT has Self Test N/A
(Front) detected an
error (SSDTU
will reboot)
USB No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, in Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported use (Indicates being
accessed device Primary accessed
Storage
Device)
SD No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, in Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported use (Indicates being
accessed device Primary accessed
Storage
Device)
NET Not yet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(Front) operational
Ethernet No device A network link Network N/A N/A N/A
(Rear) present is established activity
on this port
Page 542
34-60-52 3 February 2011
G. Approach Mode
NOTE: This test does not operate correctly on some EFIS types.
(1) Turn on and initialize the FMS (position does not matter for this test).
(2) From DATA page 1, press the MAINT line select key.
(3) From MAINT 1/1, press the DYNAMIC TEST line select key.
(4) From DYNAMIC TEST 1/1 press the APPROACH line select key.
(5) As the test begins, select the proper mode of the flight director.
NOTE: The radio altimeter should be disabled for vertical coupling.
(6) As the CDI returns to center, Nav mode will capture.
(7) As the glideslope needle returns to center, the glideslope function will capture.
(8) The V-bars will follow the lateral and vertical commands as specified for the test.
(9) The glideslope flag comes into view during FLAG VERT test.
(10) The lateral mode of the flight director drops during FLAG STEER test (if roll steering
for approach).
(11) Nav flag drops into view during NAV FLAG test.
Page 543
34-60-52 3 February 2011
5. Sensor Checkout
A. IRS
NOTE: Inertial Reference System must be in Nav mode before conducting the following
tests.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the line select key for any IRS.
(2) From IRS 1/1 note the following:
Status Hdg
1. _______________________ _______
2. _______________________ _______
3. _______________________ _______
B. GPIRS
(1) From DATA 2/4 press the line select key for IRS/GPS.
(2) From GPIRS1 1/3 note the following:
GPS __________ IRS ___________
EPU __________ HDG ___________
# Sats __________
Integ __________
HIL __________
(3) If additional GPIRS are installed repeat the above procedure selecting the appropriate
IRS/GPS.
GPIRS2
GPS __________ IRS ___________
EPU __________ HDG ___________
# Sats __________
Integ __________
HIL __________
GPIRS3
GPS __________ IRS ___________
EPU __________ HDG ___________
# Sats __________
Integ __________
HIL __________
Page 544
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. LORAN C
NOTE: Aircraft must be outside for this test.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the line select key for LCS.
(2) From LCS 1/3 note the following:
Status (NAV, Noncert or Search) _____________________________
LOA (Inside or Outside) ____________________________________
GRI Stations
__________ __________
__________ __________
__________ __________
D. GPS1
(1) From DATA page 2 press the line select key for GPS1.
(2) From GPS 1/4 note the following:
GPS (ACQ, ALT, NAV) __________ EPU __________
#SATS ________________________ INTEG __________
HIL ___________________________ 273 __________
277 ___________________________
E. WAAS1
(1) From DATA page 2 press the line select key for WAAS1.
(2) From WAAS 1/4 note the following:
MODE (ACQ, ALT, NAV) __________
#SATS ________________________ INTEG __________
HPL ___________________________ HAL __________
VPL ___________________________ VAL __________
HFOM _________________________ VFOM __________
352 ___________________________ 354 __________
VER ___________________________
Page 545
34-60-52 3 February 2011
F. UASC Radio Reference Sensor (RRS)
NOTE: The following Checkout Procedures may be accomplished in flight and all data can
be compared to aircraft DME, VOR and (if applicable) TACAN.
(1) Display DATA page 2
(2) Select VOR Status page.
(3) Tune test station by frequency (Test) or by ID (line select key adjacent to IDENT).
Check radial displayed on CDU for reasonableness.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
G. Air Data
NOTE: This test requires the use of a pitot/static tester and approved procedures.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the ADC line select key.
(2) With pitot static test unit applied to the aircraft, run the airspeed up to approximately
200 knots. Confirm that the TAS displayed on the CDU is correct.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
(3) Change the baro setting on the appropriate altimeter and confirm that the baro-altitude
reading on the CDU coincides with the altimeter reading.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
(4) Confirm that the SAT displayed on the CDU is reasonable.
(5) Turn off FMS and turn it back on before proceeding with additional tests.
H. Fuel Flow
(1) Press the FUEL key until FUEL 5/5 is displayed.
(2) With all engines running, ensure that the fuel flow displayed on the CDU matches the
aircraft’s fuel flow gauges. Check this on at least two different power settings.
Page 546
34-60-52 3 February 2011
I. GPIRS Checkout
(1) GPIRS Status
GPIR1 1/3
gps HYB [D] irs NAV [D]
q 01 hdg 101Ø
#sata 06
integ RAIM set hdg ---ø
hil 0.06nm select
velocity irs ®
fms1 s123 e420 select
irs s124 e421 gps ®
gps s123 e422
hyb s125 e423 RETURN®
GPIR1 1/3
This page is accessed from DATA page 2 and provides data on the GPS and IRS
sensors.
NOTE: The page layout may differ in some installations. Status (GPS)
HYB Navigation mode is using hybrid position from IRS and GPS.
NAV GPS position alone is being used without IRS aiding.
ALT Altitude aiding mode (ADC altitude being used to supplement poor
satellite geometry).
INIT GPS/IRS is initializing position.
ACQ GPS is acquiring satellite for navigation.
TEST GPS is in test mode.
FAIL GPS has failed or no 429 data is being received.
Status (IRS)
NAV IRS has correctly aligned and is in NAV.
ALIGN IRS is in alignment mode.
FAIL No ARINC 429 data received from GPIRS or else GPIRS is sending
FAIL status on the 429 bus.
ATT IRS is in ATTITUDE mode. Sensor will not be used for navigation.
This page will also show number of satellites being tracked as well as the North and
East component velocities from the IRS, GPS, FMD and Hybrid IRS/GPS.
SET HDG (2R) The value entered is displayed and transmitted on ARINC 429 label
043 for 12 seconds. Then dashes are displayed in the field again and label stops
transmitting. This is used for setting IRS heading when in ATT mode. The display
will indicate ° (degree symbol) for magnetic and T for true heading.
The GPS and IRS can be independently selected or deselected from this page.
Page 547
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) GPIRS Comparison Page
GPIR1 2/3
fms1 pos irs pos
n 33 54.0 n 33 54.8
w 117 57.3 w 117 57.8
diff n 00 00.8
w 000 00.5
¬GPS 20.2 irs 15.2®
¬HYB 20.7
RETURN®
GPIR1 2/3
This page is similar to DATA 3/4 but only HYBrid, GPS and IRS positions are shown
for comparison to FMS positions. Pushing the line select key next to GPS, HYB or
IRS will display that position in the upper right hand field and show the difference
from the FMS position.
(3) GPIRS Diagnostics Page
GPIR1 3/3
gpirs diagnostics
270 08DA10
273 056789
274 8745AF
350 604344
352 873243
353 6A7EC2
355 05A5A5
RETURN®
GPIR1 3/3
This page shows contents of ARINC 429 labels from GPIRS as shown in left hand
column. Data is in hexadecimal and is for diagnostic purposes only.
Page 548
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(4) GPIRS Diagnostics
GPIRS BUS 270 – IRS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Transmission Rate: 500 milliseconds
GPIRS Diagnostic Bit Assignments
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
P MM Status Bits SDI 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Status bit meanings if set to one:

Bit 17: IRS on DC power
Bit 15: IRS attitude is invalid, IRS is failed
Bit 13: IRS in NAV (navigation mode)
Bit 12: IRS in ARR (attitude mode)
Bit 11: IRS in ALIGN mode
Where MM is 0: 0 = valid
else = invalid
Where P is bit which causes sum of 32 bits to be odd.
GPIRS BUS 273 – Autonomous GPS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Page 549
34-60-52 3 February 2011
GPIRS Autonomous GPS Status Bit Assignments
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
P MM Status Bits 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

Bit 29: Reserved
Bit 28:
000 = Self Test
001 = Initialization
010 = Acquisition
011 = Navigation
100 = Altitude Aiding
101 = Spare
110 = Spare
111 = Fault
Bit 25
Bit 23
Bit 19
Bit 15: Secondary IRS/FMS source used
Bit 14: IRS/FMS not present
Bit 13: Secondary DADS source used
Bit 12: DADS not present
Bit 11
else = invalid
GPIRS BUS 274 – Hybrid GPS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Page 550
34-60-52 3 February 2011
GPIRS Hybrid GPS Status Bit Assignments
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
P MM Status Bits 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

Bit 29: Reserved
Bit 28
000 = Self Test
001 = Initialization
010 = Acquisition
011 = Navigation
100 = Altitude Aiding
101 = Spare
110 = Spare
111 = Fault
Bit 25
Bit 23
Bit 19: Active GPSSU Source:
0 = GPSSU #1
1 = GPSSU #2
Bit 18
00 = Valid
01 = Inactive
10 = Functional Test
11 = Fail
Bit 16
00 = Valid
01 = Inactive
10 = Functional Test
11 = Fail
Bit 14
else = invalid
Page 551
34-60-52 3 February 2011
J. UASC GPS Checkout
Except where indicated, this checkout applies to the internal GPS and GPS 1000:
(1) Test Preparation
(2) Apply aircraft power to the FMS and GPS sensor(s) system.
(3) Power up the FMS and initialize by verifying or entering proper date, time and
present position.
(4) Access DATA 2/n page (sensor select page) and select GPS. GPS 1/3 page will
appear.
(5) Status will display either ACQ (acquiring) or INIT (initializing).
NOTE: At times it may take up to 30 minutes to acquire a valid almanac from the satellites
present.
(6) Wait until NAVB appears on GPS 1/3 status page.
GPS1 1/4 Status Page
GPS1 1/4
stat NAV [D] address
q 01 -----
#sats 06 data
integ RADIO ----
hil 0.06nm select
hdop 1.57 gps only®
vdop 2.46
273 063580 select gps®
277 000000
ver 0001 RETURN®
GPS1 1/4 Status Page

NOTE: GPS label 277 shown on the screen above applies only to the internal GPS and
GPS-1000.
NOTE: The page layout may be different in some installations.
Page 552
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(a) GPS Status:
NAV GPS is NAV mode
ACQ GPS is acquiring satellites
INIT GPS is initializing first position from internal almanac
ALT GPS is using altitude to compensate for poor satellite geometry
TEST GPS is in TEST mode
FAIL GPS has failed or 429 data is not received from GPS
(b) GPS Q factors: These are error estimates in tenths of nautical miles (a Q factor
of 01 is equal to 0.1 NM circular error estimate). A Q factor of 99 indicates that the
sensor is not usable by the FMS.
(c) # SATELLITES: The number of satellites currently being tracked by the GPS.
This page shows ARINC 429 data on labels 273 and 277 from the GPS sensor. The
operator may enter a five-digit hex ADDRESS field to view four-digit hex data in
DATA field. This page is to be used for diagnostics and troubleshooting. HDOP and
VDOP are for reference only.
(d) SELECT/DESELECT GPS: Used to manually select or deselect the GPS sensor.
(e) Label 273 GPS Sensor Status (discrete)
APPROX. RESOLUTION N/A UNITS: N/A
MAXIMUM VALUE N/A DATA FORMAT: TBD
MINIMUM VALUE N/A FULL SCALE: N/A
Page 553
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Label 273 GPS Sensor Status (discrete)
FIELD BIT BIT DESCRIPTION
NAME WEIGHT NUMBER
LABEL 01 1 CODE = 273 OCTAL
02 0
03 1
04 1
05 1
06 0
07 1
08 1
6th 1 SPARE 09 0
2 SPARE 10 0
4 11 0
MSB of Satellite Visible (16X)
1 > 15 visible; 0
8 12 0 DADC STATUS
0 = PRESENT, 1 = NOT PRESENT
5th 1 13 X DADC SOURCE
0 = PRIMARY, 1 = SECONDARY
2 14 X FMS STATUS
0 = PRESENT, 1 = NOT PRESENT
4 15 X FMS SOURCE
0 = PRIMARY, 1 = SECONDARY
8 16 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (1X) LSB
4th 1 17 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (2X)
2 18 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (4X)
4 19 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (8X) MSB
(See bit number 11)
8 20 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (1X) LSB
3rd 1 21 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (2X)
2 22 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (4X)
4 23 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (8X) MSB
(See bit number 29)
8 24 X SPARE
2nd 1 25 X SPARE
2 26 X GPS OPERATIONAL MODE Note 1
1st 1 29 X MSB of SATELLITES TRACKED (16X) 1 > 15
tracked; 0
2 30 X SSM Note
4 31 X SSM Note
8 32 X PARITY (ODD)
NOTE: The meanings of the bit combinations for GPS OPERATIONAL MODE and SSM are shown in
the following tables.
Page 554
34-60-52 3 February 2011
GPS OPERATIONAL MODE

BIT 28 BIT 27 BIT 26 MEANING
0 0 0 SELF TEST MODE
0 0 1 INITIALIZATION MODE
0 1 0 ACQUISITION MODE
0 1 1 NAVIGATION MODE
1 0 0 ALTITUDE AIDING MODE
1 0 1 SPARE
1 1 0 SPARE
1 1 1 FAULT
BIT 31 BIT 30 MEANING

0 0 NORMAL OPERATION
0 1 NO COMPUTED DATA
1 0 FUNCTIONAL TEST
1 1 NOT USED
Page 555
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(e) Label 277 GPS Diagnostics
This label applies to the internal GPS and GPS 1000.
APPROX. RESOLUTION N/A UNITS: N/A
MAXIMUM VALUE N/A DATA FORMAT: TBD
MINIMUM VALUE N/A FULL SCALE: N/A
277 GPS Diagnostics

DIGIT BIT BIT NO. DESCRIPTION
WEIGHT
1 1 Octal Label = 277
2 2
1 3
2 4
4 5
1 6
2 7
4 8
th
6 1 9 Unused
2 10 Unused
4 11 Unused
8 12 Unused
th
5 1 13 Unused
2 14 Unused
4 15 Unused
8 16 Low Battery Voltage (for Sensor II battery backed up RAM)
th
4 1 17 ARINC Receiver Parity Errors
2 18 Noisy Interrupt Exception
4 19 Spurious Interrupt Exception
8 20 Uninitiated Interrupt Exception
rd
3 1 21 Bus Error, Address Error, Illegal Instruction, Privilege Violation or
Divide By Zero Trap Exception
2 22 Message Negatively or Not Acknowledged by Sensor II
4 23 Satellite Status, GPS Satellite Range Residual, Satellite
Measurement Data, Ephemeris, Data, Almanac Data or MEC
Support Message Not Received from Sensor II
8 24 GPS Pos Data, GPS Lat/Lon or GPS Pos Fix Sol/Variables or
Binary Position Data Message Not Received from Sensor II
nd
2 1 25 Sensor II Communications Failure
2 26 ARINC Transmitter or Receiver Failure
4 27 RAM Addressing or Data Storage Failure
8 28 GPS Board Software Checksum Failure
st
1 1 29 Unreasonable Alt or Unreasonable Ground Speed or Dup Sat
2 Elevations and Azimuths
30 SSM 01 = Invalid
4 31 SSM 10 = Unused
8 32 Parity Bit
Page 556
34-60-52 3 February 2011
GPS1 2/4 and 3/4 Pages
GPS1 2/4
sv# az el snr stat
04 122ø 38ø 54 5
06 93ø 87ø 23 4
29 248ø 11ø 18 2
22 248ø 22ø 26 4
16 223ø 45ø 33 9
13 180ø 02ø 04 7
09 127ø 53ø 34 4
15 35ø 67ø 36 4
RETURN®
GPS1 2/4
This page applies to the internal GPS and GPS-1000
GPS1 3/4
sv# az el snr stat
05 22ø 48ø 54 5
07 193ø 57ø 23 4
24 148ø 21ø 18 2
21 241ø 27ø 26 4
26 210ø 35ø 33 9
23 150ø 62ø 04 7
19 237ø 43ø 34 4
11 100ø 07ø 36 4
RETURN®
GPS1 3/4
This page applies to the internal GPS and GPS 1000
These pages display the twelve satellites most likely in current use by the GPS. Each line
displays SV# (Satellite Vehicle Number). Azimuth will always be true direction from the
aircraft. Elevation is in degrees above the horizon (90 degrees is directly overhead the aircraft
position). EL may be negative indicating a satellite below the horizon. SNR is a number from
0 to 63 in dB Hz. Status is a number from 0 top 9 and is defined as follows:
GPS SATELLITE STATUS
STATUS DEFINITION
0 Satellite is assigned to a channel
1 FIND command issued
2 Waiting to receive almanac and ephemeris data
3 Waiting to receive complete pseudo range data block
4 Performing the tracking/acquisition process
5 Fast sequencing of satellite signal (tracking mode)
6 Satellite is not assigned to a channel
7 Lost satellite lock during sequencing process
8 Waiting for clock message
9 Satellite not found
Page 557
34-60-52 3 February 2011
GPS1 4/4 Page
GPS1 4/4
deselected desel
satellites stat sv#--
5 des
23 des select
17 auto sv#--
8 req
RETURN®
GPS1 4/4
This page applies to the internal GPS and GPS-1000
This page displays a list of satellites that have been deselected by the GPS or requested
deselected by the FMS. You should verify that individual satellites can be deselected and
selected manually by entering the satellite vehicle number in the appropriate filed and then
pushing [ENTER].
Page 558
34-60-52 3 February 2011
6. GPS/WAAS Checkout
NOTE: In a single FMS installation interfaced with an LP/LPV monitor, skip tests which
require using FMS #2.
A. FMS Power On Self-Test - Initialization and LPV Annunciation Test
(1) Apply aircraft power to the FMS and sensor(s) systems.
(2) Power up and initialize both FMSs.
(3) Confirm that the LPV WAAS lights are lit momentarily.
(4) Confirm that installed LOS annunciators are lit momentarily.
(5) Verify that both FMSs pass all items on the self-test page.
(6) Verify the displayed position matches the aircraft location.
(7) Accept the position on FMS #1 and FMS #2 and verify that the reverse video ‘I’
disappears on both FMSs for SYNC operation.
(8) Verify that both FMSs have the current database.
(9) On DATA 3/4 page verify that the FMS positions on each unit correspond to the
aircraft location and is consistent with the sensor positions and with the other FMS
position.
(10) Verify all data on DATA 2/4 page is accurate and reflects the configuration and
sensors installed.
B. GPS/WAAS Sensor Evaluation
NOTE: At times it may take up to 30 minutes to acquire a valid almanac from the satellites
present.
(1) Display DATA 2/4 page on FMS #1. Verify Onside WAAS displays an EPU value,
Offside displays a Nav mode.
(2) On FMS #1 deselect WAAS #1. Verify Offside WAAS displays an EPU value.
(3) Reselect WAAS #1. On Offside FMS, verify WAAS displays a Nav mode.
(4) Display DATA 2/4 page on FMS #2. Verify Onside WAAS displays an EPU value.
(5) On FMS #2, deselect WAAS #2. Verify Offside WAAS #1displays an EPU value.
(6) Reselect WAAS #2. Verify Onside WAAS displays an EPU value.
Page 559
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. WAAS Flight Plan with LPV Approach
NOTE: A list of WAAS Channel IDs may be obtained from the following web site:
http://gps.faa.gov.
(1) With a destination airport in the flight plan, select FPL-MENU-ARRIVE and enter
the data on the page as normal to add the RNAV approach. Making selections as
prompted.
(2) With a destination airport in the flight plan, select FPL-MENU-ARRIVE and enter
the WAAS Channel ID in the Airport ID field.
(3) With the destination airport in the flight plan, select FPL-MENU-ARRIVE and enter
the WAAS Channel ID for another airport.
(4) Verify that the choice selections are correct for the airport and that the flight plan is
properly displayed after approach selection. Verify the WAAS Channel ID is correct
and matches the printed chart. Verify that the Path ID is correct.
NOTE: WAAS Channel ID is not available if there is no FASDB.
(5) Verify that the Flight Plan is modified, adding the approach chosen by the WAAS
Channel ID and that it is correct and reasonable.
(6) Verify that the field blanks until an acceptable WAAS channel or airport line number
is entered.
(7) Verify that the approach navigation source selected for the approach is positively
indicated in the normal field of view at each pilot station.
(8) Verify that the flight plan data is synchronized to the offside.
Page 560
34-60-52 3 February 2011
D. CDU Display of RNP/ANP
Observe the RNP/ANP on CDU NAV 1/1 page.
E. GPS/WAAS Dynamic Test
Whenever any WAAS Critical Configuration Data is changed (FMS Transmit Bus, Analog
Bus (DEVs) or the Cross-Channel Monitor), this test verifies that the WAAS subsystem has
the appropriate scale factors, timing and other requirements for the WAAS critical guidance
parameters and that the state of the Cross-Channel monitoring is as desired.
NOTE: When the WAAS system is configured with UASC EFI-890R displays, a flight plan
must be entered and linked to the navigation legs prior to running GPS/WAAS
Dynamic Test.
(1) Open MAINT 1/1 page by selecting MAINT from DATA 1/4 page.
DATA 1/4
¬NAV DATA CABIN DISP®
¬PILOT DATA MFD DISP®
¬DISK MSTR XFILL®
¬HOLD POS MAINT®
MAINT 1/1
¬CONFIG
¬WAAS
¬STATIC TEST
¬DYNAMIC TEST
¬S/W VERS RETURN®
(2) Select WAAS LSK [2L] test.
WAAS 1/1
¬WAAS GUIDANCE BUS
¬ANTENNA CONFIRM
¬RESET GG12W ALMANAC
¬RESET GG12W EPHEMERIS
RETURN®
Page 561
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(3) Select WAAS GUIDANCE BUS LSK [1L] to display the GUIDANCE BUS
STATUS page.
GUIDANCE BUS STATUS

waas
onside offside
UNCONFIRMED UNCONFIRMED
xc-monitor
ENABLED
DYNAMIC TEST®
RETURN®
(4) Select DYNAMIC TEST LSK [4R] to run the WAAS Dynamic Tests which will
confirm any WAAS critical configuration data changes.
(5) The FMS will indicate to the WAAS subsystem to begin the Dynamic Test and
display the progress of this test on the DYNAMIC TEST page as illustrated in the
following:
(6) Observe the aircraft displays and/or indicators verifying that the displays match the
indication from the FMS.
DYNAMIC TESTS
waas
IN PROGRESS
RIGHT UP
¬CANCEL
Test Output Test Duration FMS #1 FMS #2

RIGHT UP 10 seconds
HOLD 5 Seconds
CTR XTK 10 seconds
CTR VDEV 10 seconds
LEFT-DOWN 10 seconds
HOLD 5 Seconds
CENTER 10 seconds
FLAG VERT 5 Seconds
FLAG LAT 5 Seconds
LPV LIGHT ON 5 Seconds
LPV LIGHT OFF 5 Seconds
X-C MONITOR 5 Seconds
TEST COMPLETE End of Test
Page 562
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(7) When the WAAS subsystem completes the Dynamic Tests successfully and the FMS
displays TEST COMPLETED message, a Confirmation Code and entry field are
displayed as illustrated in the following:
NOTE: If the Dynamic Test fails, the WAAS subsystem will exit the test and the
FMS will display TEST FAILED. LP and LPV will then be inhibited. The
WAAS configuration and/or aircraft wiring must be re-verified.
DYNAMIC TESTS
waas
TEST COMPLETED
confirm code
1234
enter confirm code
¬CONFIRM RETURN®
(8) Enter the alphanumeric equivalent value (i.e. ONETWOTHREEFOUR) for each of
the four numerical values of the displayed CONFIRM CODE (with leading zeros, if
any, no spaces, no decimals), press ENTER. Press the CONFIRM key LSK [5L] to
send data to the WAAS subsystem.
NOTE: This confirmation applies to the Onside FMS only.
DYNAMIC TESTS
waas
TEST COMPLETED
confirm code
1234
enter confirm code
ONETWOTHREEFOUR
¬CONFIRM RETURN®
(9) The WAAS subsystem(s) (both Onside and Offside) verify the result for both the
Onside/Offside configurations and report the status back to the FMS.
(10) The FMS displays the WAAS GUIDANCE BUS STATUS page displaying the status
of both the Onside and Offside systems.
NOTE: If the Offside is still unconfirmed, run the Guidance Bus Test on the other
FMS to enable LPV.
GUIDANCE BUS STATUS

waas
onside offside
CONFIRMED UNCONFIRMED
xc-monitor
ENABLED
DYNAMIC TEST®
RETURN®
Page 563
34-60-52 3 February 2011
F. WAAS Antenna Offsets Test
This test must be run whenever the WAAS Antenna Offsets are changed.
(1) Open MAINT 1/1 page by selecting MAINT from DATA 1/4 page.
DATA 1/4
¬NAV DATA CABIN DISP®
¬PILOT DATA MFD DISP®
¬DISK MSTR XFILL®
¬HOLD POS MAINT®
MAINT 1/1
¬CONFIG
¬WAAS
¬STATIC TEST
¬DYNAMIC TEST
¬S/W VERS RETURN®
(2) Select WAAS LSK [2L] test.
WAAS 1/1
¬WAAS GUIDANCE BUS
¬ANTENNA CONFIRM
¬RESET GG12W ALMANAC
¬RESET GG12W EPHEMERIS
RETURN®
(3) Select ANTENNA CONFIRM LSK [2L] to display the ANTENNA CONFIRM page.
The FMS displays the Antenna Offsets, confirmed or unconfirmed, for both onside
and offside as received from the WAAS subsystem.
ANTENNA 1/2
onside waas
UNCOMFIRMED
x´+º£.ºm
x´+ºº.m
x´+º.m
¬STANDARD RETURN®
Page 564
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(4) Enter the alphanumeric equivalent value for each of the numerical values of the
Onside displayed antenna offsets, including the sign and leading/trailing zeros (no
spaces or decimals). The ‘P’ and ‘M’ keys are used to represent plus/minus
respectively. The ENTER key is used to advance the cursor to the next field.
(5) When the last string has been entered, the ENTER key causes the data to be sent to
the WAAS Subsytem.
(6) Press NEXT LSK [5L] to display ANTENNA 2/2 confirm page.
ANTENNA 2/2
offside waas
UNCOMFIRMED CONFIRM®
x´+º£.ºm
PZEROTHREEZERO
x´+ºº.m
PZEROZEROEIGHT
x´+º.m
MZEROTWOFIVE
¬PREV RETURN®
(7) Enter the Offside confirmation data.

ANTENNA 2/2
offside waas
UNCOMFIRMED CONFIRM®
x´+º£.ºm
PZEROTHREEZERO
x´+ºº.m
PZEROZEROEIGHT
x´+º.m
MZEROTWOFIVE
¬PREV RETURN®
(8) Press CONFIRM LSK [1R], this sends the Onside and Offside data to the WAAS
subsystem for confirmation.
(9) The WAAS subsystem determines that the data is valid, confirms the data and the
FMS displays that both the Onside and Offside Antenna data pages as confirmed by
the WAAS subsystem.
(10) The WAAS subsystem cross-compares these Antenna Offsets with what it receives
from the Offside FMS. The WAAS subsystem determines that both Antenna Offsets
match with the other WAAS subsystem is transmitting. The WAAS subsystem then
sets both Onside and Offside data to Confirmed and the WAAS CONFIG
UNCONFIRMED message is removed from the FMS.
ANTENNA 1/2 ANTENNA 2/2
onside waas offside waas
COMFIRMED COMFIRMED
x´+º£.ºm x´+º£.ºm
x´+ºº.m x´+ºº.m
x´+º.m x´+º.m
¬NEXT RETURN® ¬PREV RETURN®
Page 565
34-60-52 3 February 2011
7. Troubleshooting
When an FMS fails any of the tests in the checkout section, troubleshoot it per the procedures
below.
Troubleshooting instructions are provided in the following three-column table, in which the
first column lists equipment symptoms or describes the portion of the checkout procedure
that the unit did not pass. These Malfunction/Symptoms are listed in approximately the same
sequence as the checkout procedures. The second column lists probable causes. The third
column describes the corrective action(s) for the malfunction.
After performing the listed corrective action, repeat the failed test to ensure that the problem
has been corrected. Then complete the checkout procedure from the point where it was
interrupted. Should the corrective action affect tests already passed, perform those tests
again.
Where more than one corrective action is listed, the first action listed is the most probable
repair that will correct the malfunction. However, when replacement of a major component
such as the FMS is recommended, it is permissible to replace individual circuit boards
instead if personnel are authorized by Universal Avionics Systems Corporation to do so. If
there is more than one corrective action listed and performing the first action does not correct
the problem, perform the next action listed.
NOTE: Ensure that you have eliminated all other potential causes of trouble before
returning the FMS, 5-Inch FPCDU or other major component for repair. Verify that
the installation wiring is correct. Determine whether the correct input and output
voltages are present. Verify that the required ARINC labels are present on the data
busses.
Page 566
34-60-52 3 February 2011
A. Self-Test
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTION
The Self-Test Page displays a May indicate fault in Self-Test. Push [MSG] to display failure
FAIL next to one or more of the information, troubleshoot indicated
items but after a short time, the fault.
Self-Test Page is replaced by the
Initialization Page.
The Self-Test Page displays a FMS is defective. Replace the FMS.
FAIL but is not replaced by the
Initialization Page.
CDU MSG indicator does not CDU is defective. Replace the CDU.
illuminate.
One or more of the annunciators The annunciator is defective. Troubleshoot annunciator per
does not illuminate during self-test. manufacturer’s instructions.
CRT brightness does not respond CDU is defective. Replace the CDU.
properly to dimming feature.
Keyboard brightness cannot be 1. Fault in radio lighting circuit. 1. Repair radio lighting circuit.
controlled by the radio lighting. 2. CDU is defective. 2. Replace CDU.
Software is not the correct version. FMS has the wrong software Reconfigure or upgrade software.
program.
DEXP is out of date. 1. System date or time is wrong. 1. Enter the correct date and time
2. Wrong database. on Initialization page.
2. Update database per Operator’s
Manual.
Page 567
34-60-52 3 February 2011
B. System Failure Messages
During normal FMS operations, numerous background tests are run continuously to assure
normal operations. Should failures occur, the FMS system will notify the operator with a
flashing message light on the panel or on the associated EFIS display. Pressing the MSG key
will display a message with information about the failure detected. Many failures can be a
result of problems other than the FMS systems components. The following table lists failure
messages that can be displayed by the FMS, their meanings and possible causes / remedies to
assist the maintenance technician with troubleshooting pilot reported failure messages. This
table lists only failure messages, not normal system status messages that are not indicative of
component failures.
Refer to the applicable Operator’s Manual for a complete listing of messages.
System Failure Messages
Failure Message Probable Cause Action/Correction
400 Hz REF FAIL 1. No power to circuit. 1. Check/reset 26 VAC circuit
breaker(s).
2. 400 Hz AC power has failed. 2. 26 VAC voltage/frequency out of
tolerance.
3. Wiring faults. 3. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
4. Defective FMS. 4. Replace FMS.
ABNORMAL CKLIST DB FAIL The abnormal checklist database Reload checklist database.
has failed. (Only with Collins Pro
Line 4 800 configuration)
A/D CODE # Analog/Digital board failed self- Replace FMS.
test.
A/D HEADING FAIL 1. Present system heading source, 1. Check heading source to FMS,
A/D (synchro analog-to-digital), switch sources/reset system as
has failed. required.
3. Defective FMC. 3. Replace FMS.
ADC INPUT FAIL 1. An Air Data Computer (ADC) 1. Check circuit breakers for Air
failure is detected. Data Computer/ACU if installed.
Select alternate sources if
available.
AFIS ARINC FAILURE The FMS has determined that a Troubleshoot bus and AFIS and
failure is present on the AFIS repair.
ARINC bus.
AFIS VHF MODEM FAILURE The VHF modem in the AFIS DMU Replace AFIS DMU.
has failed
AHRS # HEADING FAIL AHRS Heading has failed while in Troubleshoot AHRS and repair.
use as the FMS heading source.
AHRS # INPUT FAIL The AHRS input has failed or its Troubleshoot AHRS and repair.
status word indicates failure.
AIRPORT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been found in the Reload Navigation Database
airport section of the standard diskettes.
database.
Page 568
34-60-52 3 February 2011
AIRWAY DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload Navigation Database.
the Airways database.
ALIGN PT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database diskette.
the Align Points database.
ALTITUDE INVALID 1. The altitude portion of the Air 1. Check circuit breakers/status of
Data Computer is unusable. Air Data Computer/ACU if
2. Wiring faults. installed.
3. Defective FMS. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Replace FMS.
ANALOG BOARD FAIL Faults on analog data outputs from Replace analog board.
FMS.
ANALOG INST FAIL 1. No power to circuit. 1. Check/reset 26 VAC circuit
breaker(s).
2. 400 Hz (AC) power has failed. 2. 26 VAC voltage/frequency out of
tolerance.
APC INPUT FAIL Aircraft performance computer 1. Check circuit breakers/status of
(APC) is configured, but no signal APC.
has been received for three 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
seconds. (RC-135 Aircraft only) 3. Replace FMS.
APPROACH DATABASE FAIL A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
approach database.
ARPT COMS DATABASE FAIL A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
communications section of the
database.
ARPT NAME DATABASE FAIL A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
geographical airport names
database.
ARINC # FAIL 1. Faults in wiring from/to FMS 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
ARINC inputs/outputs.
AUXILIARY BOARD FAIL 1. Faults on Roll Steering, CSDB 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
or Fuel Flow wiring.
BACKUP DATABASE FAIL A fault in the Database software. Reload FMS Software.
CKLST DATABASES FAIL All checklist databases have Reload checklist database.
hailed.
CLOCK TIMER FAIL The clock timer on the CPU board Replace CPU board.
has failed self-test.
COMP ARPTS DATABASE FAIL The Company Airport database 1. Reload the Company Airports
has failed error checking. database.
2. Replace FMS.
COMP ROUTE DATABASE FAIL The Company Routes database 1. Reload the Company Routes
has failed error checking. database.
2. Replace FMS.
Page 569
34-60-52 3 February 2011

COMP WPTS DATABASE FAIL The Company Waypoints 1. Reload the Company Waypoints
database has failed error database.
checking. 2. Replace FMS.
CONFIG DATA FAILED 1. Wiring faults on configuration 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
module.
2. Defective configuration module 2. Troubleshoot configuration
module.
CONFIG MODULE FAILED 1. Wiring faults on configuration 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
module.
2. Defective configuration module 2. Troubleshoot configuration
module.
CONFIG UPDATE REQUIRED Configuration module and FMS Reconfigure module to correct
configuration data has failed settings.
requiring the FMS to be configured
for installation.
CREW CKLIST DATABASE FAIL The crew notes database has Reload checklist database.
failed.
CROSSFILL FAIL: BAD DATA 1. Wiring faults in crossfill data 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
(Dual or triple installations only) lines between FMS systems.
CROSSFILL FAIL: BUS 1. Wiring faults in crossfill data 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
(Dual or triple installations only) lines between FMS systems.
DATABASE EXPIRED The current date is past the Nav Load current Nav Database
Database expiration date. diskettes.
DATABASE FAIL A part or the entire navigation Reload Nav Database diskettes.
database has failed.
DEMONSTRATION MODE The aircraft identification is Reconfigure system to normal
configured as “DEMO” and sensor mode before flight.
data is simulated internally.
DISCRETE I/O FAIL 1. Faults on wiring to FMS discrete 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
input/output wiring.
DOPPLER FAIL Doppler is selected and has failed. Check status of Doppler sensor
and wiring.
EFIS #n SEL HDG FAIL The FMS has detected that the 1. Verify the MPU/MFD is
CSDB bus from the MPU has gone operational.
inactive or failed. The bus would 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
have had to be active for this 3. Replace FMS.
message to be displayed.
COMP WPTS DATABASE FAIL The Company Waypoints 1. Reload the Company Waypoints
database has failed error database.
checking. 2. Replace FMS.
EMERGENCY CKLIST The emergency checklist database Reload checklist database.
DATABASE FAIL has failed.
Page 570
34-60-52 3 February 2011
ENROUTES COMS DATABASE A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
FAIL enroute communications section of
the database.
ENROUTES DATABASE FAIL The Navigation Database Reload Nav Database diskettes.
containing enroute intersections
has failed.
ERP # FAIL The EFIS radar panel (ERP) Replace the failed ERP.
associated with this FMS has
failed.
FMC BATTERY LOW Defective FMS. Replace FMS.
FMS DATALINK QUEUE FULL Datalink messages are not being Troubleshoot and repair Datalink
sent resulting in a full message system.
queue.
FMS NETWORK COMM FAIL The FMS internally programmed Replace FMS.
Ethernet address has failed. There
is no communication with the DTU.
FMS PART NUMBER MISMATCH The FMS installed has a different Verify correct part number FMS is
part number than the configuration installed. Reconfigure as required.
stored.
FUELFLOW FAIL 1. Defective fuel flow input source. 1. Troubleshoot and repair fuel
This will be indicated if engine is flow input source if necessary.
shut down or flow signal is lost for
four minutes.
2. Faults on fuel flow wiring. 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
FUEL FLOW SELF TEST FAIL 1. Faults on fuel flow input ports. 1. Verify configuration is correct.
GLS # CONFIG MODULE FAIL The GLS #n configuration module 1. Troubleshoot configuration
has failed. module wiring.
2. Replace configuration module.
GLS # FAIL The GPS Landing System LRU Troubleshoot and repair the GLS.
has failed
GLS # VDL FAIL The VHF data link board internal to Troubleshoot the GLS.
the GLS LRU has failed.
GNSS # FAIL 1. Defective or inoperative GNSS 1. Check status of GNSS sensor.
sensor.
2. Wiring faults on GNSS input to 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
FMS.
GPIR # FAILED 1. Defective or inoperative GPIRS 1. Check status of GPIRS sensor.
sensor.
2. Wiring faults on GPIRS input to 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
FMS.
Page 571
34-60-52 3 February 2011
GPS # FAILED 1. GPS position data is missing or 1. Check status of GPS sensor on
invalid or the status label indicates DATA pages.
a FAIL status exists.
2. GPS antenna coax is damaged 2. Check condition of GPS
or disconnected. antenna/coax and repair as
required.
3. Wiring faults on GPS 3. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
input/output wiring.
4. Defective GPS sensor. 4. Replace GPS sensor. If GPS is
internal to the FMS, replace FMS.
HEADING REF FAIL 1. No power to circuit. 1. Check/reset 26 VAC circuit
breaker(s).
2. 400 Hz (AC) power has failed. 2. 26 VAC voltage/frequency out of
tolerance.
3. Wiring faults. 3. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
IC600L HEADING FAIL The left heading source has failed Troubleshoot and repair the left
(Honeywell Primus 1000 only) heading source.
IC600R HEADING FAIL The right heading source has 1. Troubleshoot and repair the
failed (Honeywell Primus 1000 right heading source.
only). 2. Replace FMS
IC600-L BUS FAIL The left IC600 bus has failed 1. Troubleshoot and repair the
(Honeywell Primus 1000 only). Primus 1000 system.
2. Replace the FMS.
IC600-R BUS FAIL The right IC600 bus has failed 1. Troubleshoot and repair the
(Honeywell Primus 1000 only). Primus 1000 system.
2. Replace the FMS.
INVALID ARINC VERSION Two ARINC boards, which do not Replace the FMS.
have the same software version
numbers, are installed in the FMS.
INVALID CONFIGURATION FMS configuration data is Reconfigure module to correct
incorrect. settings.
INVALID FUEL CONFIG The fuel flow sensor configuration Reconfigure to correct settings.
is invalid or incomplete.
IRS # FAIL 1. An inertial reference system 1. Check status of the IRS system.
failure is detected. Repair or replace IRS as required.
2. Faults in input wiring to the
FMS. 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
IRS # HEADING FAIL The system heading source has 1. Check status of the IRS system.
failed. Repair or replace IRS as required.
2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
Page 572
34-60-52 3 February 2011
LCS FAIL # 1. The message displayed where # 1. Check status of the LCS sensor.
is the failure code for the type
failure the LCS has detected as
follows:
1 = LCS Program
Checksum fail.
2 = LCS ARINC Self Test
Fail.
3 = LCS Memory Test Fail
9 = LCS not
communicating with the FMS.
2. Wiring faults in input wiring to 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
the FMS.
LEFT IOC -…FAIL The left input/output concentrator Replace the failed IOC.
(onside or offside) has failed.
MEMORY BANK # FAIL The internal memory bank has Replace the FMS.
failed error checking.
MOT WPT MEMORY FAIL The Mark On Target waypoint Replace the FMS.
memory section has failed power
up and self-test.
NAV DATABASES FAILED All of the navigation databases Reload navigation database.
have failed.
NDB DATABASE FAIL A problem has been found in the Reload navigation database.
NDB database.
NDB NAME DATABASE FAIL An error was detected in the NDB Reload navigation database.
plain language name database.
NEW MAINT LOG EXISTS This message is displayed one Download maintenance log to a
minute after landing when any blank DOS formatted diskette and
diagnostic history event has been view with ASCII text editor for
recorded during the previous flight. analysis.
NONVOLATILE MEMORY FAIL 1. The nonvolatile memory has 1. Recycle power to FMS to
failed the power up test due to attempt to clear. Pilot,
voltage transients corrupting performance and checklist
system RAM. databases will likely be lost and
have to be reloaded as required.
NORMAL CKLIST DATABASE The normal checklist database has Reload checklist database as
FAIL failed (only with Collins Pro Line 4 required.
interface).
OFFSIDE FLAP POS FAILED The offside flap position input to Troubleshoot and repair the flap
the Primus 1000 has failed (LR45 position input to the Primus 1000.
only).
ONSIDE FLAP POS FAILED The onside flap position input to Troubleshoot and repair the flap
the Primus 1000 has failed (LR45 position input to the Primus 1000.
only).
Page 573
34-60-52 3 February 2011
OTHER FMS HEADING FAILED The FMS is using heading from Troubleshoot and repair heading
(dual or triple FMS installations the other FMS and that heading input sources to specified FMS.
only) has failed.
PERF DATABASE FAILED The performance database has Reload performance database.
failed.
PERF DB ID MISMATCH The performance database ID Reload correct performance
entered on the configuration pages database or reconfigure ID code in
does not agree with the configuration module to correct
performance database ID on the data.
disk that is loaded.
PILOT APPR DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined approach
database.
PILOT ARPT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined airport database.
PILOT DATABASES FAILED The database of all pilot defined Reload pilot database.
locations has failed.
PILOT RNWY DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined runway database.
PILOT ROUTE DATABASE The database of pilot defined Reload pilot database.
FAILED routes has failed.
PILOT SID DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined SID database.
PILOT STAR DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined STAR database.
PILOT WPT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined waypoint
database.
n VOLT PWER SUPPLY # FAIL 1. Wiring faults on configuration 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
(n = 3 VDC, 5 VDC, +8 VDC or module.
–8VDC) 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
PROGRAM CHECK FAIL A fault in the FMS Software. Reload the FMS Software.
PRO LINE 21-L BUS FAIL The left PL-21 bus has failed or is 1. Troubleshoot and repair the Pro
invalid (Collins Pro Line 21 EFIS Line 21 system
only). 2. Replace the FMS.
PRO LINE 21-R BUS FAIL The right PL-21 bus has failed or is 1. Troubleshoot and repair the Pro
invalid (Collins Pro Line 21 EFIS Line 21 system
only). 2. Replace the FMS.
RCU # FAIL 1. Wiring faults in RCU to FMS 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
interface.
2. Defective RCU. 2. Replace RCU.
RIGHT IOC-…FAIL The right input/output concentrator Replace the failed IOC.
(onside or offside) has failed.
ROUTES FAIL The route database has failed. Reload pilot database.
Page 574
34-60-52 3 February 2011

RRS DATA BUS FAIL 1. Wiring faults in RRS interface. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
2. Defective RRS. 2. Replace RRS.
RRS (DME, TACAN, VOR) SELF 1. Wiring faults in RRS interface. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
TEST FAIL 2. Defective RRS. 2. Replace RRS.
RRS TUNE BUS FAIL 1. Faults in tune data wiring from 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
FMS to RRS.
RRS (DME, TACAN, VOR) TUNE 1. Faults in tune data wiring from 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
FAIL FMS to RRS.
2. Wiring faults between the RRS 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
and DME, TACAN, and/or VOR.
RTU # FAIL 1. Wiring faults in RTU to FMS 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
interface.
2. Defective RTU. 2. Replace RTU.
RUNWAY DATABASE FAIL The runway database has failed. Reload navigation database.
SBAS DATABASE FAIL A problem has been found in the Reload navigation database.
SBAS approach database. The
FMS will limit SBAS Approach to
the LNAV level of service.
SID DATABASE FAIL The Navigation SID database has Reload navigation database.
failed.
SOFTWARE CONFIG MISMATCH The loaded version of software 1. Reconfigure FMS.
does not match the Software 2. Replace FMS.
Control Number (SCN) stored in
the configuration module.
SPCL MISSION MEMORY FAIL The special missions memory Replace the FMS.
section has failed power up self
test.
STAR DATABASE FAIL The Navigation STAR database Reload navigation database.
has failed.
STEERING FAIL 1. Loss of TAS input to the FMS 1. Check TAS output and repair as
This failure may be reset by from the ADC. required.
positioning the cursor over the 2. Faulty wiring on roll steering 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
ROLL CMD line on DATA page 5 output from FMS.
(General Data) and then pushing 3. Defective FMS. 3. Replace FMS.
[BACK] and then [ENTER].
SYNC CONFIG MISMATCH FMS detects mismatch in one of Check configuration of all FMSs.
the configuration settings (VNAV,
Fuel, Temp Comp, Lateral
Steering, Approach Types,
Heading Select, TGT FPA)
TACAN FAIL Defective TACAN unit. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair
2. Replace TACAN unit.
Page 575
34-60-52 3 February 2011
TAS INVALID 1. Faulty ADC/ACU system. 1. Check ADC/ACU system and
repair as required.
2. Wiring faults in ADC/TAS input 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
to FMS.
TAWS FAIL
TERMINALS DATABASE FAIL The terminal intersection database 1. Reload the NAV database.
has failed error checking. Access 2. Replace the FMS.
to data is denied.
UNILINK FAIL 1. Defective UniLink unit. 1. Replace UniLink unit.
VHF NAME DATABASE FAIL The navigation VHF plain Reload navigation database.
language name database has
failed
VHF NAVAID DATABASE FAIL The navigation navaid database Reload navigation database.
has failed.
VOR TUNE FAIL AN ARINC VOR has not tuned the 1. Attempt to tune another VOR
selected frequency. station.
2. Troubleshoot and repair the
ARINC VOR.
3. Replace the FMS.
WAAS # FAIL A failure has been determined for 1. Check FMS and repair as
the indicated WAAS required.
2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
WAAS/ANALOG FAIL Self-test for WAAS/Analog board 1. If initial installation, troubleshoot
has failed. wiring to Level of Service
annunciators.
2. Replace FMS.
WAAS/ARINC FAIL Self-test for WAAS/ARAINC board Replace FMS.
has failed.
(WAAS) UNCONFIRMED New or changed critical guidance Run WAAS Dynamic Test to enter
GUIDANCE information. the confirmation code for the
guidance information.
(WAAS) UNCONFIRMED New or changed critical guidance Run WAAS Dynamic Test to enter
GUIDANCE MONITOR monitor information. the confirmation code for the
guidance monitor information.
XFILL CONFIG MISMATCH Crossfill data has been sent to and Verify FMS configuration.
FMS that is not configured to
receive this data. This message
alerts the operator that crossfill
data was sent but not accepted.
Page 576
34-60-52 3 February 2011
C. Database Update Error Messages
The system provides notification of errors that occur during the database update process
which prevent successful completion of the database load procedure.
The system provides notification of errors that occur during the database update process
which prevent successful completion of the database load procedure. The use of the term
“DTU” is used to reference the DTU, DTU-100 or SSDTU and the use of the terms “DISK”
displayed on the FMS and “data storage device” are used to reference floppy disk, Zip disk,
USB or Secure Digital data storage devices.
Database Update Error Messages
Trouble Probable Cause Action/Correction
COMMUNICATION ERROR: 1. DTU power interrupted. 1. Restore power to DTU.
DTU STOPPED RESPONDING 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
FMS AND DTU ARE OUT OF 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
SYNC 3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
OPERATION ABORTED BY DTU 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
UNRECOVERABLE ERRORS IN 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
TRANSFERRED DATA 3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
COULD NOT LOAD ALL Attempting to load incorrect Obtain and load correct database.
DATABASES – TOO LARGE FOR database.
AVAILABLE MEMORY
DISK FORMAT ERROR 1. Bad diskette. 1. Replace diskette.
2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Defective DTU. 3. Replace DTU.
DISK IS FULL An attempt is made to write flight Insert a blank formatted disk.
data to the disk and there is not
enough free space available.
DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED The DTU detects that the disk is Reset the write protect window on
write protected. the diskette.
DISK MUST BE EMPTY USE An attempt is made to do a Pilot Use blank formatted diskette to
ANOTHER DISK OR PUSH Database Save and the disk perform pilot database save
FORMAT DISK ON DISK MENU already contains at least one DOS function.
TO DELETE ALL FILES ON THIS file.
DISK
DISK READ OR WRITE ERROR 1. Bad diskette 1. Replace diskette.
2. Electrical noise on DTU data 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
lines.
3. Defective DTU. 3. Replace DTU.
DTU NOT DETECTED 1. DTU is not connected. 1. Check DTU connections and
2. DTU is not turned on and repair as required.
finished with self-test. 2. Turn on the DTU and wait until it
3. Defective DTU. has finished self-test.
3. Replace DTU.
Page 577
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Database Update Error Messages

EMPTY DISK OR NON-FMS DISK The data storage device does not Use correct data storage device.
contain a header file.
INVALID DATA ON DISK Faulty or incorrect data storage Use correct data storage device.
device.
INVALID DISK VERSION 1. The disk version field in the 1. Verify that FMS configuration
header does not agree with the shows correct SCN.
FMS SCN.
2. Faulty or incorrect data storage 2. Use correct data storage
device. device.
LOAD CANCELLED BY 1. Errors in loading. 1. Cancel and restart load.
ANOTHER FMS 2. Defective FMS. 2. Replace FMS.
LOAD CANCELLED 1. Errors in loading. 1. Cancel and restart load.
MISSING OR UNFORMATTED 1. No data storage device in DTU 1. Use correct data storage
DISK device.
2. Incorrect type data storage 2. If appropriate format the
device or is not DOS formatted to diskette or use correct diskette.
correct data size.
MUST FIRST UPDATE NAV An attempt is made to load a NAV Load the NAV standard database
DATABASE BEFORE THIS extended database before the NAV first and then load the NAV
EXTENDED OR COMPANY standard database of the same extended database.
ROUTE DATABASE CAN BE cycle is loaded.
LOADED
MUST FIRST UPDATE NAV An attempt is made to load a pilot Update the FMS to the same
DATBASE BEFORE THIS PLT database that is more recent than navigation database cycle used to
DATABASE CAN BE LOADED the one currently stored. create the pilot database. Then
load the pilot database.
POWER FAIL A power failure has interrupted the Reset power and restart the load
operation. as required.
D. Configuration Verification
Data value fails to match the 1. Configuration Module is 1. Reprogram per System Data
corresponding data value on the programmed incorrectly. Installation section in this manual.
Aircraft Configuration Data Sheets. 2. Mount rack or FMS connector 2. Determine fault and replace.
pins, insulation or wiring is
defective.
3. FMS is defective. 3. Replace FMS.
Page 578
34-60-52 3 February 2011
E. FMS Self-Test Output Checkout
HSI does not show required 1. Configuration is incorrect. 1. Reprogram.
output. 2. FMS to HSI wiring is incorrect 2. Check and correct wiring (see
Troubleshooting Synchro: Wiring
to Receiver).
3. HSI is defective. 3. Replace HSI.
Flight director does not command 1. FMS to autopilot/flight director is 1. Rewire correctly.
10 degree right bank. incorrect.
2. Flight director is defective. 2. Replace the flight director.
F. FMS Output to HSI Checkout

HSI does not show required 1. Configuration is incorrect. 1. Reprogram.
output. 2. FMS to HSI wiring is incorrect. 2. Check and correct wiring (see
Troubleshooting Synchro: Wiring
to Receiver).
3. HSI is defective 3. Replace HSI.
G. DIST/GS Checkout
DIST is not counting down or GS FMS is defective. Replace the FMS.
(Ground Speed) is not approx. 150
knots.
H. HSI From Checkout

HSI does not show FROM 1. HSI is defective. 1. Replace HSI.
indication. 2. FMS is defective. 2. Replace FMS.
I. DIST/BRG Checkout
CDU does not show correct 1. Fault in wiring. 1. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
distance or bearing. 2. CDU is defective. 2. Replace CDU.
3. FMS is defective 3. Replace FMS.
HSI does not show above values. 1. Fault in wiring. 1. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
2. HSI is defective. 2. Replace HSI.
Multifunction display (MFD) does 1. Wiring to MFD is incorrect. 1. Check and correct.
not show correct display. 2. MPU is defective. 2. Replace the MPU.
3. MFD is defective. 3. Replace the MFD.
4. FMS is defective. 4. Replace the FMS.
Page 579
34-60-52 3 February 2011
J. Roll Steering Checkout
Control yoke does not rotate in 1. FMS to autopilot/flight director 1. Rewire.
specified direction. wiring is reversed.
2. Flight guidance equipment is 2. Check out and correct.
defective.
FMS HDG panel annunciator does 1. Annunciator or its wiring is 1. Repair as required.
not illuminate. defective.
K. Input of a Selected Crosstrack Checkout

CDU displays are not as required. FMS is defective. Replace FMS.
MFD display is incorrect. MFD is defective. Take corrective action.
HSI CDI does not deflect as 1. HSI is defective. 1. Replace the HSI.
required. 2. FMS is defective. 2. Replace the FMS.
L. DME Checkout
DME Sensor Status Page does 1. DME sensor or wiring is 1. Determine which and correct.
not show correct distance to DME. defective. 2. Replace FMS.
2. FMS is defective
M. Winds Display Checkout

Winds Display on EHSI does not 1. EHSI drive computer is 1. Replace the EHSI drive
agree with that on CDU. defective. computer.
N. Sensor Checkout
(1) Checkout of Inertial Sensor Status and Heading Displays
CDU does not show FAILED when FMS is defective. Replace FMS.
ISS is off.
CDU does not show ALIGN when 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
MSU is set to Align. 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
CDU does not show NAV when 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
IRS is in NAV mode. 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
CDU HDG IN does not agree with IRS is defective. Replace IRS.
the reference heading.
CDU HDG IN does not agree with 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
the HSI HDG 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
Page 580
34-60-52 3 February 2011
(2) Checkout of LORAN C Sensor
LCS display does not show 1. Required LORAN station(s) is 1. Check station maintenance
expected values. off the air. chart in Navigation Systems
section, Page 601.
2. Sensor system is defective. 2. Repair the sensor system.
(3) Checkout of Sensor Lat/Long Coordinates vs. CDU – Calculated Position

Sensor supplied coordinates do 1. Required VLF station(s) is off 1. Check station maintenance
not agree with CDU calculated the air. chart in Navigation Systems
position. section, Page 601.
2. Sensor system is defective. 2. Repair the sensor system.
Page 581
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Navigation Systems
1. Scheduled Maintenance Periods of Navigation Systems
Maintenance periods are subject to change. Information about DGPS, GPS and LORAN may
be obtained on the Internet at www.navcen.uscg.gov
Additional information about DGPS, GPS and LORAN is available from:
703-313-5900
U.S. Coast Guard Navigation Center
7323 Telegraph Road
Alexandria, VA 22315
A. DGPS Maintenance Schedules
Differential GPS maintenance schedules are not available.
B. GPS Maintenance Schedules
The Global Positioning System has no scheduled maintenance that affects the availability of
the system.
C. LORAN Maintenance Schedules
The LORAN system has no regular schedule for maintenance of its transmitting stations.
Page 601
34-60-52 3 February 2011
Fuel Flow Inputs

1. Fuel Flow Sensors
The FMS accepts up to four fuel flow inputs directly from the engine fuel flowmeter sensors.
Sensor types which may be operated with the FMS include but are not limited to the
following:
I.D.C. fuel flow indicators
Canadian Marconi indicators
Eldec Flowmeter Transmitters
Ragen
X & O Engineering Flowmeter Transmitters
Gull Airborne
Ametek fuel flow indicators
Howell fuel flow indicators
Simmons Precision transmitters
General Electric AC voltage pickoff
Learjet/E.T. Fuel Management Computer (Pulse). All Learjet models require
J.E.T. S.B. #542-1158-7
Learjet DC Fuel Management
Intertechnique Totalizer
NOTE: For information on Aircraft Type vs. Fuel Flowmeter Type Reference Chart and
Fuel Flow Scaling, refer to the WAAS FMS Configuration Manual, Report No. 34-
61-01.
NOTE: For wiring diagrams and other specific information, refer to the WAAS FMS
Interface Manual, Report No. 34-60-53.
Page 701
34-60-52 3 February 2011

Uns 1 LW

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Uns 1 LW

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uns 1 LW

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNS-1Lw

Flight Management System

The information contained herein is subject to Export Administration Regulations (“EAR”),

This publication is available at www.uasc.com.

©2007, 2011 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION

3260 East Universal Way

Original 27 August 2007 27 August 2007 UASC

Record of Temporary Changes

1 26 April 2011 26 April 2011 / UASC

List of Effective Pages

Title Page 3 Feb/11 25 3 Feb/11

208 3 Feb/11 316 3 Feb/11

365 3 Feb/11 531 3 Feb/11

Navigation Systems 601 3 Feb/11

Fuel Flow Inputs 701 3 Feb/11

UNS-1Lw FMS Software Control Numbers (SCN)

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-1

Description and Operation

UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL FGS Display

UNS-1LW Fuel Flow

Dual multi-sensor FMS installations which integrate GPS/WAAS sensors in the

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-12

Power/Display Control Page

Parallax Adjustment Page

Confirm Off Page

(2) Flash Memory

(1) ERP Radar Controls

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-13

Table 2-6 Labels and Messages (Modified)

(4) Paragraph 2.2.1.3.16 - Parallel Offsets

Universal’s philosophy is that situational awareness is best served by referencing the

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-9

(6) Paragraph 2.1 – General Requirements (LP Approach Limitation)

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-10

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-4

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-14

Conditions DO-160E Category

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-5

<Name of Applicant> AFM Supplement for <Aircraft Model>

AIRCRAFT MAKE: ___________________________________________

SHEET REV DESCRIPTION APPROVED

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-16

C. Vertical Navigation Approval

Temporary Change No. 34.60.52-11

(2) Enroute Flight Director and Autopilot Operation

Basic UNS-1Lw P/N

CPU Memory Board = 1

Basic Part Number

H. 4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-X-XXX)

I. Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU)

Future Use Variable = 1

Basic Part Number for Cockpit DTU-100

K. Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU-100)

Basic Part Number for Portable DTU-100

L. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)

Basic Part Number for Cockpit SSDTU

Basic Part Number for Portable SSDTU

B. 5-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1018-X-XXX)